JP6799338B2 - Game table - Google Patents

Description

The present invention relates to a game table represented by a ball game machine (pachinko machine), a rotating body game machine (slot machine), an enclosed game machine, or a medalless slot machine.

Conventionally, there is a game table that can be profitable by an operation navigation and is controlled to an advantageous state that is advantageous to the player (see, for example, Patent Document 1). On the other hand, in recent years, in order to suppress gambling, a game table with restrictions on advantageous states is being recommended. As such a game table, for example, it is conceivable to set an upper limit number of times in an advantageous state and regulate the addition of the number of games just before the upper limit number of times.

Japanese Unexamined Patent Publication No. 2005-296354

However, in the conventional game table, if the player does not draw the rare role and does not add it, it is not known whether it is simply missed in the addition lottery or it is an addition regulation, so when the player feels that it is an addition regulation. After that, the advantageous state became like a dead rubber game, and after the advantageous state continued to some extent, there was a risk that the player could not play the game with a sense of expectation.

An object of the present invention is to provide a game table characterized by a notification method.

The game counter according to the present invention includes an operating means, a control means for shifting to one of a plurality of states including a normal state and an advantageous state, and a display means capable of displaying a plurality of types of displays. The game counter is configured to be able to notify the operation information of the operation means, and the advantageous state is more advantageous than the normal state in terms of notification of the operation information (hereinafter, referred to as “operation navigation”). It is a state, and the operation navigation is a navigation about a push order combination, includes a first counter regarding the advantageous state, and a count value of the first counter each time one game is played in the advantageous state. (Hereinafter referred to as "first count value") is updatable, and one of a plurality of end conditions including the first end condition and the second end condition is satisfied. In addition, it is configured to shift from the advantageous state to the normal state, and the first end condition is a condition that can be satisfied when the first count value becomes the first specific value. There is, in the advantageous state, it is configured to be able to shift to any one of a plurality of advantageous gaming states, and one of the plurality of advantageous gaming states is the first advantageous gaming state. , The first advantageous gaming state is an advantageous gaming state in which the operation navigation can be executed, includes a second counter for the first advantageous gaming state, and one game is performed in the first advantageous gaming state. The count value of the second counter (hereinafter referred to as "second count value") can be updated each time it is played, and the push order combination is not won in the first advantageous gaming state. Even when a game is played, the second count value is configured to be updatable, and the first game in which the number of bets on the game medium is the first number and the number of bets on the game medium are The second game, which is a second number, is configured to be feasible, and the second number is a number different from the first number, and in the advantageous state, more than the second game. The first game is more advantageous to the player, and one of the plurality of types of displays is a display including an image showing a certain value (hereinafter, referred to as "first display". ), And one of the plurality of types of displays is a display including an image representing the updated value of the certain value (hereinafter, referred to as “second display”), and the certain value is described above. The value is a value related to the second count value, and when the execution of the first game is started after the first display is displayed in the first advantageous game state. Is configured so that the count values of both the first count value and the second count value are updated so that the second display can be displayed in the first game, and the first advantageous game When the execution of the second game is started after the first display is displayed in the state, the first count value of the first count value and the second count value is started. Only is updated so that the second display is not displayed in the second game, and is acquired by the player based on the number of game media used and the number of game media paid out in the advantageous state. A third counter for counting the total number of gaming media is provided, and each time one game is played in the advantageous state, the count value of the third counter (hereinafter, referred to as "third count value"). ) Is updatable, and the second end condition is a condition that can be satisfied when the third count value reaches the second specific value, and the first condition in the advantageous state. Regardless of which of the game and the second game is executed, the third count value can be updated based on the result of the game, and a plurality of types of set values can be set. A setting value setting means capable of setting any one of the setting values is provided, and the display of one of the plurality of types of displays is a display suggesting the set value to be set (hereinafter, "third". ”), And when the first game is performed in the advantageous state, the third display may be displayed, and the third display may be displayed in the advantageous state. The game table is configured so that the third display is not displayed when the second game is played.

Further, the game counter according to the present invention includes an operating means, a game state setting means capable of setting any one of a plurality of states including a normal state and an advantageous state, and a display capable of displaying a plurality of types of displays. A game counter comprising means, a notification means capable of notifying operation information of the operation means, and a setting value setting means capable of setting any one of a plurality of types of setting values. An advantageous game state control means capable of executing control regarding an advantageous state, a plurality of counters including a first counter, a second counter, and a third counter regarding the advantageous state, and a first game in order to start one game. The advantageous state comprises a bet number setting means capable of setting any bet number of a plurality of bets including one bet number and a second bet number smaller than the first bet number. It is a state more advantageous than the normal state with respect to the notification of the operation information (hereinafter, referred to as "operation navigation"), and the operation navigation is a navigation for a push order combination, and in the advantageous state, the first The game based on the number of bets (hereinafter, referred to as "first game") is a game that is more advantageous to the player than the game based on the second number of bets (hereinafter, referred to as "second game"). The advantageous game state control means is a means capable of executing control to update the count value of the first counter (hereinafter, referred to as “first count value”) each time one game is played in the advantageous state. When the end condition of one of a plurality of end conditions including the first end condition and the second end condition is satisfied, the game state setting means finishes the setting of the advantageous state and said. The first end condition is a means that can set a normal state, and the first end condition is a condition that can be satisfied when the first count value becomes the first specific value, and the advantageous game state control means , In the advantageous state, it is possible to execute control for setting any advantageous gaming state among a plurality of advantageous gaming states including the first advantageous gaming state, and one game is performed in the first advantageous gaming state. It is a means capable of executing control to update the count value of the second counter (hereinafter, referred to as “second count value”) each time it is played, and the first advantageous gaming state is the operation navigation. The second count value can be updated even when a game that is a feasible advantageous game state and the push order combination is not won in the first advantageous game state is performed. , The display means includes a display indicating a certain value as one of the plurality of types of displays (hereinafter, "" "First display". ), A display including an image showing the updated value of the certain value (hereinafter, referred to as "second display"), and a display suggesting the set value (hereinafter, "third display"). Is a means capable of displaying "is displayed", the certain value is a value related to the second count value, and after the first display is displayed in the first advantageous gaming state, When the execution of the first game is started, the count values of both the first count value and the second count value are updated by the advantageous game state control means, and in the first game, the count values are updated. When the second display is displayable by the display means and the execution of the second game is started, the first count value and the second count are displayed by the advantageous game state control means. Only the first count value of the values is updated so that the display means does not display the second display in the second game, and the third counter is in the advantageous state. It is a counter that counts the total number of game media acquired by the player based on the number of game media used and the number of game media paid out in the above-mentioned advantageous game state control means, and one game is performed in the advantageous state. It is a means capable of executing control to update the count value of the third counter (hereinafter, referred to as “third count value”) each time it is executed, and the second end condition is the third count value. Is a condition that can be satisfied when the second specific value is reached, and the advantageous game state control means has executed either the first game or the second game in the advantageous state. Even in this case, it is a means capable of executing control to update the third count value based on the result of the game, and when the first game is performed in the advantageous state, the display When the third display is displayed by the display means when the second game is performed in the advantageous state, the third display may be displayed by the means. It is a game table characterized by being configured so that there is no such thing.

According to the present invention, it is possible to realize a game table having a feature in the notification method.

It is a perspective view which shows the appearance of the slot machine which concerns on Embodiment 1 of this invention. It is a front view in the state which the front door of the slot machine which concerns on Embodiment 1 of this invention is opened. It is a circuit block diagram of the control part of the slot machine which concerns on Embodiment 1 of this invention. (A) It is a figure which shows the arrangement of the symbols applied to each reel of the slot machine which concerns on Embodiment 1 of this invention developed in a plane. (B) It is a figure which shows the winning line of the slot machine which concerns on Embodiment 1 of this invention. (A) It is a figure which shows the type of the winning combination (including the operating combination), the symbol combination corresponding to each winning combination, and the operation or payout of each winning combination in the three-card betting game. (B) It is a figure which shows the type of the winning combination (including the operating combination), the symbol combination corresponding to each winning combination, and the operation or payout of each winning combination in the two-card betting game. (A) It is a transition diagram of the game state of the main control unit 300 of the slot machine 100. (B) It is a transition diagram of the game state of the AT system of the main control unit 300 of the slot machine 100. (A) It is a figure which shows the lottery table used for the internal lottery processing of a winning combination. (B) It is a figure explaining the correct operation order of the push order combination of the slot machine which concerns on Embodiment 1 of this invention. It is a figure which associates the display data with the lighting mode of the payout number display 127. (A) The image of the effect table provided in the first sub-control unit 400 is illustrated. (B) It is a figure which showed an example of the judge state production table. (C) It is a figure which showed an example of the LMT state production table. (D) is a figure which showed the modification of the LMT state production table. Main control unit It is a flowchart which shows the flow of the main processing. It is a flowchart which shows the flow of the timer interrupt process of a main control part. (A) It is a flowchart of the main process executed by the CPU 404 of the first sub-control unit 400. (B) It is a flowchart of the command reception interrupt processing of the 1st sub-control unit 400. (C) It is a flowchart of the timer interrupt process of the 1st sub-control unit 400. (A) It is a flowchart of the main process executed by the CPU 504 of the second sub-control unit 500. (B) It is a flowchart of the command reception interrupt processing of the 2nd sub-control unit 500. (C) It is a flowchart of the timer interrupt process of the 2nd sub-control unit 500. (D) It is a flowchart of the image control processing of the 2nd sub-control unit 500. (A) is a flowchart showing in detail the flow of the bet number setting / start operation acceptance process in step S102 of FIG. (B) It is a flowchart which shows in detail the flow of the high navigation state update process of step S201 of FIG. 14 (a). (A) is a flowchart which shows in detail the flow of the effect state control process A of step S106 of FIG. (B) It is a flowchart which shows the flow of each game common processing in step S401 of FIG. 15A in detail. (A) It is a flowchart which shows the flow of the low navigation state processing A of the step S404 of FIG. 17A in detail. FIG. 5 is a flowchart showing in detail the flow of the high navigation state processing A in step S405 of FIG. 15A. It is a flowchart which shows in detail the flow of the high navigation state common processing A of step S801 of FIG. It is a flowchart which shows in detail the flow of the normal state processing A of step S803 of FIG. It is a flowchart which shows in detail the flow of the finalized notification state processing A of step S805 of FIG. It is a flowchart which shows the flow of AT1 state processing A of step S807 of FIG. 17 in detail. It is a flowchart which shows in detail the flow of the judge state processing A of step S809 of FIG. It is a flowchart which shows in detail the flow of AT2 state processing A of step S811 of FIG. It is a flowchart which shows in detail the flow of the pull-back state processing A of step S813 of FIG. It is a flowchart which shows in detail the flow of the instruction information setting process of step S814 of FIG. It is a flowchart which shows in detail the flow of the effect state control process B of step S113 of FIG. It is a flowchart which shows the flow of the high navigation state processing B of step S1704 of FIG. 26 in detail. It is a flowchart which shows the flow of the normal state processing B of step S1802 of FIG. 27 in detail. It is a flowchart which shows in detail the flow of the finalized notification state processing B of step S1804 of FIG. 27. It is a flowchart which shows the flow of AT1 state processing B of step S1806 of FIG. 27 in detail. It is a flowchart which shows the flow of the judge state processing B of step S1808 of FIG. 27 in detail. It is a flowchart which shows the flow of AT2 state processing B of step S1810 of FIG. 27 in detail. It is a flowchart which shows the flow of the pull-back state processing B of step S1812 of FIG. 27 in detail. It is a flowchart which shows the flow of the LMT state processing B of step S1813 of FIG. 27 in detail. It is a flowchart which shows in detail the flow of the high navigation state end processing of step S114 of FIG. It is a flowchart which shows the flow of the normal state processing A which concerns on modification 1 in detail. It is a flowchart which shows the flow of the normal state processing A which concerns on modification 2 in detail. It is a flowchart which shows in detail the flow of the finalized notification state processing A which concerns on modification 1. It is a flowchart which shows the flow of the finalized notification state processing A which concerns on modification 2 in detail. It is a flowchart which shows in detail the flow of the finalized notification state processing A which concerns on modification 3. It is a flowchart which shows in detail the flow of the finalized notification state processing B which concerns on modification 3. It is a figure which shows the type of the winning combination (including the operating combination), the symbol combination corresponding to each winning combination, and the operation or payout of each winning combination. (A) It is a transition diagram of the game state of the main control unit 300 of the slot machine which concerns on the modification of Embodiment 1 of this invention. (B), (c) is a transition diagram of the game state of the AT system of the main control unit 300 of the slot machine according to the modified example of the first embodiment of the present invention. (A) It is a figure which shows the lottery table used for the internal lottery processing of a winning combination. (B) It is a figure explaining the correct answer operation order of the push order combination of this embodiment. It is a figure which associates the display data with the lighting mode of the payout number display 127. It is a flowchart which shows the flow of the main control part main processing which concerns on the modification of Embodiment 1, and is the figure which corresponds to the main control part main processing which concerns on Embodiment 1 shown in FIG. (A) It is a flowchart which shows the flow of the effect state control process A which concerns on the modification of Embodiment 1, and is the figure corresponding to the effect state control process A which concerns on Embodiment 1 shown in FIG. 15 (a). (B) It is a flowchart which shows the flow of each game common processing which concerns on the modification of Embodiment 1, and is the figure corresponding to every game common processing which concerns on Embodiment 1 shown in FIG. 15 (b). It is a flowchart which shows the flow of the high navigation state processing A which concerns on the modification of Embodiment 1, and is the figure which corresponds to the high navigation state processing A which concerns on Embodiment 1 shown in FIG. It is a flowchart which shows the flow of the production process which concerns on the modification of Embodiment 1. It is a flowchart which shows the flow of the effect state control process B which concerns on the modification of Embodiment 1, and is the figure which corresponds to the effect state control process B which concerns on Embodiment 1 shown in FIG. It is a flowchart which shows the flow of the high navigation state processing B which concerns on the modification of Embodiment 1, and is the figure which corresponds to the high navigation state processing B which concerns on Embodiment 1 shown in FIG. In the high navigation state, when the production state shifts in the order of AT2 state → judge state → LMT state (limit state) and then shifts to the normal state in the low navigation state, the counter when only a 3-card betting game is played. It is a figure which showed an example of the update display. In the high navigation state, when the production state shifts in the order of AT2 state → judge state → LMT state (limit state) and then shifts to the normal state in the low navigation state, both the 3-card bet game and the 2-card bet game are played. It is a figure which showed an example of the update display of the counter when it performed. (A) It is a figure which showed an example of the update display of a counter when a judge effect is not performed by a two-card betting game. (B) It is a figure which showed an example of the update display of the counter when a judge effect and an ED effect are not performed by a two-card betting game. In the high navigation state, when the production state shifts from the judge state to the LMT state (limit state) and then to the normal state in the low navigation state, the ED production and freeze production when only the 3-card betting game is performed. It is a figure which showed an example. (A) In the high navigation state, when the production state shifts from the judge state to the LMT state (limit state) and then shifts to the normal state in the low navigation state, a 3-card bet game and a 2-card bet game are performed. It is a figure which showed an example of the ED production and the freeze production at the time. FIG. 5 is a diagram showing a modified example of the setting suggestion effect described with reference to FIG. 56 (a). It is a figure which showed an example of the setting suggestion effect at the time of continuing a two-card betting game in a judge state of a high navigation state. (A) It is a figure which showed an example of the 2nd freeze effect at the time of performing a three-card betting game. (B) It is a figure which showed an example of the 2nd freeze effect at the time of performing a two-card betting game in the middle of the AT2 state. It is a figure which showed an example of the ED effect at the time of performing a three-card betting game. (A) It is a figure which showed an example of the ED effect at the time of shifting to the LMT state after performing a two-card betting game in a normal state. (B) It is a figure which showed an example of the ED effect at the time of continuing a two-card betting game in a normal state. (A) It is a figure which showed an example of the ED effect performed after a BB game. (B) It is a figure which showed an example of the ED effect performed during the internal winning of BB. (A) It is a figure which showed the flow of the production when the interlocking production progresses normally. (B) It is a figure which showed the flow of the production when the interlocking production does not proceed normally. (A) It is a figure which showed the flow of the effect when the ED effect is started while the interlocking effect does not proceed normally. (B) It is a figure which showed an example of the interlocking effect at the time of continuing a two-card betting game in a judge state. It is a figure which showed the interlocking effect and the modification. FIG. (A) is a diagram showing an example of the flow of the production when a three-card betting game is performed when the production state shifts from the AT2 state to the judge state in the high navigation state. (B) It is a figure which showed an example of the flow of the production when the two-card betting game is performed when the production state shifts from the AT2 state to the judge state in the high navigation state. (A) It is a figure which showed the modification of the flow of the production at the time of performing a three-card betting game when the production state shifts from the AT2 state to the judge state in the high navigation state. (B) It is a figure which showed the modification of the flow of the production when the two-card betting game is performed when the production state shifts from the AT2 state to the judge state in the high navigation state. It is a figure which showed the specific example of the flow of an effect including a specific display. It is a figure which showed an example of the flow of the production when three-card game is performed in a high navigation state, it reaches the ceiling, and the production state shifts in the order of a normal state-> a confirmed notification state-> AT1 state. It is a figure which showed an example of the flow of the production when the two-card betting game is performed in the high navigation state, the ceiling is not reached, and the production state is maintained in the normal state. It is a figure which showed an example of the flow of the production when three-card game and two-card betting game are performed in a high navigation state and reach the ceiling, and the production state shifts in the order of normal state → confirmed notification state → AT1 state. .. It is a figure which showed an example of the flow of the production in the case where a 3-card game and a 2-card betting game are performed in a high navigation state, and the game shifts to the LMT state without reaching the ceiling. It is a figure which showed an example of the flow of the production in the case where a 3-card game and a 2-card betting game are performed in a high navigation state, and the game shifts to a low navigation state without reaching the ceiling. It is a figure which showed an example of the flow of the production when a three-card game and a two-card bet game are performed in a definite notification state of a high navigation state, and the promotion counter is not updated. It is a figure which showed an example of the flow of the production when the operation navigation is not performed in the confirmation notification state of a high navigation state. It is a figure which showed an example of the flow of the production when the AT1 type is promoted in the definite notification state of a high navigation state. It is a figure which showed an example of the flow of the production when it did not reach the ceiling in the definite notification state of a high navigation state. It is a figure which showed an example of the flow of the production when it reached the ceiling in the definite notification state of a high navigation state. (A) It is a figure which showed an example of the ED effect at the time of performing a three-card betting game in the LMT state. (B) It is a figure which showed an example of the ED effect at the time of performing a two-card betting game in the LMT state. It is a figure which showed the modification of the specific display shown in FIG. 67 (D). It is a figure which showed the outline of the invention 1-1 of this application. It is a figure which showed the outline of the present invention 1-2. It is a figure which showed the outline of the present invention 1-3. It is a figure which showed the outline of the present invention 1-4. It is a figure which showed the outline of the present invention 1-5. It is a figure which showed the outline of the present invention 1-6. It is a figure which showed the outline of the present invention 1-7. It is a figure which showed the outline of the present invention 1-8. It is a figure which showed the outline of the present invention 1-9. (A) It is a flowchart which shows the flow of AT2 state processing A which concerns on Embodiment 2, and is the figure which corresponds to AT2 state processing A which concerns on Embodiment 1 shown in FIG. 23. (B) It is a figure which showed an example of the lottery table. (A) It is a flowchart which shows the flow of the judge state process B which concerns on Embodiment 2, and is the figure which corresponds to the judge state process B which concerns on Embodiment 1 shown in FIG. 23. (B) It is a figure which showed an example of the AT2 initial number lottery table. (C) It is a figure which showed an example of the lottery table. It is a flowchart which shows the flow of AT2 state processing B which concerns on Embodiment 2, and is the figure which corresponds to AT2 state processing B which concerns on Embodiment 1 shown in FIG. 32. (A) It is a flowchart which shows the flow of the pull-back state process B which concerns on Embodiment 2, and is the figure which corresponds to the pull-back state process B which concerns on Embodiment 1 shown in FIG. 33. (B) It is a figure which showed the transition example of the AT state in the high navigation state. (A) It is a figure which showed the flow of the effect when the effect state shifts to the normal state of a low navigation state after shifting in the order of AT2 state-> judge state-> pull-back state in a high navigation state. (B) It is a figure which showed the flow of the effect when the effect state shifts to the normal state of a low navigation state after shifting from the AT2 state to the LMT state in the high navigation state. (A) It is a figure which showed the flow of the effect when the effect state shifts in the order of AT2 state-> judge state-> pull-back state-> AT2 state in the high navigation state, and is the figure which showed the flow of the effect described with reference to FIG. The continuation is shown. (B) In the high navigation state, the production state shifts in the order of AT2 state → LMT state, then shifts to the normal state of the low navigation state, shifts to the high navigation state again, and the production state shifts to the normal state → the confirmed notification state → It is a figure which showed the flow of the effect at the time of transition in the order of the AT1 state, and shows the continuation of the effect explained with reference to FIG. 92 (b). (A) It is a figure which showed an example of the notification at the time of establishment of a combination in the AT2 state. (B) It is a figure which showed an example of the notification at the time of establishment of a combination in the LMT state. (A) It is a figure which showed the flow of the effect at the time of correcting the AT2 initial number of times. (B) It is a figure which showed the flow of the effect in the case of displaying the remaining game number in the AT2 state. (B) It is a figure which showed the flow of the effect in the case of displaying the remaining game number in the AT2 state. (A) It is a figure which showed the flow of the effect when the result is displayed after the transition of the AT2 state. (B) It is a figure which showed the flow of the effect when the result display is not performed after the end of the AT2 state, and is the figure which corresponds to FIG. 95 (a). It is a figure which showed the outline of the present invention 2-1. It is a figure which showed the outline of the present invention 2-2. It is a figure which showed the outline of the present invention 2-3. It is a figure which showed the state transition of a PUSH button operation, a cross key operation, a closing operation, and a lever operation. (A) It is a figure which showed an example of various operations for switching the display of a normal screen and a demo screen in chronological order. (B) It is a figure which showed an example of various operations in the case of performing volume adjustment using a setting screen in time series. (C) It is a figure which showed an example of various operations in the case of performing volume adjustment without displaying a setting screen in time series. It is the figure which showed the example of (D), (E) and other various operations in time series. It is a figure which showed the character selection operation in chronological order when the production state shifts from a judge state to an AT2 state in a high navigation state. (A) It is a figure which showed Example 5 of the character selection operation in time series. (B) It is a figure which showed Example 6 of the character selection operation in time series. (A) It is a figure which showed Example 6 of the character selection operation in time series. (B) It is a figure which showed Example 7 of a character selection operation in time series. (C) It is a figure which showed Example 8 of a character selection operation in time series. (A) It is a figure which showed the modification 1 of the character selection operation in time series. (B) It is a figure which showed the modification 2 of the character selection operation in time series. It is a figure which showed the outline of the present invention 3-1. It is a figure which showed the outline of the invention 3-2 of this application.

Hereinafter, embodiments of the present invention will be described with reference to the drawings.

[Embodiment 1]
The slot machine of the present embodiment starts rotation when a predetermined number of game media are loaded and a plurality of reels each having a plurality of types of symbols receive a predetermined rotation start instruction operation. Based on the acceptance of the rotation start instruction operation, the winning or not of the internal winning of a plurality of types of winning combinations is determined by lottery, and each of the plurality of reels individually stops the rotation by receiving a predetermined rotation stop instruction operation. If the conditions determined by the winning combination based on the result of the lottery and the combination of symbols when the plurality of reels are stopped match the predetermined payout conditions, the game medium is paid out and the game ends, and if they do not match, the game medium is used. It is a game table that advances a series of games that end without paying out.

<Overall configuration>
First, the overall configuration of the slot machine 100 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 1 is an external perspective view of the slot machine 100 as viewed from the front side (player side).

The slot machine 100 shown in FIG. 1 corresponds to an example of the game console of the present invention, and includes a main body 101 and a front door 102 that is attached to the front of the main body 101 and can be opened and closed with respect to the main body 101. .. Inside the center of the main body 101, three reels (left reel 110, middle reel 111, right reel 112) in which a plurality of types of symbols are arranged on the outer peripheral surface (not shown) are stored and rotate inside the slot machine 100. It is configured so that it can be done. These reels 110 to 112 are rotationally driven by a driving device such as a stepping motor.

In the present embodiment, an appropriate number of patterns are printed on the strip-shaped members at equal intervals, and the strip-shaped members are attached to a predetermined circular tubular frame material to form each reel 110-112. When viewed from the player, approximately three symbols on the reels 110 to 112 are displayed in the vertical direction from the symbol display window 113, so that a total of nine symbols can be seen. Then, by rotating each reel 110-112, the combination of symbols that can be seen by the player changes. That is, each reel 110 to 112 functions as a display device that variably displays a combination of a plurality of types of symbols. As such a display device, an electronic image display device such as a liquid crystal display device can be adopted in addition to the reel. Further, in the present embodiment, three reels are provided inside the center of the slot machine 100, but the number of reels and the installation position of the reels are not limited to this.

On the back surface of each of the reels 110 to 112, a backlight (not shown) for illuminating each symbol displayed on the symbol display window 113 is arranged. It is desirable that the backlight is shielded for each symbol so that the individual symbols can be evenly illuminated. Inside the slot machine 100, an optical sensor (index sensor; not shown) including a light emitting unit and a light receiving unit is provided in the vicinity of each reel 110 to 112, and the light emitting unit of this optical sensor is provided. A light-shielding piece of a certain length provided on the reel passes between the light receiving portion and the light receiving portion. Based on the detection result of this sensor, the position of the symbol on the reel in the rotation direction is determined, and the reels 110 to 112 are stopped so that the target symbol is displayed on the winning line. The winning line indicator lamp 120 is a lamp indicating a valid winning line 114.

The notification lamp 123 informs the player that, for example, a specific winning combination (specifically, a special role (bonus)) has been internally won in the winning combination internal lottery described later, or that the bonus game is in progress. It is a lamp that informs you. The notification lamp 123 of the present embodiment lights up after the bonus notification for notifying the confirmation of the bonus until the end of the bonus game. The notification lamp 123 may be turned on before the bonus notification (at the time of the bonus or immediately before the bonus notification). The game medal insertable lamp 124 is a lamp for notifying the player that the game medal can be inserted. The re-game lamp 122 informs the player that the current game can be re-played (no need to insert a medal) when the re-game, which is one of the winning roles in the previous game, is won. It is a lamp. The reel panel lamp 128 is a lamp for directing.

The bet buttons 130 to 132 are buttons for inserting a predetermined number of medals (called credits) electronically stored in the slot machine 100. In the present embodiment, a maximum of three bets are inserted each time the bet button 130 is pressed, two are inserted when the bet button 131 is pressed, and three are inserted when the bet button 132 is pressed. It has become so. Hereinafter, the bet button 132 is also referred to as a MAX bet button. The game medal insertion lamp 129 lights a number of lamps corresponding to the number of inserted medals, and when a specified number of medals are inserted, the game starts to notify that the game can be started. The lamp 121 lights up.

The medal insertion slot 141 is an insertion slot for the player to insert a medal at the start of the game. That is, the medals can be inserted electronically by pressing the bet buttons 130 to 132, or the actual medals can be inserted (insertion operation) from the medal insertion slot 141, and the insertion means that both are included. is there.

The stored number display 125 is a display for displaying the number of medals electronically stored in the slot machine 100. The game information display 126 is a display for displaying various internal information (for example, the number of medals paid out during a bonus game) numerically. The payout number display 127 is a display for displaying the number of medals to be paid out to the player as a result of winning some winning combination. In the present embodiment, the stored number display 125, the game information display 126, and the payout number display 127 are composed of a 7-segment (SEG) display. The payout number display 127 of the present embodiment also functions as an operation navigation execution device for notifying information regarding the stop operation (for example, the operation order and operation timing of the stop buttons 137 to 139).

The start lever 135 is a lever-type switch for starting the rotation of the reels 110 to 112. That is, when a desired number of medals are inserted into the medal insertion slot 141 or the bet buttons 130 to 132 are operated to operate the start lever 135, the reels 110 to 112 start rotating. The operation on the start lever 135 is called the game start operation.

The stop button unit 136 is provided with stop buttons 137 to 139. The stop buttons 137 to 139 are button-type push switches for individually stopping the reels 110 to 112 that have started to rotate by operating the start lever 135, and are provided corresponding to the reels 110 to 112. .. More specifically, the left reel 110 can be stopped by operating the left stop button 137, the middle reel 111 can be stopped by operating the middle stop button 138, and the right stop button 139 can be stopped. The right reel 112 can be stopped by operating it.

Hereinafter, the operation for the stop buttons 137 to 139 is referred to as a stop operation, the first stop operation is referred to as a first stop operation, the next stop operation is referred to as a second stop operation, and the last stop operation is referred to as a third stop operation. The reel to be operated may be referred to as a first stop reel, the reel to be operated to a second stop may be referred to as a second stop reel, and the reel to be operated to a third stop may be referred to as a third stop reel.

Further, the order in which the stop buttons 137 to 139 for stopping all the rotating reels 110 to 112 are stopped is referred to as an operation order or a pressing order. The operation order in which the first stop reel is the left reel 110 and the stop operation is called "forward push operation order" or simply "forward push", and the operation order in which the first stop reel is the right reel 112 is called "forward push operation order". It is called "reverse push operation sequence" or simply "reverse push". A light emitting body may be provided inside each of the stop buttons 137 to 139, and when the stop buttons 137 to 139 can be operated, the light emitting body can be turned on to notify the player.

The high navigation state lamp 190 is a lamp that lights up when the game state of the AT system of the main control unit 300 is in the high navigation state described later. The player can grasp that the high navigation state is in the high navigation state from the lighting mode of the high navigation state lamp 190.

The medal return button 133 is a button for removing medals by pressing the button when the inserted medals are jammed. The settlement button 134 is a button for settlement of medals and bet medals electronically stored in the slot machine 100 and ejecting them from the medal payout outlet 155. The door key hole 140 is a hole for inserting a key for unlocking the front door 102 of the slot machine 100. The medal payout outlet 155 is a payout exit for paying out medals.

At the bottom of the stop button unit 136, a title panel 162 for displaying the model name and attaching various certificate stamps is provided. At the bottom of the title panel 162, a medal payout outlet 155 and a medal tray 161 are provided.

The sound hole 181 is a hole for outputting the sound of the speaker provided inside the slot machine 100 to the outside. The side lamps 144 provided on the left and right parts of the front door 102 are decorative lamps for enlivening the game. An effect device 160 is arranged on the upper part of the front door 102, and a sound hole 143 is provided on the upper part of the effect device 160. The effect device 160 includes a shutter (shielding device) 163 composed of two right shutters 163a and a left shutter 163b that can be opened and closed in the horizontal direction, and a liquid crystal display device 157 (not shown) arranged behind the shutter 163. When the right shutter 163a and the left shutter 163b are opened horizontally in front of the liquid crystal display device 157, the display screen of the liquid crystal display device 157 (not shown) is displayed in front of the slot machine 100 (game). It has a structure that appears on the person's side).

The liquid crystal display device (effect image display device) 157 of the present embodiment also functions as an operation navigation execution device that notifies information regarding a stop operation (for example, the operation order and operation timing of the stop buttons 137 to 139).

In addition, even if it is not a liquid crystal display device, it may be configured to be able to display various production images and various game information. For example, a multi-segment display (7-segment display), a dot matrix display, an organic EL display, and a plasma display. , A reel (drum), or a display device including a projector and a screen. Further, the display screen has a square shape, and the entire display screen is configured to be visible to the player. In the case of the present embodiment, the display screen is rectangular, but may be square. Further, it is also possible to provide an ornament (not shown) on the periphery of the display screen so that the display screen looks irregular as a result of a part of the periphery of the display screen being hidden by the ornament. In the case of this embodiment, the display screen is a flat surface, but may have a curved surface.

The notification lamp 123 and the high navigation state lamp 190 are designed to notify predetermined information by causing the lamp to emit light, but the notification mode is not limited to the light emission of the lamp. For example, predetermined information may be displayed using a part of the area of the liquid crystal display device (in the case of a slot machine having a full liquid crystal display, an area near reels 110 to 112 may be used). Hereinafter, when the notification lamp 123 or the high navigation state lamp 190 is described as lighting, it is intended to include notification by another effect device (for example, a display device) having the same function.

<Inside the housing>
FIG. 2 is a front view showing the slot machine 100 in a state where the front door 102 is opened. The main body 101 is a box body that is surrounded by a top plate 261, a left side plate 260, a right side plate 260, a bottom plate 264, and a back plate 242, and opens to the front. Inside the main body 101, a main control board storage case 210 that houses the main control board is arranged at a position that does not overlap with the ventilation port 249 provided on the upper part of the back plate 242, and the main control board storage case 210 Three reels 110 to 112 are arranged below. The side plate 260 on the left side of the main control board storage case 210 and the reels 110 to 112, that is, the side plate 260 on the left side, houses the first sub control board in which the first sub control board constituting the first sub control unit is housed. A case 220 is arranged. Further, an external centralized terminal plate 248 that is connected to the main control board and outputs information of the slot machine 100 to an external device is attached to the side plate 260 on the right side.

A medal payout device 180 (a device for paying out medals accumulated in a bucket) is arranged on the bottom plate 264, and a power supply board is provided above the medal payout device 180, that is, below the reels 110 to 112. A power supply device 252 is arranged, and a power supply switch 244 is arranged in front of the power supply device 252. The power switch 244 can be operated by opening the front door 102, and is difficult or impossible to operate in the closed state.

The power supply device 252 converts the AC power supply supplied from the outside to the slot machine 100 into direct current, converts it into a predetermined voltage, and converts each of the main control unit 300, the first sub control unit 400, the second sub control unit 500, etc. Supply to the control unit and each device. Further, a power storage circuit (for example, a capacitor) for supplying power to a predetermined component (for example, RAM 308 of the main control unit 300) for a predetermined period (for example, 10 days) even after the power supply from the outside is cut off is provided. There is.

A medal auxiliary storage 240 is arranged on the right side of the medal payout device 180, and an overflow terminal is arranged behind the medal auxiliary storage 240 (not shown). The power supply device 252 is provided with a power cord connection portion for connecting the power cord 265, and the power cord 265 connected to the power cord 265 extends to the outside through a power cord hole 262 provided in the back plate 242 of the main body 101. There is.

The front door 102 is hinged to the left side plate 260 of the main body 101 via a hinge device 276, and the effect device 160 and the effect control board (illustrated) for controlling the effect device 160 are on the upper part of the liquid crystal display device 157. Omitted), an upper speaker 272 is provided. At the lower part of the liquid crystal display device 157, a medal selector 170 for selecting inserted medals, a passage 266 through which medals pass when the medal selector 170 drops an illegal medal or the like onto the medal tray 161 are provided. There is. Further, a bass speaker 277 is provided at a position corresponding to the sound hole 180.

<Circuit configuration of control unit>
Next, the circuit configuration of the control unit of the slot machine 100 will be described with reference to FIG. The figure is a circuit block diagram of the control unit.

The control unit of the slot machine 100 is roughly divided into a main control unit 300 that controls the progress of the game and a main effect according to a command signal (hereinafter, simply referred to as "command") transmitted by the main control unit 300. It is composed of a first sub-control unit 400 that controls the above, and a second sub-control unit 500 that controls various devices based on commands transmitted from the first sub-control unit 400.

<Main control unit>
First, the main control unit 300 of the slot machine 100 will be described. The main control unit 300 includes a basic circuit 302 that controls the entire main control unit 300, and the basic circuit 302 includes a CPU 304, control program data, lottery data used at the time of an internal lottery of a winning combination, and a reel stop. ROM 306 for storing position, RAM 308 for temporarily storing data, I / O 310 for controlling input / output of various devices, counter timer 312 for measuring time, number of times, etc. It is equipped with a WDT (watchdog timer) 314. Other storage devices may be used for the ROM 306 and the RAM 308, and this point is the same for the first sub-control unit 400 and the second sub-control unit 500, which will be described later. The CPU 304 of the basic circuit 302 operates by inputting a clock signal of a predetermined cycle output by the crystal oscillator 315b as a system clock. Further, when the power is turned on, the CPU 304 transmits the frequency dividing data stored in the predetermined area of the ROM 306 to the counter timer 312, and the counter timer 312 sets the interrupt time based on the received frequency dividing data. It is determined and an interrupt request is transmitted to the CPU 304 for each interrupt time. The CPU 304 monitors each sensor and transmits a drive pulse in response to this interrupt request. For example, when the clock signal output by the crystal oscillator 315b is set to 8 MHz, the frequency division value of the counter timer 312 is set to 1/256, and the data for frequency division of the ROM 306 is set to 47, the interrupt reference time is 256 × 47/8 MHz. = 1.504 ms.

The main control unit 300 starts when the power is turned on and the random number value generation circuit 316 used as a hardware random number counter that fluctuates the numerical value in the range of 0 to 65535 based on the clock signal input from the crystal oscillator 315a. A start signal output circuit 338 that outputs a signal (reset signal) is provided, and the CPU 304 starts game control when a start signal is input from the start signal output circuit 338 (main processing of the main control unit described later). To start).

Further, the main control unit 300 includes a sensor circuit 320, and the CPU 304 is inserted from various sensors 318 (bet button 130 sensor, bet button 131 sensor, bet button 132 sensor, medal insertion slot 141) for each interruption time. Medal medal reception sensor, start lever 135 sensor, stop button 137 sensor, stop button 138 sensor, stop button 139 sensor, settlement button 134 sensor, medal payout sensor for medal payout device 180, index sensor for reel 110, The state of the index sensor of the reel 111, the index sensor of the reel 112, etc.) is monitored.

When the sensor circuit 320 detects the H level of the start lever sensor, a signal indicating this detection is output to the random number value generation circuit 316. Upon receiving this signal, the random number value generation circuit 316 latches the value at that timing and stores it in a register storing the random number value used for the lottery.

Two medal reception sensors are installed in the internal passage of the medal insertion slot 141, and detect whether or not the medal has passed. Two start lever 135 sensors are installed inside the start lever 135 to detect a start operation by the player. The stop button 137 sensor, the stop button 138 sensor, and the stop button 139 sensor are installed in the respective stop buttons 137 to 139, and detect the operation of the stop button by the player.

The bet button 130 sensor, the bet button 131 sensor, and the bet button 132 sensor are installed in each of the medal insertion buttons 130 to 132, and the medals electronically stored in the RAM 308 are inserted as medals to be inserted into the game. Detect the closing operation of the case. The checkout button 134 sensor is provided on the checkout button 134. When the checkout button 134 is pressed once, the electronically stored medals are settled. The medal payout sensor is a sensor for detecting medals to be paid out by the medal payout device 180. The above sensors may be non-contact type sensors or contact type sensors.

The index sensor of the reel 110, the index sensor of the reel 111, and the index sensor of the reel 112 are installed at predetermined positions on the mounting bases of the reels 110 to 112, and each time the light-shielding piece provided on the reel frame passes through, L Become a level. When the CPU 304 detects this signal, it determines that the reel has rotated once, and resets the rotation position information of the reel to zero.

The main control unit 300 is provided in the drive circuit 322 for driving the stepping motor provided on the reels 110 to 112, the drive circuit 324 for driving the solenoid provided in the medal selector 170 for selecting the inserted medals, and the medal payout device 180. Drive circuit 326 that drives the motor, and various lamps 336 (winning line display lamp 120, game medal insertion lamp 124, re-game lamp 122, game medal insertion lamp 129, game start lamp 121, stored number indicator 125, game information A drive circuit 328 for driving the display 126, the payout number display 127, and the high navigation status lamp 190) is provided.

Further, an information output circuit 334 is connected to the basic circuit 302, and the main control unit 300 is slotted in an information input circuit 652 provided in an external hall computer (not shown) or the like via the information output circuit 334. The game information (for example, the game state) of the machine 100 is output. Further, the main control unit 300 includes a voltage monitoring circuit 330 that monitors the voltage value of the power supply supplied to the main control unit 1300, and the voltage monitoring circuit 330 has a voltage value of the power supply set to a predetermined value (this implementation). In the embodiment, a low voltage signal indicating that the voltage has dropped when the voltage is less than 9v) is output to the basic circuit 302.

Further, the main control unit 300 is provided with an output interface for transmitting a command to the first sub control unit 400, and is capable of communicating with the first sub control unit 400. Information communication between the main control unit 300 and the first sub control unit 400 is unidirectional communication, and the main control unit 300 can transmit signals such as commands to the first sub control unit 400, but the first sub control A signal such as a command cannot be transmitted from the unit 400 to the main control unit 300.

<Sub-control unit>
Next, the first sub-control unit 400 of the slot machine 100 will be described. The first sub-control unit 400 includes a basic circuit 402 that receives a control command transmitted by the main control unit 300 via an input interface and controls the entire first sub-control unit 400 based on the control command. There is. This basic circuit 402 is equipped with a CPU 404, a RAM 408 for temporarily storing data, an I / O 410 for controlling input / output of various devices, and a counter timer 412 for measuring time, number of times, and the like. doing. The CPU 404 of the basic circuit 402 operates by inputting a clock signal of a predetermined cycle output by the crystal oscillator 414 as a system clock. In addition, the first sub-control unit 400 stores a ROM 406 in which a control program and data for controlling the entire first sub-control unit 400, a backlight lighting pattern, data for controlling various indicators, and the like are stored. It is provided.

The CPU 404 transmits the frequency dividing data stored in the predetermined area of the ROM 406 to the counter timer 412 via the data bus at a predetermined timing. The counter timer 412 determines the interrupt time based on the received data for dividing the frequency, and transmits an interrupt request to the CPU 404 for each interrupt time. The CPU 404 controls each IC and each circuit based on the timing of this interrupt request.

A sound source IC 418 is provided in the first sub-control unit 400, and speakers 272 and 277 are connected to the sound source IC 418 via an output interface. The sound source IC 418 controls the sound output from the amplifier and the speakers 272 and 277 in response to a command from the CPU 404. An S-ROM (sound ROM) in which audio data is stored is connected to the sound source IC 418, and the audio data acquired from this ROM is amplified by an amplifier and output from the speakers 272 and 277.

The first sub-control unit 400 is also provided with a drive circuit 422, and the drive circuit 422 is provided with various lamps 420 (upper lamp, lower lamp, side lamp 144, title panel 162 lamp, notification lamp) via an input / output interface. 123 etc.) are connected.

Further, the first sub-control unit 400 is provided with a drive circuit 424 for driving the shutter 163, and the shutter 163 is connected to the drive circuit 424 via an output interface. The drive circuit 424 outputs a drive signal to a stepping motor (not shown) provided on the shutter 163 in response to a command from the CPU 404.

Further, a sensor circuit 426 is provided in the first sub-control unit 400, and a shutter sensor 428 is connected to the sensor circuit 426 via an input interface. The CPU 404 monitors the state of the shutter sensor 428 for each interrupt time.

Further, the CPU 404 transmits / receives a signal to the second sub-control unit 500 via the output interface. The second sub-control unit 500 of the slot machine 100 controls the liquid crystal display device 157 and the like.

Next, the second sub-control unit 500 of the slot machine 100 will be described. The second sub-control unit 500 receives the control command transmitted by the first sub-control unit 400 via the input interface, and uses the basic circuit 502 that controls the entire second sub-control unit 500 based on the control command. The basic circuit 502 includes a CPU 504, a RAM 508 for temporarily storing data, an I / O 510 for controlling input / output of various devices, and a counter for measuring time, number of times, and the like. It is equipped with a timer 512. The CPU 504 of the basic circuit 502 operates by inputting a clock signal of a predetermined cycle output by the crystal oscillator 514 as a system clock. Further, the second sub-control unit 500 is provided with a ROM 506 in which a control program and data for controlling the entire second sub-control unit 500, data for displaying an image, and the like are stored.

The CPU 504 transmits the frequency dividing data stored in the predetermined area of the ROM 506 to the counter timer 512 via the data bus at a predetermined timing. The counter timer 512 determines the interrupt time based on the received data for dividing the frequency, and transmits an interrupt request to the CPU 504 for each interrupt time. The CPU 504 controls each IC and each circuit based on the timing of this interrupt request.

A VDP 516 (video display processor) is provided in the second sub-control unit 500, and a ROM 506 and a VRAM 518 are connected to the VDP 516 via a bus. The VDP 516 reads out the image data or the like stored in the ROM 506 based on the signal from the CPU 504, generates a display image using the work area of the VRAM 516, and displays the image on the effect image display device 157.

<Design arrangement>
Next, the symbol arrangement applied to each of the above-mentioned reels 110 to 112 will be described with reference to FIG. 4A. It should be noted that the figure is a diagram showing an arrangement of symbols applied to each reel (left reel 110, middle reel 111, right reel 112) in a planar development.

On each reel 110-112, a predetermined number of frames (20 frames of numbers 0 to 19 in this embodiment) of a plurality of types (8 types in this embodiment) of symbols shown on the right side of the figure are arranged. Further, the numbers 0 to 19 shown at the left end of the figure are numbers indicating the arrangement positions of the symbols on the reels 110 to 112. For example, in the present embodiment, the number 19 frame of the left reel 110 is a "bell symbol", the number 19 frame of the middle reel 111 is a "blank symbol", and the number 18 frame of the right reel 112 is "seven 2". "Designs" are arranged respectively. In the following, "Seven 1 symbol" may be referred to as "blue 7 (symbol)", and "seven 2 symbol" may be referred to as "red 7 (symbol)".

<Prize line>
Next, the winning line will be described with reference to FIG. 4 (b). FIG. 4B is a diagram showing a winning line of the slot machine according to the first embodiment of the present invention.

The symbol displayed on the upper stage of the left reel 110 (position 1 shown in the figure; also referred to as symbol position 1) is placed on the upper design of the left reel and the middle stage of the left reel 110 (position 2 shown in the figure; also referred to as symbol position 2). The displayed symbol is the left reel middle symbol, and the symbol displayed on the left reel 110 lower (position 3 shown in the figure; also referred to as symbol position 3) is the left reel lower symbol, the middle reel 111 upper (4 shown in the figure). The symbol displayed at the position (also referred to as symbol position 4) is the upper symbol of the middle reel, and the symbol displayed at the middle of the middle reel 111 (position 5 shown in the figure; also referred to as symbol position 5) is the middle reel middle symbol. The symbol displayed on the lower part of the middle reel 111 (position 6 shown in the figure; also referred to as symbol position 6) is placed on the lower part of the middle reel and the upper part of the right reel 112 (position 7 shown in the figure; also referred to as symbol position 7). The displayed symbol is the upper symbol on the right reel, and the symbol displayed on the middle of the right reel 112 (position 8 shown in the figure; also referred to as symbol position 8) is the middle symbol on the right reel and the lower symbol on the right reel 112 (9 shown in the figure). The symbols displayed at (position; symbol position 9) are called the lower symbols on the right reel, and the symbols on each reel 110-112 are vertically three on each reel 110-112 through the symbol display window 113. A total of nine are displayed.

In the present embodiment, one winning line 114 of the middle winning line L1 composed of the left reel middle stage symbol (symbol position 2), the middle reel middle stage symbol (symbol position 5), and the right reel middle stage symbol (symbol position 8) is provided. ing. The winning line 114 is a line set at a stop position of a symbol that can be visually recognized through the reel window 113, and is a symbol corresponding to a winning combination described in FIGS. 5A and 5B described later. It is a line that determines whether or not a combination is displayed. FIG. 4B shows the middle winning line L1. The valid winning line (hereinafter, may be simply referred to as "valid line") is predetermined by the number of medals bet as a game medium.

The slot machine 100 of the present embodiment can bet three or two medals, and when the number of inserted medals is less than two, no winning line is valid and three or two medals are inserted. The winning line L1 becomes effective when one bet is placed. When the winning line is activated, the start lever 135 can be operated to start the game.

Moreover, the number of winning lines is not limited to one line. For example, in addition to the middle winning line L1, it is composed of a right-down winning line composed of a left reel upper symbol, a middle reel middle symbol, and a right reel lower symbol, a left reel lower symbol, a middle reel middle symbol, and a right reel upper symbol. A total of three upward-sloping winning lines may be set as valid winning lines 114, or a number of winning lines corresponding to the number of bets may be set as valid winning lines 114.

<Types of winning roles>
Next, the types of winning combinations of the slot machine 100 will be described with reference to FIGS. 5A and 5B. It should be noted that FIG. 3A is a diagram showing the types of winning combinations (including operating combinations), symbol combinations corresponding to each winning combination, and the operation or payout of each winning combination in the three-card betting game. (B) is a diagram showing the types of winning combinations (including operating combinations), symbol combinations corresponding to each winning combination, and the operation or payout of each winning combination in the two-card betting game.

The winning combination of the slot machine 100 includes a special role (special role 1, special role 2) and a general role (replaying role 1 to replaying role 13, small winning combination 1 to small winning combination 5). The types of winning combinations are not limited to these combinations, and can be arbitrarily adopted.

Among the winning combinations in the present embodiment, the special combination 1 and the special combination 2 are roles that shift to a special gaming state in which a predetermined profit is given to the player. Further, the re-gaming combination 1 to the re-gaming combination 13 are roles that enable re-gaming without inserting a new medal. These winning combinations are sometimes referred to as "acting combinations". In addition, the "winning" in the present embodiment includes the case where the symbol combination of the operating combination without the distribution of medals (without the payout of medals) is displayed on the effective line. For example, the special combination 1, The prizes for the special role 2 and the re-game combination 1 to the re-game combination 13 are included.

The special role 1 and the special role 2 are a combination (actuating combination) that shifts to a special gaming state by winning a prize. In this example, the special role 1 is a role that can be won only in the 3-card betting game, and the special role 2 is a role that can be won only in the 2-card betting game. No medals will be paid out for winning the role itself. The corresponding symbol combination is "Seven 1-Seven 1-Seven 2" for the special role 1 (BB1) and "BAR-BAR-Seven 1" for the special role 2 (BB2).

When the special combination 1 or the special combination 2 is internally won, the special combination internal winning flag corresponding to the internally won combination is set to on (stored in a predetermined area of the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300). When the flag is set to ON by the internal winning of the special winning combination 1, the main control unit 300 shifts the gaming state to the special winning combination 1 internal winning state (hereinafter, this state may be referred to as RT2). Further, when the flag is set to ON by the internal winning of the special winning combination 2, the main control unit 300 shifts the gaming state to the special winning combination 2 internal winning state (hereinafter, this state may be referred to as RT3). ..

This flag remains on until the internally won combination is won, and it becomes easy to win the internally won combination in the next and subsequent games. That is, even if the special role is not won in the game in which the special role 1 or the special role 2 is internally won, the special role will be internally won in the next and subsequent games, and the symbol combination corresponding to the special role (for example, special) If the role 1 is internally won, the "Seven 1-Seven 1-Seven 2 (BB1)" symbol combination) will be in a state where it is easy to win. The special role 1 internal winning state (RT2) and the special role 2 internal winning state (RT3) will be described later.

The main control unit 300 shifts the gaming state to the special gaming state (hereinafter, this state may be referred to as RT4) based on the display of the symbol combination corresponding to the special winning combination 1 or the special winning combination 2. Further, in this special game state, when a predetermined number of cards (in this example, 110 cards are won by BB1 and 55 cards are won by BB2) are paid out, a re-game low probability state (hereinafter, this state is referred to as RT1). There is). The special gaming state (RT4) and the re-gaming low probability state (RT1) will be described later.

The "re-game combination (re-game combination 1 to re-game combination 13)" is a winning combination (actuating role) that allows a player to play a game without inserting a medal (game medium) in the next game by winning a prize. No medals will be paid out. The corresponding symbol combinations are "replay-replay-replay" for replay 1 (normal replay), "seven 1-seven 1-seven 1" for replay 2 (directed replay 1), and replay 3 for replay. (Direction replay 2) is as shown in FIG. 5, such as "Seven 1-Seven 2-Seven 1".

"Small role (small role 1 to small role 5)" is a winning role in which a predetermined number of medals are paid out by winning, and the corresponding symbol combination is "ANY-cherry-ANY" for small role 1 (cherry), small role. The role 2 (watermelon 1) is as shown in FIG. 5, such as "watermelon-watermelon-watermelon". The corresponding payout number is also as shown in the figure. In the case of "ANY-cherry-ANY", the symbol of the middle reel 111 may be "cherry", and the symbols of the left reel 110 and the right reel 112 may be any symbol.

<Reel stop control>
Next, the outline of the stop control of the reels 110 to 112 will be described. The reel stop control is performed by selecting one of a plurality of types of reel stop control data determined in advance based on a predetermined condition (for example, the result of an internal lottery process for a winning combination described later) and stopping the selected reel. Perform based on control data.

In this embodiment, so-called pull-in control (frame slip control) is performed. The pull-in control is to shift the stop position of the reels 110 to 112 within a certain number of frames (number of symbols) range (pull-in range; here, maximum 4 frames) after each stop button 137 to 139 is operated by the player. Refers to control. The reel stop data is stored in the ROM 306 of the main control unit 300. Each reel stop data has an allowance control that allows a predetermined combination of winning combinations to be displayed on the winning line, and a prohibition control that does not display any combination of winning combinations on the winning line. It is roughly divided into.

Examples of allowable control are, for example, the case where a certain winning combination is internally won, or the case where a special combination is internally winning (the flag is being carried over), and the timing at which the player operates each stop button 137 to 139. Even if it is bad, control is performed so that the symbol combinations of the winning combinations are displayed in the same range within the above number of frames. However, since it is only "allowed", the symbol combinations may not be aligned depending on the timing of operating each of the stop buttons 137 to 139.

For example, when the small winning combination 2 (watermelon 1) is internally won, the watermelon symbols are arranged in more than four frames, so if the timing of operating the stop buttons 137 to 139 is not suitable, the watermelon symbols will be on the winning line. Does not stop at.

However, depending on the arrangement of the symbols on the reels 110 to 112 and the number of drawn frames, 100% may be aligned. For example, since the arrangement interval of the replay symbols corresponding to the replay combination 1 (normal replay) is a maximum of 4 frames, if the replay combination 1 is internally won, 100% of the prizes will be won regardless of the timing.

On the other hand, as an example of prohibition control, for example, when the internal lottery result is lost and the special role is not being internally elected (flag is being carried over), the timing at which the player operates each stop button 137 to 139. Even if it is good, control is performed so that the symbol combinations of the winning combinations are not displayed in the same range within the above number of frames.

<Type of game state>
Next, the types and transitions of the gaming state of the slot machine 100 will be described. FIG. 6A is a transition diagram of the gaming state of the main control unit 300 of the slot machine 100.

The main control unit 300 of the slot machine 100 is roughly divided into a replay low probability state (RT1), a replay high probability state special role 1 internal winning state (RT2), and a replay high probability state special role 2 internal winning. It has a state (RT3) and a special gaming state (RT4). In the present embodiment, the gaming states roughly divided into these four are referred to as RT-type gaming states. Further, in the present embodiment, the main control unit 300 also controls a state related to the so-called AT (assist time) (hereinafter, referred to as an AT system game state), and according to the AT system game state determined by the main control unit 300. The first sub-control unit 400 is designed to set the gaming state. The game state of the AT system will be described later with reference to FIG. 6 (b).

The re-game low probability state (RT1) is a state in which the probability of operation of the condition device related to the re-game combination does not change (default state), a special combination 1 internal winning state (RT2), and a special combination 2 internal winning state. (RT3) and the special gaming state (RT4) are also states in which the probability of operation of the condition device related to the re-gaming combination varies from the default state.

<Lottery table>
FIG. 7A is a diagram showing a lottery table used for the internal lottery process of the winning combination. The horizontal axis represents each game state (RT-type game state), and the vertical axis shows the lottery value of each winning combination.

The internal winning probability of the winning combination in each gaming state described below is a random number obtained at the time of the internal lottery by acquiring numerical data corresponding to the range of the lottery data associated with each winning combination from the lottery data prepared in the ROM 306. It is obtained by dividing by the numerical data (for example, 65535) in the numerical range. For example, in the re-game low probability state (RT1), the lottery value of the small winning combination 2 is 512, and the winning probability of the small winning combination 1 is 512/65536 × 100 ≈ 0.8%. The lottery data is divided into several numerical ranges in advance, and each numerical range is associated with each winning combination or loss.

It is determined which combination the random number value obtained as a result of executing the internal lottery corresponds to the lottery data, and the internal lottery combination is determined. The lottery data is prepared with settings 1 to 6 having different winning probabilities for at least one combination, and a game store clerk or the like can arbitrarily select and set any of the set values. The internal winning probability shown in this figure is an example, and is not limited to this probability.

Hereinafter, the game state of the RT system of the slot machine 100 will be described with reference to the drawings as appropriate.

<Replay low probability state (RT1)>
The re-game low probability state is a game state in which the internal winning probability of the re-game is the lowest (disadvantageous to the player) among other game states (for example, a game state excluding the special game state), and is referred to as a normal game state. There is also. In the re-game low probability state, the winning combination to be internally won is drawn with reference to the lottery table in the column of "RT1" on the horizontal axis shown in FIG. 7A.

Re-game The winning combination that is internally won in the low probability state is special role 1 (condition device No. 1. only for 3-card bet game), special role 2 (not shown, only for 2-card bet game), and re-game combination 1 (replay game). Conditional device No. 2), re-gaming combination 2,4-10 (conditional device No. 3), re-gaming combination 3,4,6,8,10 to 13 (conditional device No.4), small combination 1 to small There is a combination 5 (condition device Nos. 5 to 9). If the winning combination is not won, the winning combination will be lost and the symbol combination corresponding to the winning combination will not be displayed. In addition, the fact that the symbol combination related to the winning is not stopped on the winning line may be referred to as "loss". In addition, the fact that the winning combination was not won may be expressed as "winning a loss".

Here, "re-game combination 2, 4 to 10" means re-game role 2, re-game role 4, re-game role 5, re-game role 6, re-game role 7, re-game role 8, re-game role 9 , And the replaying combination 10 are internally elected at the same time. In this case, which combination of symbols is displayed is determined according to the operation order of the player. More specifically, when the stop operation is performed according to the correct operation order, which is a predetermined operation order (in this example, the stop operation is performed by reverse pressing), the symbol combination corresponding to the replay combination 2 is displayed. It is displayed on the winning line, and in other cases, depending on the stop operation timing of each reel 110-112, the re-game combination 4, the re-game combination 5, the re-game combination 6, the re-game combination 7, the re-game combination A symbol combination corresponding to any of 8, the replay combination 9, and the replay combination 10 is displayed on the winning line. In addition, a combination in which the winning combination is determined by the operation order, such as this "replaying combination 2, 4 to 10", may be referred to as a "pushing order combination".

In addition, "re-gaming combination 3, 4, 6, 8, 10 to 13" means re-gaming combination 3, re-gaming combination 4, re-gaming combination 6, re-gaming combination 8, re-gaming combination 10, re-gaming combination 11 , Re-game combination 12, and re-game combination 13 are internally elected at the same time. In this case, which combination of symbols is displayed is determined according to the operation order of the player. More specifically, when the stop operation is performed according to the correct operation order, which is a predetermined operation order (in this example, the stop operation is performed by reverse pressing), the symbol combination corresponding to the replay combination 3 is obtained. It is displayed on the winning line, and in other cases, depending on the stop operation timing of each reel 110-112, re-game combination 4, re-game combination 6, re-game combination 8, re-game combination 10, re-game combination A symbol combination corresponding to any of 11, the replay combination 12, and the replay combination 13 is displayed on the winning line.

When the "small winning combination 4" is internally won, it is determined whether or not the symbol combination corresponding to the small winning combination 4 (bell) is displayed on the winning line according to the operation order of the player (FIG. 7 (Fig. 7). a) See the remarks column). More specifically, when the stop operation is performed according to the correct operation order, which is a predetermined operation order, "bell-bell-bell" is displayed on the winning line and 11 medals are paid out (11 medals are paid out). Bell winning). On the other hand, if the stop operation is not performed according to the correct answer operation order, "bell-bell-bell" is not displayed on the winning line (loss).

In addition, when "small role 4" is composed of "small role 4a" and "small role 4b" and the "small role 4a" is internally elected, "bell-bell-bell" according to the operation order of the player. Is determined whether or not is displayed on the winning line, but if the "small winning combination 4b" is internally won, "bell-bell-bell" is displayed on the winning line regardless of the operation order. It may be configured as follows.

Here, the operation order of the correct answer of "small combination 4" will be described in detail with reference to FIG. 7B. To be precise, there are six "small roles 4": "small role 4LCR", "small role 4LRC", "small role 4CLR", "small role 4CRL", "small role 4RLC", and "small role 4RCL". It is set to be subdivided into, and different operation orders of correct answers are assigned corresponding to each of the subdivided "small roles 4". The range of lottery data associated with each of the six subdivided "small wins 4" is the same.

For example, when the "small winning combination 4LCR" of the "small winning combination 4" is internally won, the first stop reel is the left reel 110, the second stop reel is the middle reel 111, and the third stop reel is the right reel 112. The stop operation is a correct operation, and the other stop operations are incorrect operations. Further, when the "small winning combination 4 CRL" is internally won among the "small winning combination 4", the first stop reel is the middle reel 111, the second stop reel is the right reel 112, and the third stop reel is the left reel 110. The stop operation is the correct operation.

FIG. 6A shows that when the special combination 1 is internally elected (when the condition (A) is satisfied), the state shifts to the special combination 1 internal winning state (RT2) described later. It is shown that when the special role 2 is internally elected (when the condition (B) is satisfied), the state shifts to the special role 2 internal winning state (RT3) described later.

<Special role 1 internal winning state (RT2), special role 2 internal winning state (RT3)>
The special role internal winning state (RT2) and the special role 2 internal winning state (RT3) (hereinafter, these may be collectively referred to as "special role internal winning state") are the replay low probability state (RT1). ), The internal winning probability of the re-game combination is higher than that of), and the internal winning flag corresponding to the special role 1 or the special role 2 is set to on, and the player stops the operation at a predetermined timing. By doing so, it is possible to display the symbol combination corresponding to the special role corresponding to this flag.

In the special role 1 internal winning state (RT2), the winning combination to be internally won is drawn by referring to the lottery table in the column of "RT2" on the horizontal axis shown in FIG. 7A, and the special role 2 internal winning state (RT2). In RT3), the winning combination to be internally won is drawn by referring to the lottery table in the column of "RT3" on the horizontal axis shown in FIG. 7A. The winning combinations that are internally won in the special role internal winning state are re-game combination 1, re-game combination 2,4-10, re-game combination 3,4,6,8,10-13, small role 1-small role 4 There is. If the winning combination is not won, the winning combination will be lost and the symbol combination corresponding to the winning combination will not be displayed. Further, in FIG. 6A, when the symbol combination corresponding to the special role 1 or the special role 2 is displayed in the special role internal winning state (when the condition (C) is satisfied), the special game described later is performed. It has been shown to transition to state (RT4).

<Special game state (RT4)>
The special gaming state (RT4) is the gaming state that is most advantageous to the player among all the gaming states. In the special game state, the winning combination to be internally won is drawn by referring to the lottery table in the column of "RT4" on the horizontal axis shown in FIG. 7A. In the special game state, the winning combination that is internally won is only the small combination 5. In addition, if the winning combination is not won, the winning combination will be lost and the symbol combination corresponding to the winning combination will not be displayed.

FIG. 6A shows that in the special game state (RT4), when the specified number of sheets is paid out (when the condition (D) is satisfied), the game shifts to the re-game low probability state (RT1). ing. Specifically, in the case of shifting to the special game state based on the display of the symbol combination corresponding to the special role 1, when more than 110 medals are paid out, the re-game low probability state (RT1) Move to. In addition, when the special game state is entered based on the display of the symbol combination corresponding to the special role 2, when more than 55 medals are paid out, the re-game low probability state (RT1) is entered. ..

In this embodiment, the special game state ends when a predetermined number of cards are paid out, but for example, a game ends when a predetermined combination (for example, a single bonus) is won, or a predetermined number of times (for example, a predetermined number of times). It may be terminated when a prize is won (for example, 8 times) or when a predetermined number of games (for example, 6 times) are played. That is, the condition (D) shown in FIG. 6A is not limited to this example.

<Transition of AT-based game state>
Next, the game state of the AT system will be described with reference to FIG. 6B. FIG. 6B is a transition diagram of the game state of the AT system of the main control unit 300 of the slot machine 100.

As shown in the figure, the AT-type game state is roughly classified into a low navigation state and a high navigation state. The low navigation state is a state in which the probability that the operation navigation is executed is low, and is also called a normal mode. The high navigation state is a state in which the probability that the operation navigation is executed is higher than that in the low navigation state, and is also called an AT mode. Here, the operation navigation is internally elected as a push order combination (in this example, a replay combination 2,4 to 10, a replay combination 3,4,6,8,10 to 13, or a small combination 4). In this case, it refers to an effect of notifying the operation order of the correct answer. That is, the operation navigation refers to an effect of notifying the content of the stop operation for acquiring a medal, the content of the stop operation for shifting to an advantageous gaming state, or maintaining an advantageous gaming state.

Here, the operation navigation will be described with reference to FIGS. 7 (b) and 8. In the present embodiment, the operation navigation is executed by using the payout number display device 127 and the effect image display device 157. FIG. 7B is a diagram for explaining the correct operation order of the push order combination of the slot machine according to the first embodiment of the present invention, and FIG. 8 shows the display data and the lighting mode of the payout number display 127. It is a figure.

For example, the display data 01 is data suggesting a stop operation in which the first stop reel is set to the left reel 110, the display data 02 is data suggesting a stop operation in which the first stop reel is set to the middle reel 111, and the display data 03 is data suggesting a stop operation. , The data suggesting a stop operation in which the first stop reel is the right reel 112.

Therefore, in the AT mode, when the "re-game combination 2,4-10" or the "re-game combination 3,4,6,8,10-13" is internally won, the first stop reel is set to the right reel 112. Since the stop operation is the correct answer, the display data 03 suggesting that the first stop operation is on the right is selected, and the payout number display 127 displays the lighting mode corresponding to the display data 03 and displays the effect image. The device 157 displays an image (for example, the character "−-1”) suggesting that the first stop reel is the right reel 112.

Further, the display data 04 is data suggesting a stop operation in which the first stop reel is the left reel 110, the second stop reel is the middle reel 111, and the third stop reel is the right reel 112, and the display data 05 is the first stop reel. The left reel 110, the second stop reel is the right reel 112, the third stop reel is the middle reel 111, and the display data 06 indicates that the first stop reel is the middle reel 111 and the second stop reel is the middle reel 111. The data suggesting a stop operation in which the left reel 110 and the third stop reel are the right reel 112 and the display data 07 are such that the first stop reel is the middle reel 111, the second stop reel is the right reel 112, and the third stop reel is the left. The data suggesting the stop operation with the reel 110 and the display data 08 are data suggesting the stop operation with the first stop reel as the right reel 112, the second stop reel as the left reel 110, and the third stop reel as the middle reel 112. The display data 09 is data suggesting a stop operation in which the first stop reel is the right reel 112, the second stop reel is the middle reel 111, and the third stop reel is the left reel 110.

Therefore, when the small winning combination 4CLR of "small winning combination 4" is internally won in the AT mode, the first stop reel is the middle reel 111, the second stop reel is the left reel 110, and the third stop reel is the right reel 112. Since the stop operation is the correct answer, display data 06 suggesting that the first stop operation is in the middle, the second stop operation is on the left, and the third stop operation is on the right is selected, and the display data 06 is displayed on the payout number display 127. The lighting mode corresponding to is displayed, and the effect image display device 157 suggests that the first stop reel is the middle reel 111, the second stop reel is the left reel 110, and the third stop reel is the right reel 112. An image (for example, the character "213") is displayed.

In the present embodiment, it is possible to determine whether the internal winning combination is the replay combination or the small combination 4 based on the lighting mode of the payout number display 127. However, for example, the stop operation of the correct answer of the small winning combination 4 may be set to three options as in the replay combination, and the small winning combination 4 may also be configured to be notified using the display data 01 to 03. In this case, the internal winning combination cannot be determined only by the lighting mode. Further, the correct answer stop operation of the re-game combination may be set to 6 options as in the small combination 4, and the re-game combination may also be notified using the display data 04 to 09. Even in this case, the internal winning combination cannot be determined only by the lighting mode.

In the present embodiment, the low navigation state is defined as the state in which the execution probability of the operation navigation is low, and the high navigation state is defined as the state in which the execution probability of the operation navigation is higher than that in the low navigation state. The state in which the operation navigation is not executed and the high navigation state may be set as the state in which the operation navigation is executed. The high navigation state is more advantageous for the player than the low navigation state because the stop operation according to the operation content of the operation navigation brings about a favorable result for the player. Here, the advantage is specifically the total number of game media paid out by the game console with respect to the total number of game media used by the player as the number of bets when playing the game for a predetermined period. It refers to the ratio, the so-called payout rate (ball payout rate).

In the present embodiment, when a certain condition is satisfied in the low navigation state (for example, when a winning combination other than loss is won), the game shifts to the normal state in the high navigation state. After that, as shown in FIG. 6C, for example, the transition is made in the order of the finalized notification state → AT1 state → judge state, and the judge state is shifted to the normal gaming state or AT2 state via the pullback state. There is a route and a route that directly shifts from the judge state to the AT2 state. In the present embodiment, when the transition of the AT state (AT1 state, AT2 state) is determined, a predetermined number (for example, 50 games or the like) is given to the number of games in the AT mode (hereinafter, referred to as the number of AT games). Further, as will be described in detail later, when a certain condition is satisfied in the high navigation state, the state shifts to the LMT (limit) state.

<AT system state transition>
FIG. 6B is a diagram showing an effect state in each game state of the AT system. As shown in FIG. 6B, each game state of the AT system is further subdivided and managed, and this is called an effect state. Specifically, the low navigation state production state has a normal state, and the high navigation state production state has a normal state, a confirmed notification state, a judge state, a pullback state, an AT1 state, an AT2 state, and an LMT (limit) state. .. The AT1 state, the AT2 state, and the LMT (limit) state are, in principle, states in which the number of balls is increased.

Here, the limit state means, in principle, the remaining 20 games or less in the high navigation state, that is, the production state from the 981st game to the 1000th game in the high navigation state (from the 981st game to the 1000th game in the high navigation state). There may be cases where the production state of is not the limit state, but this case will be described later). In the present embodiment, when the remaining 20 games or less in the high navigation state, an ending effect (hereinafter, may be referred to as “ED effect”) suggesting the end of the high navigation state is executed.

<Direction table>
Next, the effect table included in the first sub-control unit 400 will be described with reference to FIG.
FIG. 9A illustrates an image of an effect table included in the first sub-control unit 400. The storage means (for example, ROM 406 or RAM 408 shown in FIG. 3) of the first sub-control unit 400 stores an effect table provided for each effect state.

The first sub-control unit 400 has an effect information (for example, an effect state, a high navigation state counter, etc.) included in the command received from the main control unit 300 in the command process (step S3604) of the first sub-control unit main process described later. The effect status counter and the like) are acquired, and in the subsequent effect control process (step S3605), the effect table corresponding to the effect state and the like is referred to, and the effect according to the effect state counter and the like is performed. For example, when the current effect state is the AT1 state, the effect table corresponding to the AT1 state (AT1 state effect table) is referred to, and the effect data for executing the AT1 effect described later is read from the ROM 406. If it is necessary to update the effect data, the effect data is updated.

Further, when the current effect state is the judge state, the effect table corresponding to the judge state (judgment state effect table) is referred to, and processing such as reading the effect data for executing the judge effect described later from the ROM 406 is performed. If it is necessary to update the effect data, the effect data is updated.

FIG. 9B is a diagram showing an example of a judge state effect table. When the effect state included in the command received from the main control unit 300 is the judge state, the first sub-control unit 400 refers to, for example, the judge state effect table as shown in FIG. 9B, and is currently present. Judge production corresponding to points and production status counters.

Specifically, when the effect is controlled according to the judge state effect table shown in FIGS. 9 (b) and 9 (1), when the point is 1, the enemy character is A-> A-> A-> B (expectation is A). A judge effect that changes in the order of <B) is performed, and when the point is 2, a judge effect that changes the enemy character in the order of A → A → B → B is performed. Further, when the effect control is performed according to the judge state effect table shown in FIGS. 9 (b) and 9 (2), when the value of the effect state counter is N (the number of remaining games in the judge state is N), the effect mode is D1. When the judge effect is changed in the order of -1 → D2-1 → D3-1 → ..., and the value of the effect state counter is N-1 (the number of remaining games in the judge state is N-1), the effect mode is set. Judge production is performed by changing the turn of D1-2 → D2-2 → D3-2 → ....

Further, when the current effect state is the LMT state, the effect table corresponding to the LMT state (LMT state effect table) is referred to, and processing such as reading the effect data for executing the LMT effect described later from the ROM 406 is performed. If it is necessary to update the effect data, the effect data is updated.

FIG. 9C is a diagram showing an example of an LMT state effect table. When the effect state included in the command received from the main control unit 300 is the LMT state, the first sub-control unit 400 refers to the LMT state effect table as shown in FIG. 9C and sets the counter to the counter. It is determined whether or not the corresponding trigger (start condition, end condition, etc. of the production) has arrived, and when the trigger has arrived, the production corresponding to the counter is performed.

Specifically, when performing effect control according to the LMT state effect table shown in FIGS. 9C and 9 (1), the value of the effect state counter is 1 (the number of remaining games in the LMT state is 1), and the start lever 135. When the pressing operation (leveron) of is accepted, the lottery table for the setting suggestion effect A shown in FIGS. 9 (c) and 9 (2) is used to select from a plurality of types of effects A1 to A3 according to the current set value. A predetermined effect is selected, processing such as reading the effect data for executing the effect from the ROM 406 is performed, and the setting suggestion effect A (for example, display of a character image) is executed.

Further, when the value of the effect state counter is 0 (the number of remaining games in the LMT state is 0) and the third stop operation is accepted, the lottery table for the setting suggestion effect B shown in FIGS. 9 (c) and 9 (2) is displayed. A predetermined effect is selected from a plurality of types of effects B1 to B10 according to the current set value, and processing such as reading the effect data for executing the effect from the ROM 406 is performed to suggest the setting effect B. (For example, the background image of the end screen) is executed.

Further, as will be described in detail later, in the case of a two-card betting game, when a control for continuously displaying a specific scene (not displaying a subsequent scene) is performed in the interlocking effect, the effect state is performed by the main control unit 300. Since the value of the counter is not updated, the first sub-control unit 400 continuously displays the scene corresponding to the value of the same effect state counter. The control method for continuously displaying a specific scene (not displaying a subsequent scene) in the interlocking effect is not limited to this example, and is interlocked with, for example, from the main control unit 300 to the first sub control unit 400. It may be configured not to send a command for displaying a subsequent scene in the production.

The production mode, type, determination method, etc. of the setting suggestion effect are not limited to this example, and are, for example, according to the current effect state counter (the number of remaining games in the LMT state) as shown in FIG. 9D. Therefore, the execution probability of the setting suggestion effect may be changed. For example, the execution probability of the setting suggestion effect may be higher or lower when the effect state counter (the number of remaining games in the LMT state) is larger than when it is small.

<Operation of slot machine>
Based on the above features, the processes of the main control unit 300, the first sub-control unit 400, and the second sub-control unit 500 will be described below with reference to the drawings.

<Main control unit main processing>
First, the main control unit main processing executed by the CPU 304 of the main control unit 300 will be described with reference to FIG. The figure is a flowchart showing the flow of the main processing of the main control unit.

As described above, the main control unit 300 is provided with a start signal output circuit (reset signal output circuit) 338 that outputs a start signal (reset signal) when the power is turned on. The CPU 304 of the basic circuit 302 to which the start signal is input reset-starts by reset interrupt and executes the main control unit main process shown in FIG. 10 according to the control program stored in the ROM 306 in advance.

When the power is turned on, first, various initial settings are performed in step S101. In this initial setting, the stack initial value is set in the stack pointer (SP) of the CPU 304, the interrupt prohibition is set, the I / O 310 is initialized, the various variables stored in the RAM 308 are initialized, the operation is permitted to the WDT 314, and the initial setting is performed. Set the value, etc.

In step S102, the bet number setting / start operation acceptance process (details will be described later) is executed. Here, it is checked whether or not a medal has been inserted, and preparations are made for sending an insertion command indicating that a medal has been inserted. If the player wins the re-game combination in the previous game, the process of inserting the same number of medals as the number of medals inserted in the previous game is performed, so that the player does not need to insert medals. Further, it is checked whether or not the start lever 135 has been operated, and if the start lever 135 is operated, the process proceeds to step S103.

In step S103, a winning line determination process is performed in which the number of inserted medals is determined and a valid winning line is determined.

In step S104, the random numbers generated by the random number generation circuit 316 are acquired, and the winning combination internal lottery process is performed. In the winning combination internal lottery process, the winning combination lottery table stored in the ROM 306 is read according to the current gaming state, and the internal lottery is performed using this and the acquired random number value, and the result of this internal lottery is shown. Preparations are made for transmitting the internal lottery command to the first sub-control unit 400. As a result of the internal lottery, if any of the winning combinations (including the operating combination) is internally won, the winning combination flag is turned on.

In step S105, the reel stop data selection process for selecting the reel stop data is performed based on the internal lottery result of the winning combination internal lottery process. The reel stop data is stored in the ROM 306 of the main control unit 300. Further, in step S105, preparations are made for transmitting a reel stop data command including information regarding the selected reel stop data to the first sub-control unit 400.

In step S106, the effect control process A (detailed later) relating to the control of the game state of the AT system is executed based on the start lever operation. In step S107, the effect processing is executed. In this effect processing, the freeze effect is controlled.

Here, the freeze effect is an effect that makes the originally planned effect seem to be interrupted in the middle, an effect that makes the slot machine seem to have stopped responding, and the like. Further, for light emission, for example, stopping the change in lighting mode is called freeze, for sound output, for example, continuing to output the same sound is called freeze, and for operation, for example, the operation is in the middle. Stopping may be referred to as a freeze.

In step S108, the reel rotation start process is executed to start the rotation of all the reels 110 to 112.

In step S109, the reel stop control process is performed. In the reel stop control process, the stop buttons 137 to 139 can be accepted, and when any of the stop buttons is pressed, the stop table of the reel stop data is displayed in order to stop the reel corresponding to the pressed stop button. Refer to it and stop any of the reels 110 to 112 according to the number of lead-in frames set in the stop table. When all reels 110 to 112 are stopped, the process proceeds to step S110. In this step S109, for each stop operation, the stop button reception command for the stop buttons 137 to 139 that have been stopped (specifically, for the first stop operation, the stop button reception 1 command and the second stop operation). For the third stop operation, the stop button reception 2 command) is prepared to be transmitted to the first sub-control unit 400, and for the stop of each reel, the reel is prepared. Reel stop command related to the stop position (specifically, reel stop 1 command for the first stop reel, reel stop 2 command for the second stop operation, reel stop for the third stop operation 3 Command) is prepared to be transmitted to the first sub-control unit 400.

In step S110, a winning determination process for determining a winning is performed. In this winning combination processing, when a symbol combination corresponding to some winning combination is displayed on the activated winning line 114, it is determined that the winning combination has been won. For example, if "bell-bell-bell" is aligned on the activated winning line, it is determined that the player has won the small role 3 (bell). Further, in this step S110, preparations are made for transmitting a winning determination command indicating the result of the winning determination to the first sub-control unit 400.

In step S111, the medal granting process is performed. In the medal granting process, if a winning combination with a payout is won, the number of medals corresponding to the winning combination is paid out according to the number of winning lines.

In step S112, the game state control process is performed. In the game state control process, processing related to the transition of each game state of the RT system is performed, and the game state is shifted when the start condition or end condition is satisfied. In addition, preparations are made for transmitting a game state command including information indicating the game state of the current RT system.

In step S113, the effect control process B (detailed later) related to the control of the game state of the AT system is executed. In step S114, the high navigation state end process (detailed later) regarding the end of the high navigation state is executed.

With the above, one game is completed. After that, the game proceeds by returning to step S102 and repeating the above-described processing. The various commands prepared in each of the above steps are transmitted in the command setting transmission process (step S2006 in FIG. 11) of the main control unit timer interrupt process described later.

<Main control unit timer interrupt processing>
Next, the main control unit timer interrupt process executed by the CPU 304 of the main control unit 300 will be described with reference to FIG. The figure is a flowchart showing the flow of the timer interrupt process of the main control unit.

The main control unit 300 includes a counter timer 312 that generates a timer interrupt signal at a predetermined cycle (once every 2 ms in the present embodiment), and the main control unit timer interrupt is triggered by this timer interrupt signal. The process is started at a predetermined cycle.

In step S2001, the timer interrupt start process is performed. In this timer interrupt start process, a process of temporarily saving the value of each register of the CPU 304 to the stack area is performed.

In step S2002, the WDT314 is periodically (this) so that the WDT interrupt does not occur when the count value of the WDT314 exceeds the initial setting value (32.8 ms in the present embodiment) (so as not to detect a processing abnormality). In the embodiment, the restart is performed once every about 2 ms, which is the cycle of interrupting the main control unit timer.

In step S2003, the input port state update process is performed. In this input port state update process, the detection signals of the sensor circuits 320 of the various sensors 318 are input via the input port of the I / O 310 to monitor the presence or absence of the detection signals, and the RAM 308 is partitioned for each of the various sensors 318. It is stored in the provided signal state storage area.

In step S2004, various game processes are executed, and processes according to the interrupt status are executed. In step S2005, the timer update process is performed. More specifically, various timers are updated in each time unit.

In step S2006, the command setting transmission process is performed, and various commands prepared for transmission are transmitted to the first sub-control unit 400. In the first sub-control unit 400, the command type included in the received output schedule information enables the determination of the effect control according to the change in the game control in the main control unit 300, and is included in the output schedule information. Based on the information of the command data, the effect control content can be determined.

In step S2007, the external output signal setting process is performed. In this external output signal setting process, the game information stored in the RAM 308 is output to the information input circuit 652, which is separate from the slot machine 100, via the information output circuit 334.

In step S2008, device monitoring processing is performed. In this device monitoring process, first, in step S2003, the signal states of the various sensors 318 stored in the signal state storage area are read out, and the presence or absence of errors related to medal insertion abnormality and medal payout abnormality is monitored, and if an error is detected, (Not shown) Error processing is executed. Further, the medal selector 170 (medal blocker in which the solenoid provided in the medal selector 170 operates), various lamps 339, and various 7-segment (SEG) displays are set according to the current gaming state.

In step S2009, it is monitored whether or not the low voltage signal is on. Then, when the low voltage signal is on (when the power interruption is detected), the process proceeds to step S2011, and when the low voltage signal is off (when the power interruption is not detected), the process proceeds to step S2010.

In step S2010, various processes for terminating the timer interrupt end process are performed. In this timer interrupt end processing, the value of each register temporarily saved in step S2001 is set in each original register. After that, the process returns to the main processing of the main control unit shown in FIG.

On the other hand, in step S2011, a specific variable or stack pointer for returning to the state at the time of power failure at the time of power recovery is saved as recovery data in a predetermined area of the RAM 308, and power failure processing such as initialization of the input / output port is performed. After that, the process returns to the main processing of the main control unit shown in FIG.

<Processing of the first sub-control unit>
Next, the process of the first sub-control unit 400 will be described with reference to FIG. Note that FIG. 12A is a flowchart of the main process executed by the CPU 404 of the first sub-control unit 400. FIG. 12B is a flowchart of the command reception interrupt process of the first sub-control unit 400. FIG. 12C is a flowchart of the timer interrupt process of the first sub-control unit 400.

First, the main process of the first sub-control unit 400 will be described with reference to FIG. 12A.

When the power is turned on, the initialization process is first executed in step S3001. In this initialization process, the initial setting of the input / output port, the initialization process of the storage area in the RAM 408, and the like are performed. In this process, the RAM 408 is provided with an area for storing the internal winning information, which is information representing the result of the internal winning, and an area for storing the RT update information, which is the information representing the gaming state.

In step S3002, it is determined whether or not the timer variable is 10 or more, and this process is repeated until the timer variable becomes 10, and when the timer variable becomes 10 or more, the process proceeds to step S3003. In step S3003, 0 is assigned to the timer variable. In step S3004, command processing, which is processing corresponding to each command received from the main control unit 300, is executed.

In step S3005, the effect control process is performed. Here, the production is prepared according to the production reservation information in the production reservation area provided in the RAM 408. This preparation includes, for example, performing processing such as reading the effect data from the ROM 406, and performing the effect data update process when the effect data needs to be updated.

In step S3006, sound control processing is performed based on the processing result of step S3005. For example, if there is an instruction to the sound source IC 418 in the effect data read in step S3005, this instruction is output to the sound source IC 418. In step S3007, the lamp control process is performed based on the process result of step S3005. For example, if there is an instruction to the various lamps 420 in the effect data read in step S3005, this instruction is output to the drive circuit 422.

In step S3008, the shutter control process is performed based on the process result of step S3005. For example, if there is a command to the shutter 163 in the effect data read in step S3005, this command is output to the drive circuit 424. In step S3009, information output processing for setting to send a command to the second sub-control unit 500 is performed based on the processing result of step S3005. For example, if there is a command to be transmitted to the second sub-control unit 500 in the effect data read in step S3005, the setting to output this control command is made, and the process returns to step S3002.

Next, the command reception interrupt process of the first sub-control unit 400 will be described with reference to FIG. 12B. This command reception interrupt process is a process executed when the first sub-control unit 400 detects a strobe signal output by the main control unit 300. In step S3101 of the command reception interrupt process, the command output by the main control unit 300 is stored as an unprocessed command in the command storage area provided in the RAM 408.

Next, the timer interrupt processing of the first sub-control unit executed by the CPU 404 of the first sub-control unit 400 will be described with reference to FIG. 12 (c). The first sub-control unit 400 includes a hardware timer that generates a timer interrupt at a predetermined cycle (once every 2 ms in the present embodiment), and the timer interrupt process is predetermined with this timer interrupt as an opportunity. Execute in the cycle of.

In step S3201, 1 is added to the value of the timer variable storage area of the RAM 408 described in step S3002 in the first sub-control unit main process shown in FIG. 12A, and the data is stored in the original timer variable storage area. Therefore, in step S3002, the value of the timer variable is determined to be 10 or more every 20 ms (2 ms × 10). In step S3202, the command is transmitted to the second sub-control unit 500 set in step S3009, the effect random number value is updated, and the like.

<Processing of the second sub control unit>
Next, the process of the second sub-control unit 500 will be described with reference to FIG. Note that FIG. 13A is a flowchart of the main process executed by the CPU 504 of the second sub-control unit 500. FIG. 13B is a flowchart of the command reception interrupt process of the second sub-control unit 500. FIG. 13C is a flowchart of the timer interrupt process of the second sub-control unit 500. FIG. 13D is a flowchart of the image control process of the second sub-control unit 500.

First, in step S4001 of FIG. 13A, various initial settings are performed. When the power is turned on, the initialization process is first executed in step S4001. In this initialization process, input / output port initialization processing, initialization processing of the storage area in the RAM 508, initialization processing of the storage area in the VRAM 536, and the like are performed.

In step S4002, it is determined whether or not the timer variable is 10 or more, and this process is repeated until the timer variable becomes 10, and when the timer variable becomes 10 or more, the process proceeds to step S4003. In step S4003, 0 is assigned to the timer variable. In step S4004, command processing is performed. In the command processing, the CPU 504 of the second sub-control unit 500 determines whether or not a command has been received from the CPU 404 of the first sub-control unit 400.

In step S4005, the effect control process is performed. Specifically, when there is a new command in step S4004, the process corresponding to this command is performed. For example, a process of reading the effect data for controlling the image of the background image from the ROM 506 is executed. In addition, processing such as reading out the production data from ROM 506 other than this is included, and when the production data needs to be updated, the production data is updated.

In step S4006, image control processing (details will be described later) is performed based on the processing result of step S4005. For example, if there is an image control command in the effect data read in step S4005, the image control corresponding to this command is performed. For example, image control regarding a display image (notification image, background image) is executed. When this image control process is completed, the process returns to step S4002.

Next, the command reception interrupt process of the second sub-control unit 500 will be described with reference to FIG. 13 (b). This command reception interrupt process is a process executed when the second sub-control unit 500 detects a strobe signal output by the first sub-control unit 400.

In step S4101 of the command reception interrupt process, the command output by the first sub-control unit 400 is stored as an unprocessed command in the command storage area provided in the RAM 508.

Next, the second sub-control unit timer interrupt process executed by the CPU 504 of the second sub-control unit 500 will be described with reference to FIG. 13 (c). The second sub-control unit 500 includes a hardware timer that generates a timer interrupt at a predetermined cycle (once every 2 ms in the present embodiment), and the timer interrupt process is predetermined with this timer interrupt as an opportunity. Execute in the cycle of.

In step S4201, 1 is added to the value of the timer variable storage area of the RAM 508 described in step S4002 in the second sub-control unit main process shown in FIG. 13A, and the data is stored in the original timer variable storage area. Therefore, in step S4002, the value of the timer variable is determined to be 10 or more every 20 ms (2 ms × 10). In step S4202, the effect random value value update process and the like are performed.

Next, the image control process of step S4006 in the main process of the second sub-control unit 500 will be described with reference to FIG. 13 (d). The figure is a diagram showing a flowchart showing the flow of image control processing.

In step S4301, an image data transfer instruction is given. Here, the CPU 504 first swaps the designation of the display area A of the VRAM 536 and the drawing area of the display area B. As a result, the one-frame image stored in the display area not designated as the drawing area is displayed on the effect image display device 157. Next, the CPU 504 sets ROM coordinates (transfer source address of ROM 506), VRAM coordinates (transfer destination address of VRAM 536), etc. in the attribute register of VDP 534 based on a table such as position information, and then an image from ROM 506 to VRAM 536. Set the command to instruct the start of data transfer. The VDP 534 transfers image data from the ROM 506 to the VRAM 536 based on the instructions set in the attribute register. After that, the VDP 534 outputs a transfer end interrupt signal to the CPU 504.

In step S4302, it is determined whether or not the transfer end interrupt signal from the VDP 534 has been input. If the transfer end interrupt signal is input, the process proceeds to step S4303. If not, the transfer end interrupt signal is input. Wait for it.

In step S4303, parameters are set based on the effect scenario configuration table, attribute data, and the like. Here, in order to form a display image in the display area A or B of the VRAM 536 based on the image data transferred to the VRAM 536 in step S4301, the CPU 504 information on the image data constituting the display image (coordinate axis of the VRAM 536, image size). , VRAM coordinates (arrangement coordinates), transparency, etc.) are instructed to VDP534. The VDP 534 sets parameters according to the attributes based on the instructions stored in the attribute registers.

In step S4304, a drawing instruction is given. In this drawing instruction, the CPU 504 instructs the VDP 534 to start drawing an image. The VDP 534 starts drawing an image in the frame buffer according to the instruction of the CPU 504.

In step S4305, it is determined whether or not the generation end interrupt signal from the VDP 534 is input based on the end of drawing the image. If the generation end interrupt signal is input, the process proceeds to step S5306. If not, the generation end interrupt signal is generated. Wait for to be entered.

In step S4306, the scene display counter that is set in a predetermined area of the RAM 508 and counts how many scenes of images have been generated is incremented (+1) to end the process.

<Bet number setting / start operation reception process>
Next, the bet number setting / start operation acceptance process will be described with reference to FIG. 14 (a). FIG. 14A is a flowchart showing in detail the flow of the bet number setting / start operation acceptance process in step S102 of FIG.

In step S201, the high navigation state update process (detailed later) relating to the transition from the low navigation state to the high navigation state and the update of the high navigation state is executed in the state where the medal can be inserted before the start lever operation.

In step S202, other bet number setting / start operation acceptance processing is executed. That is, the number of bets is set, and it is determined whether or not the start lever 135 has been operated.

<High navigation status update process>
Next, the high navigation state update process will be described with reference to FIG. 14 (b). FIG. 14B is a flowchart showing in detail the flow of the high navigation state update process in step S201 of FIG. 14A.

In step S301, it is determined whether or not the high navigation state counter> 0. If the high navigation status counter> 0, the process proceeds to step S302, and if not, the high navigation status update process ends. In step S302, the value of the high navigation state counter is subtracted by 1.

In step S303, it is determined whether or not the high navigation state flag is off. The high navigation state flag is a flag indicating whether or not the game state of the AT system is the high navigation state. When it is on, it indicates a high navigation state, and when it is off, it indicates a low navigation state. If the high navigation state flag is off, the process proceeds to step S304, and if not, the high navigation state update process ends.

In step S304, the high navigation state flag is turned on. In the present embodiment, the initial value (1000 in this example) is set in the high navigation state counter in the game in which the transition from the low navigation state to the high navigation state is decided (see step S703 in FIG. 16B described later). , When the start lever of the next game is operated, it shifts to the high navigation state. By turning on the high navigation status flag, the high navigation status lamp 190 starts lighting.

<Production state control process A>
Next, the effect state control process A will be described with reference to FIG. 15A. FIG. 15A is a flowchart showing in detail the flow of the effect state control process A in step S106 of FIG.

In step S401, common processing for each game (details will be described later) is executed. In step S402, it is determined whether or not the processing prohibition flag is off. The processing prohibition flag is a flag indicating whether or not to execute the processing related to the high navigation state in the high navigation state, and when the processing prohibition flag is off, the game must be able to execute the processing related to the high navigation state. When the processing prohibition flag is on, it indicates that the game does not execute the processing related to the high navigation state. If the processing prohibition flag is off, the process proceeds to step S403. If not, that is, if the processing prohibition flag is on, the process proceeds to step S406.

In step S403, it is determined whether or not the high navigation state flag is off. If the high navigation state flag is off, the process proceeds to step S404, and if the high navigation state flag is not off, that is, it is on, the process proceeds to step S405.

In step S404, since the navigation state is low, the low navigation state process A (details will be described later) is executed. In step S405, since the vehicle is in the high navigation state, the high navigation state processing A (details will be described later) is executed. In step S406, the other effect state control process A is executed.

In the effect state control process A of the present embodiment, the process prohibition flag is provided, and the low navigation state process A or the high navigation state process A is executed only when the process prohibition flag is off, but the process prohibition flag is not provided. You may. In this case, the low navigation state process A or the high navigation state process A is always executed in the effect state control process A.

<Common processing for each game>
Next, the common processing for each game will be described with reference to FIG. 15B. FIG. 15B is a flowchart showing in detail the flow of the common processing for each game in step S401 of FIG. 15A.

In step S501, it is determined whether or not the condition for executing the high navigation state-related processing is satisfied. Here, the condition for executing the high navigation state-related processing is that the game is a recommended number of games (in this example, a three-card betting game). The recommended number of games is not limited to the three-card game, and the recommended number of games may differ depending on the state of the slot machine. As a result of the determination in step S501, if the condition for executing the high navigation state related processing is satisfied (for example, when the game is a three-card betting game), the process proceeds to step S502, and if not (for example,). , If the game is a two-card betting game), the process proceeds to step S503.

In step S502, the processing prohibition flag is turned off. In step S503, the processing prohibition flag is turned on. In step S504, other common processing for each game is executed.

<Low navigation state processing A>
Next, the common processing for each game will be described with reference to FIG. 16A. FIG. 16A is a flowchart showing in detail the flow of the low navigation state processing A in step S404 of FIG. 15A.

In step S601, a high navigation state transition process (detailed later) for determining whether or not to shift to the high navigation state is executed. In step S602, other low navigation state processing A is executed.

<High navigation state transition processing>
Next, the high navigation state transition process will be described with reference to FIG. 16B. FIG. 16B is a flowchart showing in detail the flow of the high navigation state transition process in step S601 of FIG. 16A.

In step S701, the high navigation state transition determination is executed. In this high navigation state transition determination, when the high navigation state transition condition is satisfied (in this example, when a winning combination other than a loss is won in the winning combination internal lottery process), it is determined that the transition condition is satisfied, and the next Decide to move from the game to the high navigation state.

In step S702, it is determined whether or not the high navigation state transition is determined, and if applicable, the process proceeds to step S703, and if not, the high navigation state transition process is terminated.

In step S703, the initial value (1000 in this example) is set in the high navigation state counter. Needless to say, the initial value of the high navigation state counter is not limited to 1000, and may be, for example, 1500. In step S705, other high navigation state transition processing is executed. Here, the number of games to be executed after shifting to the high navigation state is set, and for example, the initial value (700 in this example) is set to the value of the ceiling counter.

In step S701, in the high navigation state transition determination, the transition to the high navigation state is determined when a winning combination other than the loss is won, but the high navigation transition condition is not limited to this, for example, a random number value is used. The transition to the high navigation state may be decided based on the result of the lottery used, or the lottery is performed using the lottery value provided for each winning combination, and the transition to the high navigation state is performed based on the result of the lottery. May be determined.

<High navigation state processing A>
Next, the high navigation state processing A will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 17 is a flowchart showing in detail the flow of the high navigation state processing A in step S405 of FIG. 15A.

In step S801, high navigation state common processing (details will be described later) is executed.

In step S802, it is determined whether or not the effect state is the normal state, and if applicable, the process proceeds to step S803, and if not applicable, the process proceeds to step S804. In step S803, the normal state process A (detailed later) is executed. Details will be described later, but in this normal state processing A, for example, a counter related to the number of games in the effect state (precursor state) is subtracted. In addition, the effect setting is performed for the game according to the result of the internal lottery process for the winning combination.

In step S804, it is determined whether or not the effect state is the finalized notification state, and if applicable, the process proceeds to step S805, and if not applicable, the process proceeds to step S806. In step S805, the final notification state process A (detailed later) is executed.

In step S806, it is determined whether or not the effect state is the AT1 state, and if applicable, the process proceeds to step S807, and if not applicable, the process proceeds to step S808. In step S807, AT1 state processing A (detailed later) is executed.

In step S808, it is determined whether or not the effect state is the judge state, and if applicable, the process proceeds to step S809, and if not applicable, the process proceeds to step S810. In step S809, the judge state process A (detailed later) is executed.

In step S810, it is determined whether or not the effect state is the AT2 state, and if applicable, the process proceeds to step S811, and if not, the process proceeds to step S812. In step S811, judge state processing A (detailed later) is executed.

In step S812, it is determined whether or not the effect state is the pullback state, and if applicable, the process proceeds to step S813, and if not, the process proceeds to step S814. In step S813, the pullback state process A (detailed later) is executed.

In step S814, the instruction information setting process (detailed later) related to the setting of the instruction information is executed.

<High navigation state common processing A>
Next, the high navigation state common process A will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 18 is a flowchart showing in detail the flow of the high navigation state common process A in step S801 of FIG.

In step S901, it is determined whether or not the effect state counter> 0. If the effect state counter> 0, the process proceeds to step S902, and if not, the process proceeds to step S903. In step S902, the value of the effect state counter is subtracted by 1. Here, the effect state counter is a counter for managing the transition of the effect state. When the number of games in each production state is determined by a lottery or a table, the result of the lottery or a numerical value obtained from the table or the like may be set in the value of the production state counter, or the system shifts to the high navigation state. At that time, the number of games in a part or all of the production states may be determined at once.

In step S903, it is determined whether or not the current effect state is the LMT state, and if applicable, the process proceeds to step S904, and if not applicable, the process proceeds to step S909.

In step S904, it is determined whether or not the value of the high navigation state counter is equal to or less than the LMT transition value A (19 in this example), and if applicable, the process proceeds to step S906, and if not applicable, the process proceeds to step S906. The process proceeds to step S905. In this example, since the LMT state is 20G, the LMT transition value A is set to 19 (= 20G-1G), but other values may be used.

In step S905, it is determined whether or not the value of the difference number counter is equal to or less than the LMT transition value B (1840 in this example), and if applicable, the process proceeds to step S906, and if not applicable, step S906 is performed. Proceed to S909. In this example, the high navigation state is terminated when the LMT state is 20G, the maximum payout number in the 3-card betting game is 11 (maximum increase is 8), and the difference exceeds 2000. Therefore, the LMT transition value B is set to 1840 (= 2000 sheets-8 sheets x 20G), but other values may be used.

In step S906, the LMT initial value (19 in this example) is set in the effect state counter, and in the next step S907, freeze information (various information for executing the freeze effect) is set. Further, in step S908, the process proceeds to step S909 after setting the LMT state in the effect state. As a result, the effect state shifts from the game to the LMT state. In this example, the initial value of LMT is set to 19 (= 20G-1G) in order to shift from the game to the LMT state, but other numerical values may be used.

In step S909, the high navigation state common process A is terminated after the other high navigation state common process A is executed.

<Normal state processing A>
Next, the normal state processing A will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 19 is a flowchart showing in detail the flow of the normal state processing A in step S803 of FIG.

In step S1001, it is determined whether or not the ceiling counter> 0. If the ceiling counter> 0, the process proceeds to step S1002, and if not, the process proceeds to step S1003. In step S1002, the value of the ceiling counter is subtracted by 1. Here, the ceiling counter is a counter for managing the number of games up to the ceiling. In this embodiment, the initial value (700 in this example) is set in the ceiling counter in step S705 of the high navigation state transition process described with reference to FIG. 16B, but other numerical values are used. You may.

In step S1003, it is determined whether the AT1 winning flag is off or on. If it is off, the process proceeds to step S1004, and if it is on, the process proceeds to step S1011. In step S1004, it is determined whether or not the ceiling counter is 0, and if applicable, the process proceeds to step S1007, and if not applicable, the process proceeds to step 1005. In step S1005, the AT1 transition lottery is performed. Here, the AT1 transition lottery is a lottery for determining whether or not to transition to the AT1 state, and in this example, the winning or losing is determined based on the result of the internal lottery processing of the winning combination, the random number value, and the like. The content of the AT1 transition lottery is not limited to this example, and for example, the winning or failing may be determined in consideration of the value of the high navigation state counter, etc., and points are based on the result of the internal lottery processing of the winning combination. May be given and the result may be decided based on the points.

In step S1006, it is determined whether or not the AT1 transition lottery in step S1005 has been won, and if it is won, the process proceeds to step S1007, and if it is not won, the process proceeds to step S1016. In step S1007, an AT1 type lottery is performed. Here, the AT1 type lottery is a lottery for determining the type of the AT1 state, and in this example, it is determined to be either "high" or "low" based on a random number value or the like. The content of the AT1 type lottery is not limited to this example. For example, "high" is selected as the AT1 type in the lottery when the AT1 transition lottery is won, rather than the lottery when the ceiling is reached. The configuration may be easy (or difficult to select).

In step S1008, the result of the AT1 type lottery in step S1007 is set in the AT1 type, and in the next step S1009, the number of games is determined by the lottery, and the number of games is set in the effect state counter. Further, in step S1010, after turning on the AT1 winning flag, the process proceeds to step S1016.

In step S1011, it is determined whether or not the AT1 type is "low", and if applicable, the process proceeds to step S1012, and if not applicable, the process proceeds to step 1014. In step S1012, the promotion counter addition lottery is performed. Here, the promotion counter addition lottery is a lottery for determining a numerical value to be added to the promotion counter, and in this example, the numerical value is determined based on a random number value or the like. In step S1013, the numerical value (lottery result value) determined in the promotion counter addition lottery in step S1012 is added to the promotion counter, and then the process proceeds to step S1016.

In step S1014, a judge mode lottery is performed. Here, the judge mode lottery is a lottery for determining one of the multiple types of judge modes (in this example, "normal", "high accuracy", and "heaven"). Yes, in this example, the judge mode is determined based on a random number value or the like. In step S1015, the lottery result of the judge mode lottery in step S1014 is set to the judge mode, and then the process proceeds to step S1016. In step S1106, the normal state processing A is terminated after the other normal state processing A is performed.

<Final notification status processing A>
Next, the final notification state processing A will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 20 is a flowchart showing in detail the flow of the final notification state processing A in step S805 of FIG.

In step S1101, it is determined whether or not the AT1 type is "low", and if applicable, the process proceeds to step S1102, and if not applicable, the process proceeds to step 1107. In step S1102, the promotion counter addition lottery is performed. As described above, the promotion counter addition lottery is a lottery for determining the numerical value to be added to the promotion counter, and in this example, the numerical value is determined based on a random number value or the like. In step S1103, the numerical value (lottery result value) determined in the promotion counter addition lottery in step S1102 is added to the promotion counter, and then the process proceeds to step S1104.

In step S1104, it is determined whether or not the value of the promotion counter is equal to or higher than the ceiling value (for example, 700), and if applicable, the process proceeds to step S1105, and if not applicable, the process proceeds to step S1109. In step S1105, "high" is set for the AT1 type, and in the next step S1106, "high accuracy" is set for the judge mode, and the process proceeds to step S1109.

In step S1107, a judge mode lottery is performed. As described above, the judge mode lottery is a lottery for determining one of the multiple types of judge modes (in this example, "normal", "high accuracy", and "heaven"). In this example, the judge mode is determined based on a random number value or the like. In step S1108, the lottery result of the judge mode lottery in step S1107 is set to the judge mode, and then the process proceeds to step S1109. In step S1109, after performing other final notification state processing A, the final notification state processing A is terminated.

<AT1 state processing A>
Next, AT1 state processing A will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 21 is a flowchart showing in detail the flow of AT1 state processing A in step S807 of FIG.

In step S1201, a judge mode lottery is performed. As described above, the judge mode lottery is a lottery for determining one of the multiple types of judge modes (in this example, "normal", "high accuracy", and "heaven"). In this example, the judge mode is determined based on a random number value or the like. In step S1202, the lottery result of the judge mode lottery in step S1201 is set to the judge mode, and then the process proceeds to step S1203. In step S1203, after performing other AT1 state processing A, AT1 state processing A is terminated.

<Judge state processing A>
Next, the judge state processing A will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 22 is a flowchart showing in detail the flow of the judge state processing A in step S809 of FIG.

In step S1301, it is determined whether or not the release counter> 0. If the release counter> 0, the process proceeds to step S1302, and if not, the process proceeds to step S1304. In step S1302, the value of the release counter is subtracted by 1. Here, the release counter is a counter for managing the number of games until the judge mode is released. In the present embodiment, the lottery value is set in the release counter in step S2104 of the AT1 state processing B described later, but other numerical values may be used. In step S1303, it is determined whether or not the release counter = 0. If the release counter = 0, the process proceeds to step S1306, and if not, the process proceeds to step S1304.

In step S1304, a release lottery is performed according to the judge mode, and in the next step S1305, if the release lottery is won, the process proceeds to step S1306, and if not, the process proceeds to step S1307. .. Here, the cancellation lottery is a lottery for determining whether or not to shift to the AT2 state. In this example, if the judge mode is heaven and the cancellation lottery is won, the judge mode heaven is continued without shifting to the AT2 state. Also, if the judge mode is heaven and you win a specific rare role (small role 2 or small role 3 in this example) internally, there is a 100% chance that AT2 will be won regardless of the result of the cancellation lottery. Move to the state. The content of the cancellation lottery is not limited to this example, and may be, for example, a lottery for determining whether or not to shift to a certain specialized zone.

In step S1306, after setting the determined state in the judge state, the process proceeds to step S1307. In this example, when it is determined in step S1303 that the release counter = 0 (when the heaven of the judge mode ends), the AT2 state is set in the judge state in step S1306. That is, in this example, when the heaven of the judge mode ends, there is a 100% probability of shifting to the AT2 state. Further, in steps S1304 to S1305, when the judge mode is heaven and the cancellation lottery is won, the judge mode heaven is set in the judge state. Further, in steps S1304 to S1305, when the judge mode is heaven and a specific rare role (in this example, small role 2 or small role 3) is internally won, regardless of the result of the cancellation lottery, In step S1306, the AT2 state is set to the judge state.

In step S1307, the AT1 state process A is terminated after the other judge state process A is performed.

<AT2 state processing A>
Next, AT2 state processing A will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 23 is a flowchart showing in detail the flow of AT2 state processing A in step S811 of FIG.

In step S1401, the AT number addition lottery is performed. Here, the AT number addition lottery is a lottery for determining the number of games to be added (added) to the number of AT games. In step S1402, the lottery result value (the number of additional games) of the AT number addition lottery is added to the effect state counter.

In step S1403, a judge mode lottery is performed. As described above, the judge mode lottery is a lottery for determining one of the multiple types of judge modes (in this example, "normal", "high accuracy", and "heaven"). In this example, the judge mode is determined based on a random number value or the like. In step S1403, the lottery result of the judge mode lottery in step S1401 is set to the judge mode, and then the process proceeds to step S1404. In step S1404, after performing other AT2 state processing A, AT2 state processing A is terminated.

<Pullback state processing A>
Next, the pullback state process A will be described with reference to FIG. 24. FIG. 24 is a flowchart showing in detail the flow of the pullback state process A in step S813 of FIG.

In step S1501, a pullback lottery is performed, and in step SS1502, it is determined whether or not the pullback lottery has been won. If the lottery is won, the process proceeds to step S1503, and if not, the process proceeds to step S1504. In step S1503, the determined state is set in the pullback state. In this example, the lottery result of the pullback lottery in step S1501 is set to the pullback state. In step S1504, the pullback state process A is terminated after the other pullback state process A is performed.

<Instruction information setting process>
Next, the instruction information setting process will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 25 is a flowchart showing in detail the flow of the instruction information setting process in step S814 of FIG.

In step S1601, it is determined whether or not the effect state is the state in which the instruction information can be notified. Here, the instruction information broadcastable state indicates, in this example, the AT1 state, the AT2 state, and the LMT state. If the effect state is the state in which the instruction information can be notified, the process proceeds to step S1602, and if not, the instruction information setting process ends.

In step S1602, it is determined in the winning combination internal lottery process whether or not the push order combination has been internally won. In this example, the push order combination means the internal winning of the "small combination 4" in the conditional device. If the push order is internally won, the process proceeds to step S1603, and if not, the instruction information setting process ends.

In step S1603, the correct push order is set in the information (instruction information) related to the notification content of the instruction information notification. As a result, the operation navigation using the payout number display 127 is executed (see FIG. 8). Further, although not shown, in step S1603, other operation navigation information setting processing is executed. For example, a preparation is made for transmitting an operation navigation command including instruction information indicating the order of pressing the correct answer to the first sub-control unit 400. As a result, the first sub-control unit 400 executes the operation navigation using the effect image display device 157.

In the finalized notification state of this example, the number of medals will continue to decrease until the small winning combination corresponding to the AT1 type wins, so while ensuring that the payout rate is less than 1, for example, in the pushing order role. When the internal winning is won, the operation navigation is executed only in the push order of a specific type (for example, when the small winning combination 4 is internally won, any one of the small winning combination 4LCR, ..., The small winning combination 4RCL or The operation navigation may be executed for a plurality of units), or the operation navigation may be executed once every three times (for example, if the push order cannot be won three times, the next push order). (The push order navigation is executed when the role is internally won).

<Production state control process B>
Next, the effect state control process B will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 26 is a flowchart showing in detail the flow of the effect state control process B in step S113 of FIG.

In step S1701, it is determined whether or not the processing prohibition flag is off. If the processing prohibition flag is off, the process proceeds to step S1702, and if not, the process proceeds to step S1705. In step S1702, it is determined whether or not the high navigation state flag is off. If the high navigation state flag is off, the process proceeds to step S1703, and if the high navigation state flag is not off, that is, the high navigation state flag is on, the process proceeds to step S1704.

In step S1703, since the navigation state is low, the low navigation state process B is executed. Although not shown, in this low navigation state process B, when the transition to the high navigation state is determined, a process of setting the effect state based on the information regarding each effect state is performed.

On the other hand, in step S1704, since it is in the high navigation state, the high navigation state process B (detailed later) is executed. In step S1705, after executing the other effect state control process B, the effect state control process B is terminated.

<High navigation state processing B>
Next, the high navigation state processing B will be described with reference to FIG. 27. FIG. 27 is a flowchart showing in detail the flow of the high navigation state processing B in step S1704 of FIG. 26.

In step S1801, it is determined whether or not the effect state is the normal state, and if applicable, the process proceeds to step S1802, and if not applicable, the process proceeds to step S1803. In step S1802, normal state processing B (detailed later) is executed.

In step S1803, it is determined whether or not the effect state is the finalized notification state, and if applicable, the process proceeds to step S1804, and if not applicable, the process proceeds to step S1805. In step S1804, the final notification state process B (detailed later) is executed.

In step S1805, it is determined whether or not the effect state is the AT1 state, and if applicable, the process proceeds to step S1806, and if not applicable, the process proceeds to step S1807. In step S1806, AT1 state processing B (detailed later) is executed.

In step S1807, it is determined whether or not the effect state is the judge state, and if applicable, the process proceeds to step S1808, and if not applicable, the process proceeds to step S1809. In step S1808, judge state processing B (detailed later) is executed.

In step S1809, it is determined whether or not the effect state is the AT2 state, and if applicable, the process proceeds to step S1810, and if not applicable, the process proceeds to step S1811. In step S1812, AT2 state processing B (detailed later) is executed.

In step S1811, it is determined whether or not the effect state is the pullback state, and if applicable, the process proceeds to step S1812, and if not, the process proceeds to step S1813. In step S1812, the pullback state process B (detailed later) is executed.

In step S1813, after executing LMT state processing B (details will be described later), high navigation state processing B is terminated.

<Normal state processing B>
Next, the normal state processing B will be described with reference to FIG. 28. FIG. 28 is a flowchart showing in detail the flow of the normal state processing B in step S1802 of FIG. 27.

In step S1901, it is determined whether or not the effect state counter = 0 (whether or not the normal state has ended). If the effect state counter = 0, the process proceeds to step S1902, and if not, the process proceeds to step S1903. In step S1902, the process proceeds to step S1903 after setting the finalized notification state in the effect state. As a result, in the next game, the effect state shifts from the normal state to the finalized notification state, and the effect (for example, bonus confirmation display) corresponding to the finalized notification state is started. In step S1903, the normal state process B is terminated after the other normal state process B is performed.

<Final notification status processing B>
Next, the final notification state processing B will be described with reference to FIG. 29. FIG. 29 is a flowchart showing in detail the flow of the final notification state processing B in step S1804 of FIG. 27.

In step S2001, it is determined whether the confirmation flag is off or on, and if it is off, the process proceeds to step S2002, and if it is on, the process proceeds to step S2003. In step S2002, after turning on the confirmation notification flag, the process proceeds to step S2006. In step S2003, it is determined whether or not the result is an internal winning result related to the AT1 type.

Specifically, in this example, when the AT1 type is low, it is determined whether or not the internal winning result is "replaying combination 2, 4 to 10" of the condition device No. 3, and the AT1 type is If it is high, it is determined whether or not the internal winning result is the "replaying combination 3, 4, 6, 8, 10 to 13" of the condition device No. 4. As a result of the determination, if applicable, the process proceeds to step S2004, and if not applicable, the process proceeds to step S2006.

In step S2004, the AT1 initial value (20 in this example) is set in the effect state counter, and in the next step S2005, the AT1 state is set in the effect state, and then the process proceeds to step S2006. As a result, in the next game, the effect state shifts from the finalized notification state to the AT1 state, and the effect (for example, operation navigation) corresponding to the AT1 state is started. In the present embodiment, the initial value (20 in this example) is set in the effect state counter in step S2004, but other numerical values may be used. In step S2006, after performing other final notification state processing B, the final notification state processing B is terminated.

<AT1 state processing B>
Next, AT1 state processing B will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 30 is a flowchart showing in detail the flow of AT1 state processing B in step S1806 of FIG. 27.

In step S2101, it is determined whether or not the effect state counter = 0 (whether or not the AT1 state has ended). If the effect state counter = 0, the process proceeds to step S2102, and if not, the process proceeds to step S2106. In step S2102, the judge initial value (10 in this example) is set in the effect state counter. In the present embodiment, the initial value (10 in this example) is set in the effect state counter in step S2102, but other numerical values may be used. Therefore, for example, the initial value may be changed according to the effect state immediately before the judge state, or the initial value may be determined by lottery.

In step S2103, it is determined whether or not the judge mode is heaven, and if applicable, the process proceeds to step S2104, and if not, the process proceeds to step S2105. In step S2104, the release counter is set with the lottery value (number of games) determined by the lottery, and then the process proceeds to step 2105. The content of the lottery in step S2104 is not particularly limited, but in this example, the higher the set value, the smaller the value is selected, and when there is stock in the heaven mode, the smaller value is selected, and the value of the high navigation state counter is small. It is configured so that a smaller number is selected.

In step S2105, after setting the judge state in the effect state, the process proceeds to step S2106. As a result, in the next game, the effect state shifts from the AT1 state to the judge state, and the effect corresponding to the judge state is started. In step S2106, the AT1 state process B is terminated after the other AT1 state process B is performed.

<Judge state processing B>
Next, the judge state processing B will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 31 is a flowchart showing in detail the flow of the judge state processing B in step S1808 of FIG. 27.

In step S2201, it is determined whether or not the judge state = definite (whether or not the judge succeeds), and if the king is the king, the process proceeds to step S2202, and if not, the process proceeds to step S2205. In step S2202, the AT2 initial number of lottery is performed. This AT2 initial number lottery is a lottery for determining the number of games in the AT2 state. In this example, one of the numerical values of 30, 50, 55, 66, 100 is selected by lottery. As an exception, when the set value is set 5, 55 is selected regardless of the lottery, and when the set value is set 6, 66 is selected regardless of the lottery.

In step S2203, the lottery value (number of games) of the AT2 initial number of times lottery is set in the effect state counter, and then the process proceeds to step 2204. In step S2204, after setting the AT2 state in the effect state, the process proceeds to step S2208. As a result, in the next game, the effect state shifts from the judge state to the AT2 state, and the effect corresponding to the AT2 state is started.

In step S2205, it is determined whether or not the effect state counter = 0 (whether or not the judge state has ended), and if applicable, the process proceeds to step S2206, and if not applicable, the process proceeds to step S2208. In step S2206, the pullback initial value (1 in this example) is set in the effect state counter, and in the next step S2207, the pullback state is set to the effect state. As a result, in the next game, the effect state shifts from the AT2 state to the pullback state, and the effect corresponding to the pullback state is started.

In the present embodiment, the pullback initial value (1 in this example) is set in the effect state counter in step S2206, but other values may be used. Therefore, for example, it may be a fixed value other than 1, or 1 + α (variable value). In step S2208, the judge state process B is terminated after the other judge state process B is performed.

<AT2 state processing B>
Next, AT2 state processing B will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 32 is a flowchart showing in detail the flow of the AT2 state processing B in step S1810 of FIG. 27.

In step S2301, it is determined whether or not the effect state counter = 0 (whether or not the AT2 state has ended). If the effect state counter = 0, the process proceeds to step S2302, and if not, the process proceeds to step S2306. In step S2302, the judge initial value (10 in this example) is set in the effect state counter. In the present embodiment, the initial value (10 in this example) is set in the effect state counter in step S2302, but other numerical values may be used. Therefore, for example, the initial value may be changed according to the effect state immediately before the judge state, or the initial value may be determined by lottery.

In step S2303, it is determined whether or not the judge mode is heaven, and if applicable, the process proceeds to step S2304, and if not applicable, the process proceeds to step S2305. In step S2304, the lottery value (number of games) determined by the lottery is set in the release counter, and then the process proceeds to step 2305. The content of the lottery in step S2304 is not particularly limited, but in this example, the higher the set value, the smaller the value is selected, and when there is stock in the heaven mode, the smaller value is selected, and the value of the high navigation state counter is small. It is configured so that a smaller number is selected.

In step S2305, after setting the judge state in the effect state, the process proceeds to step S2306. As a result, in the next game, the effect state shifts from the AT2 state to the judge state, and the effect corresponding to the judge state is started. In step S2306, the AT2 state process B is terminated after the other AT2 state process B is performed.

<Pullback state processing B>
Next, the pullback state process B will be described with reference to FIG. 33. FIG. 33 is a flowchart showing in detail the flow of the pullback state process B in step S1812 of FIG. 27.

In step S2401, it is determined whether or not the pullback state = fixed (whether or not to pull back), and if applicable, the process proceeds to step S2402, and if not, the process proceeds to step S2405. In step S2402, the AT2 initial number of lottery is performed. This AT2 initial number lottery is a lottery for determining the number of games in the AT2 state. In this example, one of the numerical values of 30, 50, 55, 66, 100 is selected by lottery. As an exception, when the set value is set 5, 55 is selected regardless of the lottery, and when the set value is set 6, 66 is selected regardless of the lottery.

In step S2404, the process proceeds to step S2407 after setting the AT2 state in the effect state. As a result, in the next game, the effect state shifts from the pullback state to the AT2 state, and the effect corresponding to the AT2 state is started. In the present embodiment, in the first hit (shift to the first AT state after shifting from the low navigation state to the high navigation state), the effect state shifts to AT1, whereas in the judge state or the pullback state. The effect state is configured to shift to AT2, which is more advantageous to the player than AT1.

In step S2405, it is determined whether or not the effect state counter = 0 (whether or not the pullback state is completed), and if applicable, the process proceeds to step S2406, and if not, the process proceeds to step S2407. In step S2406, the process proceeds to step S2407 after turning on the high navigation state end standby flag. In step S2407, the pullback state process B is terminated after the other pullback state process B is performed.

<LMT state processing B>
Next, the LMT state processing B will be described with reference to FIG. 34. FIG. 34 is a flowchart showing in detail the flow of the LMT state processing B in step S1813 of FIG. 27.

In step S2501, it is determined whether or not the effect state counter = 0 (whether or not the LMT state has ended). If the effect state counter = 0, the process proceeds to step S2502, and if not, the LMT state process B ends. In step S2502, the process proceeds to step S2503 after setting the high navigation state end standby flag to ON. In step S2503, the LMT state processing B is terminated after the other LMT state processing B is performed.

<High navigation state end processing>
Next, the high navigation state end processing will be described with reference to FIG. 35. FIG. 35 is a flowchart showing in detail the flow of the high navigation state end processing in step S114 of FIG.

In step S2601, it is determined whether or not the high navigation state flag is on. If the high navigation state flag is on, the process proceeds to step S2602, and if not, the high navigation state end process is terminated. In step S2602, it is determined whether or not the high navigation state end wait flag is on. If the high navigation state end wait flag is on, the process proceeds to step S2603, and if not, the process proceeds to step S2604.

In step S2603, the high navigation state end wait flag is turned off. After the process of step S2603, the process proceeds to step S2606.

In step S2604, it is determined whether or not the value of the high navigation state counter is 0. This corresponds to the case because if there is a game in which the processing prohibition flag is on, the value of the high navigation state counter may become 0 before the high navigation state end wait flag is turned on. Is. If the value of the high navigation state counter is 0, the process proceeds to step S2606, and if not, the process proceeds to step S2605.

In step S2605, it is determined whether or not the difference number counter> the maximum value for ending the high navigation state, and if applicable, the process proceeds to step S2606, and if not, the processing for ending the high navigation state ends. This is because if there is a game in which the processing prohibition flag is on, the condition of difference number counter> high navigation state end maximum value may be satisfied before the high navigation state end standby flag is turned on. It corresponds to the case.

In step S2606, the high navigation state flag is turned off. As a result, the high navigation state lamp 190 that was lit goes out. In step S2607, the high navigation state end process is terminated after the other high navigation state end process is executed. In other high navigation state end processing, for example, the AT system game state is set to the low navigation state (normal mode), and various flags and counters used for the transition control of the high navigation state are initialized. Do.

<Normal state processing A (Modification example 1)>
Next, the normal state processing A according to the first modification will be described with reference to FIG. 36. FIG. 36 is a drawing corresponding to FIG. 19, and is a flowchart showing in detail the flow of the normal state processing A according to the first modification. Note that the same processing as the normal state processing A described with reference to FIG. 19 is designated by the same reference numerals in the drawings, and the description thereof will be omitted.

The normal state processing A according to the first modification is obtained by deleting the processing of steps S1012 to S1013 and adding the processing of steps S1021 to S1025 to the normal state processing A described with reference to FIG.

Step S1021 is a process executed when the ceiling counter is determined to be 0 in step S1004. In this example, in step S1021, a process of setting the ceiling arrival flag to ON is executed.

Further, step S1022 is a process executed when it is determined that the AT1 type is "low". In this example, in step S1022, it is determined whether the ceiling arrival flag is off or on, and this is applicable. In the case, the process proceeds to step S1023, and if not applicable, the process proceeds to step S1016. In step S1023, it is determined whether or not the ceiling counter is 0, and if applicable, the process proceeds to step S1024, and if not applicable, the process proceeds to step S1016.

In step S1024, "high" is set for the AT1 type, and in the next step S1025, the judge mode is set to "high accuracy", and then the process proceeds to step S1106.

In the normal state processing A described with reference to FIG. 19, the AT1 type is set to “low” or “high” when the ceiling in the normal state is reached, and after shifting to the final notification state, the AT1 type is changed from “low” to “high”. It was configured to be promoted to. On the other hand, in the normal state processing A according to the modification 1, the state is managed only by the ceiling counter without using the promotion counter, and when the ceiling counter becomes 0, the AT1 type is set to "low". It is configured to promote from to "high" and set the judge mode with high accuracy.

<Normal state processing A (modification example 2)>
Next, the normal state processing A according to the second modification will be described with reference to FIG. 37. FIG. 37 is a drawing corresponding to FIG. 19, and is a flowchart showing in detail the flow of the normal state processing A according to the modification 2. Note that the same processes as the normal state process A described with reference to FIG. 19 and the normal state process A (modification example 1) described with reference to FIG. 36 are designated by the same reference numerals in the drawings, and the description thereof will be omitted. To do.

The normal state process A according to the second modification deletes the processes of steps S1012 to S1013 with respect to the normal state process A described with reference to FIG. 19, the processes of steps S1021 to S1025, and the processes of steps S1031 to S1032. Is added.

Step S1031 is a process executed when it is determined in step S1022 that the ceiling arrival flag is on. In this example, in step S1031, after executing the promotion counter addition lottery, in the next step S1032. , The numerical value (lottery result value) determined in the promotion counter addition lottery is added to the promotion counter, and then the process proceeds to step S1016.

In the normal state processing A according to the modification 1, the state is managed only by the ceiling counter without using the promotion counter, and when the ceiling counter becomes 0, the AT1 type is changed from "low" to "high". In addition to being promoted, it was configured to set the judge mode with high accuracy. On the other hand, in the normal state processing A according to the modification 2, when the ceiling counter becomes 0, the AT1 type is promoted from "low" to "high" and the judge mode is set with high accuracy. It is the same in that it is configured as, but in addition, the status is managed using the promotion counter, and if the value of the promotion counter is equal to or higher than the ceiling value, the AT1 type is configured to be promoted from "low" to "high". There is.

<Final notification state processing A (modification example 1)>
Next, the final notification state process A according to the first modification will be described with reference to FIG. 38. FIG. 38 is a drawing corresponding to FIG. 20, and is a flowchart showing in detail the flow of the final notification state processing A according to the first modification. The same processing as the final notification state processing A described with reference to FIG. 20 is designated by the same reference numerals in the drawings, and the description thereof will be omitted.

The finalized notification state process A according to the first modification is obtained by deleting the processes of steps S1102 to S1104 and adding the processes of steps S1121 to S1125 to the finalized notification state process A described with reference to FIG. ..

In step S1120, it is determined whether or not the ceiling counter> 0. If the ceiling counter> 0, the process proceeds to step S1121, and if not, the process proceeds to step S1101. In step S1121, the value of the ceiling counter is subtracted by 1.

Step S1123 is a process executed when it is determined in step S1101 that the AT1 type is "low". In this example, in step S1123, it is determined whether the ceiling arrival flag is off or on, and this is applicable. In the case, the process proceeds to step S1124, and if not applicable, the process proceeds to step S1109. In step S1124, it is determined whether or not the ceiling counter is 0, and if applicable, the process proceeds to step S1125, and if not applicable, the process proceeds to step S1109. In step S1125, the ceiling flag is set to on, and then the process proceeds to step S1105.

In the finalized notification state processing A described with reference to FIG. 20, the AT1 type is promoted from “low” to “high” after shifting to the finalized notification state. On the other hand, in the final notification state processing A according to the modification 1, the state is managed only by the ceiling counter without using the promotion counter, and when the ceiling counter becomes 0 in the final notification state, AT1 The type is promoted from "low" to "high", and the judge mode is set with high accuracy.

<Final notification state processing A (modification example 2)>
Next, the final notification state processing A according to the second modification will be described with reference to FIG. 39. FIG. 39 is a drawing corresponding to FIG. 20, and is a flowchart showing in detail the flow of the final notification state processing A according to the second modification. The same processes as the finalized notification state process A described with reference to FIG. 20 and the finalized notification state process A (modification example 2) described with reference to FIG. 38 are designated by the same reference numerals in the drawings and described thereof. Is omitted.

The finalized notification state process A according to the second modification deletes the processes of steps S1102 to S1104 with respect to the finalized notification state process A described with reference to FIG. 20, the processes of steps S1121 to S1125, and steps S1131 to S1131. S1133 is added.

Step S1131 is a process executed when it is determined in step S1101 that the AT1 type is "low". In this example, after executing the promotion counter addition lottery in step S1131, the next step S1132 In, the numerical value (lottery result value) determined in the promotion counter addition lottery is added to the promotion counter, and then the process proceeds to step S1133. In step S1133, it is determined whether or not the value of the promotion counter is equal to or higher than the ceiling value, and if applicable, the process proceeds to step S1105, and if not, the process proceeds to step S1123.

In the finalized notification state processing A according to the first modification, the status is managed only by the ceiling counter without using the promotion counter, and when the ceiling counter becomes 0 in the finalized notification state, the AT1 type is set to "low". Was configured to be promoted to "high". On the other hand, the finalized notification state processing A according to the second modification is the same in that the AT1 type is promoted from "low" to "high" when the ceiling counter becomes 0 in the finalized notification state. Furthermore, the status is managed using the promotion counter, and when the value of the promotion counter is equal to or higher than the ceiling value, the AT1 type is promoted from "low" to "high", while the value of the promotion counter is less than the ceiling value. Is configured to promote the AT1 type from "low" to "high" when the ceiling counter is 0.

<Final notification state processing A and final notification state processing B (modification example 3)>
Next, the finalized notification state process A and the finalized notification state process B according to the third modification will be described with reference to FIGS. 40 and 41. FIG. 40 is a drawing corresponding to FIG. 20, and is a flowchart showing in detail the flow of the final notification state processing A according to the third modification. Further, FIG. 41 is a drawing corresponding to FIG. 29, and is a flowchart showing in detail the flow of the final notification state processing B according to the modification 3. The same processes as the finalized notification state process A described with reference to FIG. 20 and the finalized notification state process B described with reference to FIG. 29 are designated by the same reference numerals in the drawings, and the description thereof will be omitted.

The finalized notification state process A according to the third modification shown in FIG. 40 is obtained by adding the process of step S1140 to the finalized notification state process A described with reference to FIG. 20. Step S1140 is a process executed when the promotion counter is determined to be equal to or higher than the ceiling value in step S1104. In step S1140, the promotion flag is set to ON, and then the process proceeds to step S1109.

The finalized notification state process B according to the third modification shown in FIG. 41 is obtained by adding the processes of steps S2010 to S2012 to the finalized notification state process B described with reference to FIG. 29. Step S2010 is a process executed when it is determined in step S2001 that the confirmation notification flag is on. In step S2010, it is determined whether the promotion flag is on or off, and if it is on, step S2011. If it is off, the process proceeds to step S2003.

In step S2011, it is determined whether the promotion notification is off or on, and if it is off, the process proceeds to step S2012, and if it is on, the process proceeds to step S2003. In step S2012, the promotion notification is turned on, and then the process proceeds to step S2006.

In the finalized notification state process A described with reference to FIG. 20 and the finalized notification state process B described with reference to FIG. 29, the promotion counter is not added when the AT1 type is "low", so that the AT1 type promotion and the condition device are used. It was configured so that No. 4 internal winnings would not occur at the same time. On the other hand, in the final notification state processing A and the final notification state processing B according to the modified example 3, the promotion of AT1 type and the internal winning of the condition device No. 4 can be generated at the same time, while the AT1 is generated at the same time. It is configured so that it does not shift to the state. With such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the operation navigation and the promotion effect at the time of AT1 type promotion from being executed at the same time, so that only the promotion effect can be shown to the player firmly, and the interest of the player is enhanced. You may be able to.

When the normal state process A according to the modified example 1 described with reference to FIG. 36 and the normal state process A according to the modified example 2 described with reference to FIG. 37 are applied, the AT1 type is promoted in the ceiling reaching game. And the internal winning of the condition device No. 4 may occur at the same time. In this case, as in the case of this modification 3, the promotion flag should be used so that the games generated at the same time do not shift to the AT1 state. Just do it.

<Modified Example of Embodiment 1>
Next, the slot machine according to the modified example of the first embodiment of the present invention will be described in detail with reference to the drawings. In addition, in order to avoid duplicate explanations, in principle, only the configuration different from the game console according to the first embodiment will be described. Further, in principle, the reference numerals shown in FIGS. 42 to 51 are used only for the description of the modification of the first embodiment, and even when the overlapping reference numerals are shown in other drawings, the reference numerals of the first embodiment are used. In the description of the modified example, the reference numerals shown in FIGS. 42 to 51 are given priority.

<Types of winning roles>
First, the types of winning combinations of the slot machine 100 will be described with reference to FIG. 42. Note that FIG. 42 is a diagram showing the types of winning combinations (including operating combinations), the combination of symbols corresponding to each winning combination, and the operation or payout of each winning combination.

The winning combination of the slot machine 100 includes a special role (special role 1) and a general role (replaying role 1 to replaying combination 3, small winning combination 1 to small winning combination 3). The types of winning combinations are not limited to these combinations, and can be arbitrarily adopted.

Among the winning combinations in the present embodiment, the special combination 1 is a combination that shifts to a special gaming state in which a predetermined profit is given to the player. Further, the re-gaming combination 1 to the re-gaming combination 3 are roles that enable re-gaming without inserting a new medal. These winning combinations are sometimes referred to as "acting combinations". In addition, the "winning" in the present embodiment includes the case where the symbol combination of the operating combination without the distribution of medals (without the payout of medals) is displayed on the valid line, for example, the special combination 1 and Winning of the re-game combination 1 to the re-game combination 3 is included.

The special role 1 is a role (acting role) that shifts to a special gaming state by winning a prize. No medals will be paid out for winning the role itself. The corresponding symbol combination is "BAR-BAR-BAR".

When the special combination 1 is internally won, the special combination internal winning flag corresponding to the internally won combination is set to on (stored in a predetermined area of the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300). When the flag is set to ON by the internal winning of the special combination 1, the main control unit 300 shifts the gaming state to the special combination internal winning state (hereinafter, this state may be referred to as RT2).

This flag remains on until the internally won combination is won, and it becomes easy to win the internally won combination in the next and subsequent games. That is, even if the special role is not won in the game that is internally won in the special role 1, the special role will be internally won in the next and subsequent games, and the symbol combination corresponding to the special role (in this example, "BAR-" BAR-BAR "design combination) will be in a state where it is easy to win a prize. This special role internal winning state (RT3) will be described later.

The main control unit 300 shifts the gaming state to the special gaming state (hereinafter, this state may be referred to as RT4) based on the display of the symbol combination corresponding to the special combination 1. Further, in this special game state, when a predetermined number of cards (300 cards in this example) are paid out, the game shifts to a re-game low probability state (hereinafter, this state may be referred to as RT1). The special gaming state (RT3) and the re-gaming low probability state (RT1) will be described later.

The "re-game combination (re-game combination 1 to re-game combination 3)" is a winning combination (actuating role) that allows a player to play a game without inserting a medal (game medium) in the next game by winning a prize. No medals will be paid out. The corresponding symbol combinations are "replay-replay-replay (normal replay)" for replay role 1, "bell-replay-replay (promotion replay)" for replay role 2, and "replay-" for replay role 3. Replay-Bell (falling replay 2) ".

"Small role (small role 1 to small role 3)" is a winning role in which a predetermined number of medals are paid out by winning, and the corresponding symbol combinations are "ANY-cherry-ANY" for small role 1 and small role 2 for small role 2. "Watermelon-watermelon-watermelon (watermelon 1)", small role 3 is "bell-bell-bell (bell)". The corresponding payout number is as shown in the figure. In the case of "ANY-cherry-ANY", the symbol of the middle reel 111 may be "cherry", and the symbols of the left reel 110 and the right reel 112 may be any symbol. In addition, when the small winning combination 2 (watermelon 1) is internally won, the watermelon symbol is arranged in more than 4 frames, so if the timing of operating the stop buttons 137 to 139 is not suitable, the watermelon symbol will be the winning line. Does not stop at.

<Type of game state>
Next, the types and transitions of the gaming state of the slot machine according to the modified example of the first embodiment of the present invention will be described. FIG. 43A is a transition diagram of the gaming state of the main control unit 300 of the slot machine according to the modified example of the first embodiment of the present invention.

The main control unit 300 of the slot machine according to the modified example of the first embodiment of the present invention is roughly classified into a replay low probability state (RT1), a replay high probability state (RT4), and a special role internal winning state (RT2). , And have a special gaming state (RT3). In the present embodiment, the gaming states roughly divided into these four are referred to as RT-type gaming states. Further, in the present embodiment, the main control unit 300 also controls a state related to the so-called AT (assist time) (hereinafter, referred to as an AT system game state), and according to the AT system game state determined by the main control unit 300. The first sub-control unit 400 is designed to set the gaming state. The game state of the AT system will be described later with reference to FIG. 43 (b).

The re-game low probability state (RT1) is a state in which the probability of operation of the condition device related to the re-game combination does not change (default state), a re-game high probability state (RT4), and a special role internal winning state (RT2). ), And the special gaming state (RT3) are also states in which the probability of operation of the condition device related to the re-gaming combination varies from the default state.

<Lottery table>
FIG. 44A is a diagram showing a lottery table used for the internal lottery process of the winning combination. The horizontal axis represents each game state (RT-type game state), and the vertical axis shows the lottery value of each winning combination.

The internal winning probability of the winning combination in each gaming state described below is a random number obtained at the time of the internal lottery by acquiring numerical data corresponding to the range of the lottery data associated with each winning combination from the lottery data prepared in the ROM 306. It is obtained by dividing by the numerical data (for example, 65535) in the numerical range. For example, in the re-game low probability state (RT1), the lottery value of the small winning combination 2 is 512, and the winning probability of the small winning combination 1 is 512/65536 × 100 ≈ 0.8%. The lottery data is divided into several numerical ranges in advance, and each numerical range is associated with each winning combination or loss.

It is determined which combination the random number value obtained as a result of executing the internal lottery corresponds to the lottery data, and the internal lottery combination is determined. The lottery data is prepared with settings 1 to 6 having different winning probabilities for at least one combination, and a game store clerk or the like can arbitrarily select and set any of the set values. The internal winning probability shown in this figure is an example, and is not limited to this probability.

Hereinafter, the game state of the RT system of the slot machine 100 will be described with reference to the drawings as appropriate.

<Replay low probability state (RT1)>
The re-game low probability state is a game state in which the internal winning probability of the re-game is the lowest (disadvantageous to the player) among other game states (for example, a game state excluding the special game state), and is referred to as a normal game state. There is also. In the re-game low probability state, the winning combination to be internally won is drawn with reference to the lottery table in the column of "RT1" on the horizontal axis shown in FIG. 43A.

Winning roles that are internally won in the low probability state of re-game include special role 1, special role 1 + small role 1, special role 1 + small role 2, re-game role 1, re-game role 1 + re-game role 2, small role 1, There are a small role 2, a small role 3a, and a small role 3b. If the winning combination is not won, the winning combination will be lost and the symbol combination corresponding to the winning combination will not be displayed. In addition, the fact that the symbol combination related to the winning is not stopped on the winning line may be referred to as "loss". In addition, the fact that the winning combination was not won may be expressed as "winning a loss".

Here, "special role 1 + small role 1" means that the special role 1 and the small role 1 are internally elected at the same time. Similarly, "special role 1 + small role 2" means that special role 1 and small role 2 are internally elected at the same time. In these cases, it is determined whether or not the symbol combination corresponding to any of the combinations is displayed according to the operation of the player. More specifically, in any of the winning lines, unless it is impossible to win any of the internally winning combinations, the symbols constituting the symbol combination corresponding to the winning line are stopped.

Further, "re-game combination 1 + re-game combination 2" means that the re-game combination 1 and the re-game combination 2 are internally elected at the same time. In this case, which combination of symbols is displayed is determined according to the operation order of the player. More specifically, when the stop operation is performed according to the correct operation order, which is a predetermined operation order, the symbol combination (promotion replay) corresponding to the replay combination 2 is displayed on the winning line (FIG. 44 (Fig. 44). a) In the remarks column, refer to the correct answer in the push order), in other cases, the symbol combination (normal replay) corresponding to the replay combination 1 is displayed on the winning line (in the remarks column of FIG. 44 (a)). , See when the push order is incorrect).

A combination in which the winning combination is determined by the operation order, such as this "replaying combination 1 + replaying combination 2", may be referred to as a "pushing order combination".

Here, with reference to FIG. 44 (b), the operation order of the correct answer of "re-game combination 1 + re-game combination 2" will be described in detail. FIG. 44B is a diagram for explaining the correct operation order of the push order combination of the present embodiment.

To be precise, "re-game combination 1 + re-game combination 2" is subdivided into "re-game combination 2L", "re-game combination 2C", and "re-game combination 2R". Different correct operation orders are assigned to each of the subdivided "re-game combination 1 + re-game combination 2". The range of lottery data associated with each of the three subdivided "re-game combination 1 + re-game combination 2" is the same.

For example, when the "re-game combination 2L" of "re-game combination 1 + re-game combination 2" is internally won, the stop operation with the first stop reel as the left reel 110 is the correct operation, and other operations. The stop operation is an incorrect answer operation. In addition, when the "re-game combination 2C" of "re-game combination 1 + re-game combination 2" is internally won, the stop operation in which the first stop reel is the middle reel 111 is the correct operation, and other than that. The stop operation is an incorrect answer operation. In addition, when the "re-game combination 2R" of "re-game combination 1 + re-game combination 2" is internally won, the stop operation in which the first stop reel is the right reel 112 is the correct operation, and other than that. The stop operation is an incorrect answer operation.

Up to this point, the "re-game combination 1 + re-game combination 2" in FIG. 44A has been described, but the "small combination 3a" also has a different winning combination depending on the operation order of the player.

When the "small winning combination 3a" is internally won, it is determined whether or not the symbol combination corresponding to the small winning combination 3 (bell) is displayed on the winning line according to the operation order of the player (FIG. 44 (Fig. 44). a) See the remarks column). More specifically, when the stop operation is performed according to the correct operation order, which is a predetermined operation order, "bell-bell-bell" is displayed on the winning line and 11 medals are paid out (11 medals are paid out). Bell winning). On the other hand, if the stop operation is not performed according to the correct answer operation order, "bell-bell-bell" is not displayed on the winning line (loss).

On the other hand, when the "small winning combination 3b" is internally won, "bell-bell-bell" is displayed on the winning line regardless of the operation order, and 11 medals are paid out. (See FIG. 44 (a) Remarks column).

Here, the operation order of the correct answer of "small combination 3a" will be described in detail with reference to FIG. 44 (b).

To be precise, "small role 3a" is divided into six "small role 3LCR", "small role 3LRC", "small role 3CLR", "small role 3CRL", "small role 3RLC" and "small role 3RCL". It is subdivided and set, and different correct operation orders are assigned corresponding to each of the subdivided "small winning combination 3a". The range of lottery data associated with each of the six subdivided "small winning combinations 3a" is the same.

For example, when the "small winning combination 3LCR" of the "small winning combination 3a" is internally won, the first stop reel is the left reel 110, the second stop reel is the middle reel 111, and the third stop reel is the right reel 112. The stop operation is a correct operation, and the other stop operations are incorrect operations. Further, when the "small winning combination 3CRL" of the "small winning combination 3a" is internally won, the first stop reel is the middle reel 111, the second stop reel is the right reel 112, and the third stop reel is the left reel 110. The stop operation is the correct operation. The same applies to the "small winning combination 3a" and "small winning combination 3b" described here in the gaming state described below.

In FIG. 43 (a), when the condition (A) is satisfied in the re-game low probability state (RT1), that is, when the symbol combination corresponding to the re-game combination 2 is displayed on the valid line (re-game). When the winning combination 2 is won), it is shown that the player shifts to the replay high probability state (RT2) described later. Further, the figure shows that when the condition (C) is satisfied, that is, when the special role 1 or the special role 2 is internally elected, the state shifts to the special role internal winning state (RT3) described later. ing. Further, when the condition (D) is satisfied, that is, when the symbol combination corresponding to the special role 1 or the special role 2 is displayed on the valid line (when the special role 1 or the special role 2 is won). It has been shown to shift to the special gaming state (RT4) described later.

In the present embodiment, the small winning combination 3a as the pushing order combination is a single combination, but it may be a duplicate combination that is elected at the same time as another small combination. When the first to third stop operations are performed according to the correct operation order, the small winning combination 3 is won in the same point.

For example, if it is set as "small winning combination 3 + small winning combination A + small winning combination B" and (1) the correct answer stop operation (correct answer operation order) is performed, the symbol combination corresponding to the small winning combination 3 is on the effective line. When (2) the incorrect answer stop operation is performed (the first stop operation is the correct answer), the symbol combination corresponding to the small winning combination A is displayed on the valid line, and (3) the incorrect answer stop operation is performed. If this is the case (the first stop operation is incorrect) and the stop operation is performed within the pull-in range of the symbol of the small winning combination B, the symbol combination corresponding to the small winning combination B is displayed on the valid line. (4) If the wrong answer is stopped (the first stop operation is incorrect) and the stop operation is performed outside the pull-in range of the symbol of the small winning combination B, the spill is on the effective line. It may be displayed.

In addition, when "small combination 3 + small combination X" is set, (1) when the correct stop operation (the stop operation from the first stop operation to the third stop operation is the correct answer) is performed, the small combination 3 is supported. The symbol combination to be used is displayed on the valid line, and (2) the incorrect stop operation is performed (the first stop operation is correct, the second stop operation is incorrect, or the first stop operation is incorrect, and the second stop is performed. If the operation is correct) and the third stop operation is performed within the pull-in range of the symbol of the small winning combination X, the symbol combination corresponding to the small winning combination X is displayed on the valid line, and (3) the incorrect answer stop operation (The first stop operation is correct, the second stop operation is incorrect, or the first stop operation is incorrect, the second stop operation is correct), and the third stop is outside the pull-in range of the symbol of the small winning combination X. When the operation is performed, the spilled eyes may be displayed on the effective line. In the third stop operation, the small winning combination X may be won by aiming at the small winning combination X. Here, the correct answer for the stop operation means that the operation order is correct and / and the operation timing is suitable (operation within the pull-in range of the symbol corresponding to the predetermined small winning combination).

Further, when "small combination 3 + small combination Y" is set in addition to the above-mentioned "small combination 3 + small combination X" and (1) the correct answer is stopped, the symbol combination corresponding to the small combination 3 is obtained. It is displayed on the valid line, and (2) when the incorrect answer stop operation is performed and the third stop operation is performed within the pull-in range of the symbol of the small winning combination X, the symbol combination corresponding to the small winning combination Y is displayed. It is displayed on the effective line, and (3) if the incorrect answer stop operation is performed and the third stop operation is performed outside the pull-in range of the symbol of the small winning combination Y, a spill is displayed on the effective line. You may do so. In this case, in the third stop operation in the incorrect stop operation, since it is not known whether the winning combination is the small winning combination X or the small winning combination Y, it is possible to prevent the small winning combination winning in the third stop operation. In some cases.

<Replay high probability state (RT4)>
The re-game high probability state (RT4) is a game state in which the internal winning probability of the re-game combination is higher than that of the re-game low probability state (RT1). In the re-game high probability state (RT4), the winning combination to be internally won is drawn with reference to the lottery table in the column of "RT4" on the horizontal axis shown in FIG. 44A.

The winning roles that are internally won in the re-game high probability state (RT4) are special role 1, special role 1 + small role 1, special role 1 + small role 2, re-game role 1, re-game role 1 + re-game role 3, small. There are a combination 1, a small combination 2, a small combination 3a, and a small combination 3b. If the winning combination is not won, the winning combination will be lost and the symbol combination corresponding to the winning combination will not be displayed.

Here, "re-game combination 1 + re-game combination 3" means that the re-game combination 1 and the re-game combination 3 are internally elected at the same time. In this case, which combination of symbols is displayed is determined according to the operation order of the player. More specifically, when the stop operation is performed according to the correct operation order, which is a predetermined operation order, the symbol combination (normal replay) corresponding to the replay combination 1 is displayed on the winning line (FIG. 44 (Fig. 44). a) In the remarks column, refer to the correct answer in the push order), in other cases, the symbol combination (falling replay) corresponding to the replay combination 3 is displayed on the winning line (in the remarks column of FIG. 44 (a)). , See when the push order is incorrect). That is, "re-game combination 1 + re-game combination 3" is also a push order combination.

Here, with reference to FIG. 44 (b), the operation order of the correct answer of "re-game combination 1 + re-game combination 3" will be described in detail.

To be precise, "re-game combination 1 + re-game combination 3" are "re-game combination 3L", "re-game combination 3C", and "re-game combination 3R", as shown in FIG. 44 (b). It is set to be subdivided into, and different operation orders of correct answers are assigned corresponding to each of the subdivided "re-game combination 1 + re-game combination 3". The range of the lottery data associated with each of the three subdivided "re-game combination 1 + re-game combination 3" is the same.

For example, when the "re-game combination 3L" of "re-game combination 1 + re-game combination 3" is internally won, the stop operation with the first stop reel as the left reel 110 is the correct operation, and other operations. The stop operation is an incorrect answer operation. In addition, when the "re-game combination 3C" of "re-game combination 1 + re-game combination 3" is internally won, the stop operation in which the first stop reel is the middle reel 111 is the correct operation, and other than that. The stop operation is an incorrect answer operation. In addition, when the "re-game combination 3R" of "re-game combination 1 + re-game combination 3" is internally won, the stop operation in which the first stop reel is the right reel 112 is the correct operation, and other than that. The stop operation is an incorrect answer operation.

In the present embodiment, when the push order combination (re-game combination 1 + re-game combination 2, re-game combination 1 + re-game combination 3, small combination 3a) is internally won, it is unique based on the subdivided internal winning combination. The correct operation order was determined, that is, the correct operation order was determined by one lottery process. However, in the case of adopting a configuration in which the push order combination is not subdivided, after the push order combination is internally won in the internal lottery process of the winning combination, a lottery process for further determining the correct operation order is executed to operate the correct answer. The order may be determined.

FIG. 43 (a) shows the case where the condition (B) is satisfied in the re-game high probability state (RT4), that is, the case where the symbol combination corresponding to the re-game combination 3 is displayed on the valid line (re-game). (When the winning combination 3 is won), it is shown that the state shifts to the above-mentioned replay low probability state (RT1). Further, the figure shows that when the condition (C) is satisfied, that is, when the special combination 1 or the special combination 2 is internally elected, the state shifts to the special combination internal winning state (RT2) described later. Furthermore, when the condition (D) is satisfied, that is, when the symbol combination corresponding to the special role 1 or the special role 2 is displayed on the valid line (when the special role 1 or the special role 2 is won). , It is shown to shift to the special gaming state (RT3) described later.

<Special role internal winning state (RT2)>
The special role internal winning state (RT2) is a state in which the internal winning flag corresponding to the special role 1 or the special role 2 is set to ON, and when the player performs a stop operation at a predetermined timing, this flag is set. It is a gaming state in which the symbol combination corresponding to the corresponding special role can be displayed. In the special combination internal winning state, the winning combination to be internally won is drawn with reference to the lottery table in the column of "RT2" on the horizontal axis shown in FIG. 44A. The winning combination that is internally won in the special combination internal winning state includes a replay combination 1, a small combination 1, a small combination 2, a small combination 3a, and a small combination 3b. If the winning combination is not won, the winning combination will be lost and the symbol combination corresponding to the winning combination will not be displayed.

Further, in FIG. 44A, when the condition (D) is satisfied in the special combination internal winning state (RT2), that is, when the symbol combination corresponding to the special combination 1 or the special combination 2 is displayed. It has been shown to shift to the special gaming state (RT4) described later.

<Special game state (RT3)>
The special gaming state (RT3) is the gaming state that is most advantageous to the player among all the gaming states. In the special game state, the winning combination to be internally won is drawn with reference to the lottery table in the column of "RT3" on the horizontal axis shown in FIG. 44A. In the special game state, the winning combination that is internally won is only the small combination 3b. In addition, if the winning combination is not won, the winning combination will be lost and the symbol combination corresponding to the winning combination will not be displayed.

FIG. 44 (a) shows that in the special game state (RT3), when the condition (E) is satisfied, that is, when the specified number of sheets is paid out, the game shifts to the re-game low probability state (RT1). Has been done. Specifically, when the game shifts to the special game state based on the display of the symbol combination corresponding to the special role 1, the re-game low probability state (RT1) when more than 275 medals are paid out. ).

In this embodiment, the special game state ends when a predetermined number of cards are paid out, but for example, a game ends when a predetermined combination (for example, a single bonus) is won, or a predetermined number of times (for example, a predetermined number of times). It may be terminated when a prize is won (for example, 8 times) or when a predetermined number of games (for example, 6 times) are played.

<Transition of AT-based game state>
Next, the game state of the AT system will be described with reference to FIGS. 43 (b) and 43 (c). 43 (b) and 43 (c) are transition diagrams of the AT system gaming state of the main control unit 300 of the slot machine according to the modified example of the first embodiment of the present invention.

As shown in FIG. 43A, the AT-type gaming state is roughly classified into a low navigation state and a high navigation state. The low navigation state is a state in which the probability that the operation navigation is executed is low, and is also called a normal mode.

The high navigation state is a state in which the probability that the operation navigation is executed is higher than that in the low navigation state, and there are an AT mode and a chance mode. Here, the operation navigation is the correct operation order when the push order combination (specifically, re-game combination 1 + re-game combination 2, re-game combination 1 + re-game combination 3, small combination 3a) is internally won. It refers to the production of notifying. That is, the operation navigation refers to an effect of notifying the content of the stop operation for acquiring a medal, the content of the stop operation for shifting to an advantageous gaming state, or maintaining an advantageous gaming state.

Here, the operation navigation will be described with reference to FIGS. 44 (b) and 45. In the present embodiment, the operation navigation is executed by using the payout number display device 127 and the effect image display device 157. FIG. 44B shows display data showing the correct operation order of the push order combination of the present embodiment, and FIG. 45 is a diagram in which the display data is associated with the lighting mode of the payout number display 127.

For example, the display data 01 is data suggesting a stop operation in which the first stop reel is set to the left reel 110, the display data 02 is data suggesting a stop operation in which the first stop reel is set to the middle reel 111, and the display data 03 is data suggesting a stop operation. , The data suggesting a stop operation in which the first stop reel is the right reel 112.

Therefore, in the AT mode, when the re-game combination 2L of "re-game combination 1 + re-game combination 2" is internally won, the stop operation with the first stop reel as the left reel 110 is the correct answer, so the first stop operation is on the left. Display data 01 is selected, and the payout number display 127 displays the lighting mode corresponding to the display data 01 (see FIG. 45A), and the effect image display device 157 displays the lighting mode. , An image (eg, the letters "1-−") suggesting that the first stop reel is the left reel 110 is displayed (not shown).

Further, the display data 04 is data suggesting a stop operation in which the first stop reel is the left reel 110, the second stop reel is the middle reel 111, and the third stop reel is the right reel 112, and the display data 05 is the first stop reel. The left reel 110, the second stop reel is the right reel 112, the third stop reel is the middle reel 111, and the display data 06 indicates that the first stop reel is the middle reel 111 and the second stop reel is the middle reel 111. The data suggesting a stop operation in which the left reel 110 and the third stop reel are the right reel 112 and the display data 07 are such that the first stop reel is the middle reel 111, the second stop reel is the right reel 112, and the third stop reel is the left. The data suggesting the stop operation with the reel 110 and the display data 08 are data suggesting the stop operation with the first stop reel as the right reel 112, the second stop reel as the left reel 110, and the third stop reel as the middle reel 112. The display data 09 is data suggesting a stop operation in which the first stop reel is the right reel 112, the second stop reel is the middle reel 111, and the third stop reel is the left reel 110.

Therefore, when the small winning combination 3CLR of "small winning combination 3a" is internally won in the AT mode, the first stop reel is the middle reel 111, the second stop reel is the left reel 110, and the third stop reel is the right reel 112. Since the stop operation is the correct answer, display data 06 suggesting that the first stop operation is in the middle, the second stop operation is on the left, and the third stop operation is on the right is selected, and the display data 06 is displayed on the payout number display 127. The lighting mode corresponding to (see FIG. 45B) is displayed, and the effect image display device 157 has the first stop reel as the middle reel 111, the second stop reel as the left reel 110, and the third stop reel. An image (for example, the letters "213") suggesting that it is the right reel 112 is displayed.

In the present embodiment, it is possible to determine whether the internal winning combination is the replay combination or the small combination 3a based on the lighting mode of the payout number display 127. However, for example, the stop operation of the correct answer of the small winning combination 3a may be set to three options as in the replay combination, and the small winning combination 3a may also be notified by using the display data 01 to 03. In this case, the internal winning combination cannot be determined only by the lighting mode. Further, the correct answer stop operation of the re-game combination may be set to 6 options as in the small combination 3a, and the re-game combination may also be notified using the display data 04 to 09. Even in this case, the internal winning combination cannot be determined only by the lighting mode.

In the present embodiment, the low navigation state is defined as the state in which the execution probability of the operation navigation is low, and the high navigation state is defined as the state in which the execution probability of the operation navigation is higher than that in the low navigation state. The state in which the operation navigation is not executed and the high navigation state may be set as the state in which the operation navigation is executed. The high navigation state is more advantageous for the player than the low navigation state because the stop operation according to the operation content of the operation navigation brings about a favorable result for the player. Here, the advantage is specifically the total number of game media paid out by the game console with respect to the total number of game media used by the player as the number of bets when playing the game for a predetermined period. It refers to the ratio, the so-called payout rate (ball payout rate).

<AT system state transition>
FIG. 43B is a diagram showing an effect state in each game state of the AT system. As shown in FIG. 43 (b), each game state of the AT system is further subdivided and managed, and this is called an effect state. Specifically, the low navigation state effect state is the normal state, and the high navigation state effect state is the normal state, the final notification state, the judge state, the pullback state, the BB state, the AT1 state, the AT2 state, and the LMT (limit) state. I have. As for the effect state of the high navigation state according to the modified example of the first embodiment, since the BB state is only added to the effect state described with reference to FIG. 6C, detailed description thereof will be omitted.

<Main control unit main processing>
Next, with reference to FIG. 46, the main control unit main processing executed by the CPU 304 of the main control unit 300 according to the modified example of the first embodiment will be described. Note that FIG. 46 is a flowchart showing the flow of the main control unit main process according to the modified example of the first embodiment, and is a diagram corresponding to the main control unit main process according to the first embodiment shown in FIG.

In the main control unit main process according to the modified example of the first embodiment, the effect state control process A in step S106 of the main control main process according to the first embodiment described with reference to FIG. 10, the effect process in step S107, and the effect process in step S107. The content of the effect state control process B in step S113 is changed.

<Production state control process A>
Next, the effect state control process A in step S121 of FIG. 46 will be described with reference to FIG. 47 (a). FIG. 47 (a) is a flowchart showing the flow of the effect state control process A according to the modified example of the first embodiment, and is a diagram corresponding to the effect state control process A according to the first embodiment shown in FIG. 15 (a). Is.

Since the effect state control process A according to the modified example of the first embodiment is the same process as the effect state control process A according to the first embodiment described with reference to FIG. 15 (a), the same reference numerals are given in the drawings. , The description is omitted.

<Common processing for each game>
Next, with reference to FIG. 47 (b), the common processing for each game in step S401 of FIG. 47 (a) will be described. FIG. 47 (b) is a flowchart showing the flow of each game common process according to the modified example of the first embodiment, and is a diagram corresponding to each game common process according to the first embodiment shown in FIG. 15 (b). ..

In the game common process according to the modified example of the first embodiment, the content of step S501 of the game common process according to the first embodiment described with reference to FIG. 15B is changed to the content of step S521. Specifically, in step S521, it is determined whether or not the condition for executing the high navigation state-related processing is satisfied. Here, the condition for executing the high navigation state-related processing is that the game state is either during the internal winning of the bonus or during the operation of the bonus with a setting difference. The condition is not limited to the operation of bonuses having different settings, and all bonuses may be in operation. As a result of the determination in step S521, if the condition for executing the high navigation state-related processing is satisfied, the process proceeds to step S502, and if not, the process proceeds to step S503.

<High navigation state processing A>
Next, the high navigation state process A in step S405 of FIG. 47 (a) will be described with reference to FIG. 48. FIG. 48 is a flowchart showing the flow of the high navigation state processing A according to the modified example of the first embodiment, and is a diagram corresponding to the high navigation state processing A according to the first embodiment shown in FIG.

In the high navigation state process A according to the modified example of the first embodiment, the processes of steps S821 and S822 are added to the high navigation state process A according to the first embodiment described with reference to FIG. Specifically, in step S821, it is determined whether or not the effect state is the BB state, and if applicable, the process proceeds to step S822, and if not, the process proceeds to step S804. In step S822, the BB state process A is executed. In this BB state processing A, processing related to the BB game and the like are performed.

<Processing for production>
Next, the effect processing of step S122 of FIG. 46 will be described with reference to FIG. 49. FIG. 49 is a flowchart showing the flow of the effect processing according to the modified example of the first embodiment.

In step S2101, it is determined whether or not the value of the high navigation state counter is equal to or less than the LMT transition value A (19 in this example), and if applicable, the process proceeds to step S2103, and if not applicable, the process proceeds to step S2103. The process proceeds to step S2102. In this example, since the LMT state is 20G, the LMT transition value A is set to 19 (= 20G-1G), but other values may be used.

In step S2102, it is determined whether or not the value of the difference number counter is equal to or less than the LMT transition value B (1840 in this example), and if applicable, the process proceeds to step S2103, and if not applicable, step S. Proceed to S2104. In this example, the high navigation state is terminated when the LMT state is 20G, the maximum payout number in the 3-card betting game is 11 (maximum increase is 8), and the difference exceeds 2000. Therefore, the LMT transition value B is set to 1840 (= 2000 sheets-8 sheets x 20G), but other values may be used.

In step S2103, freeze information is set, and in the next step S2104, the effect processing is terminated after executing other effect processes.

In the first embodiment, the freeze state is set when the effect state is the LMT state in the high navigation state common process A, but in the modified example of the first embodiment, the effect state is the LMT state. Regardless of whether or not, the freeze state is set when the conditions of step S2101 or step S2102 are satisfied.

<Production state control process B>
Next, the effect state control process B in step S123 of FIG. 46 will be described with reference to FIG. 50. FIG. 50 is a flowchart showing the flow of the effect state control process B according to the modified example of the first embodiment, and is a diagram corresponding to the effect state control process B according to the first embodiment shown in FIG. 26.

Since steps S1701 to S1704 of the effect state control process B according to the modified example of the first embodiment are the same processes as the effect state control process B according to the first embodiment described with reference to FIG. 26, the same reference numerals are given in the drawings. The description will be omitted. In step S1721, the effect state control process B is terminated after executing the other effect state control process B. In the other effect state control process B, for example, when the high navigation state end condition is satisfied in the BB state and the high navigation state is changed to the low navigation state, the effect state is changed from the BB state to the normal state. ..

<High navigation state processing B>
Next, the high navigation state process B in step S1705 of FIG. 50 will be described with reference to FIG. 51. FIG. 51 is a flowchart showing the flow of the high navigation state processing B according to the modified example of the first embodiment, and is a diagram corresponding to the high navigation state processing B according to the first embodiment shown in FIG. 27.

In the high navigation state processing B according to the modified example of the first embodiment, the processing of steps S1821 and S1822 is added to the high navigation state processing B according to the first embodiment described with reference to FIG. 27. Specifically, in step S1821, it is determined whether or not the effect state is the BB state, and if applicable, the process proceeds to step S1822, and if not, the process proceeds to step S1804. In step S1822, the BB state process B is executed. In this BB state processing B, after the end of the BB state, a process of returning the effect state to the state immediately before the BB state is performed.

<Specific examples of various effects, various displays, etc.>
Next, specific examples of various effects, various displays, and the like executed by the slot machine 100 according to the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 52 to 78. 52 to 78 are timing charts showing the flow of the effect, respectively, and show the effect mode of the effect to be executed in association with the timing chart.

Here, the item of "low / high navigation state" in each figure indicates the AT system gaming state (in this example, the high navigation state or the low navigation state), and the item of "directing state" in each figure is. , The effect state (in this example, the normal state, the final notification state, the judge state, the pullback state, the AT1 state, the AT2 state, or the LMT (limit) state) in each game state of the AT system is shown. In addition, the item of "high navigation state counter" in each figure shows the number of remaining games in the high navigation state, and the item of "effect state counter" in each figure shows the number of remaining games in each effect state. ing. In addition, the item "BET" in each figure indicates the number of bets (the number of BETs) of the game medium in each game.

<Specific example of counter update display>
First, a specific example of the update display of the counter will be described with reference to FIGS. 52 to 54. 52 to 54 are timing charts showing the flow of the effect, respectively, and show the effect mode of the effect to be executed in association with the timing chart.

<Specific example of counter update display / 3-card betting game only>
In FIG. 52, when the effect state shifts to the AT2 state → the judge state → the LMT state (limit state) in the high navigation state and then shifts to the normal state in the low navigation state, only a three-card betting game is performed. It is a figure which showed an example of the update display of the counter at the time.

The game R28 is a game in which the number of remaining games in the high navigation state is 28 and the number of remaining games in the AT2 state is 2, and a 3-card betting game is played. In this game R28, when a certain condition is satisfied (in this example, the pressing operation of the start lever 135 is accepted), the effect image display device 157 is used and the effect state is the AT2 state. , The AT2 effect corresponding to the AT2 state is executed, and the operation navigation suggesting the stop operation (in this example, "2-1-3" is displayed) is executed, and the number of remaining games in the AT2 state (effect state counter) is executed. Since the count value of (count value) is 2, the display including the image showing the number of games (count value of the effect state counter) (in this example, the display of the image including the characters “LAST 2G”) is executed. ..

The condition for starting the remaining number of games (count value of the effect state counter) in the AT2 state is not limited to the case where the pressing operation of the start lever 135 is accepted, and for example, until the third stop operation is accepted, " After executing the display of "LAST 3G" and accepting the third stop operation, the display of "LAST 2G" may be started. Further, the production mode of the AT2 effect is not particularly limited, and may be, for example, a series of effects executed over a plurality of games, or an effect completed in one game. Further, the display mode of the remaining number of games in the AT2 state (count value of the effect state counter) is not limited to this example, and for example, the number of remaining games in the AT2 state (count value of the effect state counter) is the number of icons and the like. May be indicated by.

The following game R27 is a game in which the number of remaining games in the high navigation state is 27 and the number of remaining games in the AT2 state is 1, and a three-card betting game is performed. In this game R27, while executing the AT2 effect and the operation navigation as in the game R28, a display including an image showing the number of remaining games (count value of the effect state counter) in the AT2 state (in this example, Displaying an image containing the characters "LAST 1G") is being executed.

The following game R26 is a game in which the number of remaining games in the high navigation state is 26 and the number of remaining games in the AT2 state is 0, and a three-card betting game is played. In this game R26, while executing the AT2 effect and the operation navigation in the same manner as in the games R28 to R27, a display including an image showing the number of remaining games (count value of the effect state counter) in the AT2 state (book). In the example, the display of an image including the characters "LAST 0G") is being executed.

Further, in this game R26, when a certain condition is satisfied (in this example, the third stop operation is accepted), the effect image display device 157 is used to be the final game in the AT2 state. , The display of the AT2 end effect screen corresponding to the end of the AT2 state is executed, and the result display 1 (for example, the display of the number of acquired game media) in the AT2 state is executed, while the remaining number of games in the AT2 state (for example). The display including the image showing the effect state counter count value) (in this example, the display of the image including the characters "LAST 0G") and the display of the operation navigation are deleted. The conditions for starting the AT2 end screen and the result display are not limited to the case where the third stop operation is accepted, and the effect mode of the AT2 end screen and the display contents of the result display are not particularly limited.

The following game R25 is a game in which the number of remaining games in the high navigation state is 25 and the number of remaining games in the judge state shifted from the AT2 state is 9, and a three-card betting game is performed. In this game R25, until a certain condition is satisfied (in this example, until the pressing operation of the start lever 135 is accepted (immediately after BET, etc.)), the effect image display device 157 is used to judge the effect state from the AT2 state. Since the transition to the state has started, the judge effect corresponding to the start of the judge state is started, and since the number of remaining games in the judge state (count value of the effect state counter) is 10, the number of games (effect state counter) is concerned. The display including the image showing the count value of) (in this example, the display of the image including the characters "LAST 10G") is being executed.

After that, when a certain condition is satisfied in this game R25 (in this example, the pressing operation of the start lever 135 is accepted), the effect image display device 157 is used and the effect state is the judge state. Therefore, since the judge effect corresponding to the judge state is executed and the number of remaining games in the judge state (count value of the effect state counter) is 9, an image showing the number of games (count value of the effect state counter). (In this example, the display of the image including the characters "LAST 9G") is being executed. Since the flow of production of games R24 to R20 is almost the same, the description thereof will be omitted.

The game R19 is a game in which the number of remaining games in the high navigation state is 19, and the number of remaining games in the LMT state shifted from the judge state is 19, and a three-card betting game is performed. In this game R19, when a certain condition is satisfied (in this example, the pressing operation of the start lever 135 is accepted), the effect state is changed from the judge state to the LMT state by using the effect image display device 157. Since the transition has occurred, the ED effect (ending effect) corresponding to the start of the LMT state is started, and the operation navigation (in this example, "2-1-3" is displayed) suggesting the stop operation is executed, and the LMT is executed. Since the total number of games in the state is 20 and the number of remaining games in the LMT state (count value of the effect state counter) is 20, the total number of games in the LMT state and the number of remaining games in the LMT state (effect state counter) The display including the image showing the count value of) (in this example, the display of the image including the characters "20/20 more") is executed. The fill in the operation navigation indicates that the stop operation has not yet been performed at the same timing.

After that, when a certain condition is satisfied in this game R19 (in this example, the third stop operation is accepted), the effect image display device 157 is used and the effect state is the LMT state. Since the ED effect (ending effect) corresponding to the LMT state is executed, the total number of games in the LMT state is 20, and the number of remaining games in the judge state (count value of the effect state counter) is 19, the LMT state. A display including an image showing the total number of games in the above and the number of remaining games in the LMT state (count value of the effect state counter) (in this example, the display of the image including the characters "19/20") is executed. There is. Since the flow of production of games R18 to R1 is almost the same, the description thereof will be omitted.

The game R0 is a game in which the number of remaining games in the high navigation state is 0 and the number of remaining games in the LMT state is 0, and a three-card betting game is played. In this game R0, when a certain condition is satisfied (in this example, the pressing operation of the start lever 135 is accepted), the effect image display device 157 is used and the effect state is the LMT state. , The ED effect (ending effect) corresponding to the LMT state is executed, and the total number of games in the LMT state is 20, and the number of remaining games in the judge state (count value of the effect state counter) is 0. A display including an image showing the total number of games in the state and the number of remaining games in the LMT state (count value of the effect state counter) (in this example, the display of the image including the characters "0/20") is executed. ing.

After that, when a certain condition is satisfied in this game R0 (in this example, the third stop operation is accepted), the effect image display device 157 is used to be the final game in the LMT state. While displaying the ED effect end screen corresponding to the end of the LMT state (end effect), the result display 2 in the LMT state (for example, displaying the number of acquired game media, the number of games in the AT2 state, etc.) is executed. Then, the display including the image showing the number of remaining games (count value of the effect state counter) in the LMT state (in this example, the display of the image including the characters "0/20") and the display of the operation navigation are deleted. ing. The conditions for starting the ED effect end screen and the result display are not limited to the case where the third stop operation is accepted, and the effect mode of the ED effect end screen and the display contents of the result display are not particularly limited.

<Specific example of counter update display / 3-card betting game and 2-card betting game>
FIG. 53 shows a 3-card betting game and a 2-card bet when the effect state shifts to the normal state of the low navigation state after shifting to the AT2 state → the judge state → the LMT state (limit state) in the high navigation state. It is a figure which showed an example of the update display of the counter when both games are played. It should be noted that the same effects and displays as those described in "Specific example of counter update display / 3-card betting game only" described with reference to FIG. 52 will be omitted as appropriate (the same applies to the following examples).

The game R28 is a game in which the number of remaining games in the high navigation state is 28 and the number of remaining games in the AT2 state is 2, and a 3-card betting game is played. In this game R28, when a certain condition is satisfied (in this example, the pressing operation of the start lever 135 is accepted), the effect image display device 157 is used and the effect state is the AT2 state. , The AT2 effect corresponding to the AT2 state is executed, and the operation navigation suggesting the stop operation (in this example, "2-1-3" is displayed) is executed, and the number of remaining games in the AT2 state (effect state counter) is executed. Since the count value of (count value) is 2, the display including the image showing the number of games (count value of the effect state counter) (in this example, the display of the image including the characters “LAST 2G”) is executed. ..

The following game R27 is a game in which the number of remaining games in the high navigation state is 27, and a two-card betting game is performed in the AT2 state. In this game R27, since the two-card betting game was performed in the AT2 state, the remaining number of games in the AT2 state (counter value of the effect state counter) is not updated and remains at 2.

Therefore, in the game R27, the effect state is the AT2 state by using the effect image display device 157 when a certain condition is satisfied (in this example, the pressing operation of the start lever 135 is accepted). Therefore, while executing the AT2 effect corresponding to the AT2 state, the display including the image showing the remaining number of games in the AT2 state (count value of the effect state counter) is not updated. Further, since the two-card betting game was played in the AT2 state, the operation navigation suggesting the stop operation is not executed even when the push order is internally won. In this example, an example is shown in which the AT2 effect is executed even when the two-card betting game is performed in the AT2 state, but a plurality of related AT2 effects are executed over a plurality of games. When the two-card betting game is played in the AT2 state, the scene of the AT2 effect may not be updated in the game.

The game R1 is a game in which the number of remaining games in the high navigation state is 1 and the number of remaining games in the LMT state shifted from the judge state is 2, and a two-card betting game is performed. In this game R1, since the two-card betting game was performed in the LMT state, the remaining number of games in the LMT state (counter value of the effect state counter) is not updated and remains at 2.

Therefore, in the game R1, the effect state is the LMT2 state by using the effect image display device 157 when a certain condition is satisfied (in this example, the pressing operation of the start lever 135 is accepted). Therefore, while the ED effect (ending effect) corresponding to the LMT state is executed, the display including the image showing the number of remaining games (count value of the effect state counter) in the LMT state is not executed. Further, since the two-card betting game was played in the LMT state, the operation navigation suggesting the stop operation is not executed even when the push order is internally won. In this example, an example in which the ED effect is executed even when the two-card betting game is performed in the LMT state is shown, but a plurality of related ED effects are executed over a plurality of games. When the two-card betting game is played in the LMT state, the scene of the ED effect may not be updated in the game.

In this example, after the first display (in this example, the display of the image including the characters "LAST 2G") is displayed in the advantageous state (AT2 state in this example), the first game (in this example). When the execution of the three-card betting game is started, the specific count value (in this example, the high navigation state counter) is updated to display the second display in the first game (three-card betting game). (In this example, the display of an image including the characters "LAST 1G") is configured to be displayable.

On the other hand, after the first display (display of the image including the characters "LAST 2G") is displayed in the advantageous state (AT2 state), the execution of the second game (in this example, the two-card betting game) starts. If so, the specific count value (high navigation state counter) is updated and the second display (display of the image including the characters "LAST 1G") is displayed in the second game (two-card betting game). It is configured not to be displayed.

Therefore, it is possible to notify the player that he / she has played a game that is disadvantageous to the player (second game) in a manner that is not embarrassing to the player. In addition, since the counter regarding the advantageous state is updated, it is possible to ensure the fairness between the player who is correctly playing in the first game and the player who is playing the second game.

<Specific example of counter update display / When no judge effect is performed>
FIG. 54A is a diagram showing an example of the update display of the counter when the judge effect is not performed by the two-card betting game.

The game R27 is a game in which the number of remaining games in the high navigation state is 27, and a two-card betting game is performed in the AT2 state. In this game R27, since the two-card betting game was performed in the AT2 state, the remaining number of games in the AT2 state (counter value of the effect state counter) is not updated and remains at 2.

Therefore, in the game R27, the effect state is the AT2 state by using the effect image display device 157 when a certain condition is satisfied (in this example, the pressing operation of the start lever 135 is accepted). Therefore, while executing the AT2 effect corresponding to the AT2 state, the display including the image showing the remaining number of games in the AT2 state (count value of the effect state counter) is not updated. Further, since the two-card betting game was played in the AT2 state, the operation navigation suggesting the stop operation is not executed even when the push order is internally won.

In this example, since the two-card betting game is performed during the period from the game R27 to the game R18, the remaining number of games in the AT2 state (counter value of the effect state counter) is not updated and remains at 2. However, since the three-card betting game was played in the subsequent game R17, the production state shifts to the LMT state without shifting from the AT2 state to the judge state. For this reason, the judge effect corresponding to the judge state is not executed. Further, in this example, since the AT2 state is changed to the LMT state, the AT2 end screen corresponding to the end of the AT2 state is not displayed.

The game R17 is a game in which the number of remaining games in the high navigation state is 17, and the number of remaining games in the LMT state shifted from the AT2 state is 19, and a three-card betting game is performed. In this game R17, when a certain condition is satisfied (in this example, the pressing operation of the start lever 135 is accepted), the effect state is changed from the AT2 state to the LMT state by using the effect image display device 157. Since the transition has occurred, the ED effect (ending effect) corresponding to the start of the LMT state is started, and the operation navigation (in this example, "2-1-3" is displayed) suggesting the stop operation is being executed. ..

On the other hand, the number of games in the high navigation state (count value of the high navigation state counter) is 17, but the total number of games in the LMT state is 20, and the number of remaining games in the LMT state (count value of the production state counter) is 20. Therefore, a display including an image showing the total number of games in the LMT state and the number of remaining games in the LMT state (count value of the effect state counter) (in this example, an image including the characters "20/20 more"). Display) is being executed.

The game R0 is a game in which the number of remaining games in the high navigation state is 0 and the number of remaining games in the LMT state is 2, and a 3-card betting game is played. In this game R0, when a certain condition is satisfied (in this example, the pressing operation of the start lever 135 is accepted), the effect image display device 157 is used and the effect state is the LMT state. , The ED effect (ending effect) corresponding to the LMT state is being executed.

On the other hand, the number of games in the high navigation state (count value of the high navigation state counter) is 0, but the total number of games in the LMT state is 20, and the number of remaining games in the judge state (count value of the production state counter) is 2. Therefore, a display including an image showing the total number of games in the LMT state and the number of remaining games in the LMT state (count value of the effect state counter) (in this example, an image including the characters "2/20 more"). Display) is being executed.

After that, when a certain condition is satisfied in this game R0 (in this example, the third stop operation is accepted), the remaining number of games in the LMT state (effect state) is used by using the effect image display device 157. Although the count value of the counter is 2, since it is the final game in the high navigation state, the display of the ED effect end screen corresponding to the end of the LMT state is executed, and the result display 2 in the LMT state (for example, the game medium) is executed. While displaying the number of acquired games, the number of games in the AT2 state, etc.), the display including an image showing the number of remaining games in the LMT state (count value of the production state counter) (in this example, "2/20 more" The display of the image including the characters "") and the display of the operation navigation are deleted.

In this example, the game after shifting to the LMT state is a 3-card bet game, but since the 2-card bet game is played in the AT2 state immediately before, the number of remaining games in the AT2 state (effect state counter). The number of games remaining in the high navigation state (count value of the high navigation state counter) is digested without being digested. As a result, the transition to the LMT state in the high navigation state is delayed, and the transition to the normal state in the low navigation state is performed without being able to digest some games in the LMT state.

<Specific example of counter update display / When judge effect and ED effect are not performed>
FIG. 54B is a diagram showing an example of the update display of the counter when the judge effect and the ED effect are not performed by the two-card betting game.

The game R27 is a game in which the number of remaining games in the high navigation state is 27, and a two-card betting game is performed in the AT2 state. In this game R27, since the two-card betting game was performed in the AT2 state, the remaining number of games in the AT2 state (counter value of the effect state counter) is not updated and remains at 2.

Therefore, in the game R27, the effect state is the AT2 state by using the effect image display device 157 when a certain condition is satisfied (in this example, the pressing operation of the start lever 135 is accepted). Therefore, while executing the AT2 effect corresponding to the AT2 state, the display including the image showing the remaining number of games in the AT2 state (count value of the effect state counter) is not updated. Further, since the two-card betting game was played in the AT2 state, the operation navigation suggesting the stop operation is not executed even when the push order is internally won.

In this example, since the two-card betting game is performed during the period from game R27 to game R0, the remaining number of games in the AT2 state (counter value of the production state counter) is not updated and remains at 2. , The effect state shifts from the high navigation state to the low navigation state without shifting from the AT2 state to the judge state or the LMT state. Therefore, the judge effect corresponding to the judge state and the ED effect corresponding to the LMT state are not executed. Further, in this example, since the AT2 state is shifted to the low navigation state, the display of the AT2 end screen corresponding to the end of the AT2 state and the display of the judge end screen corresponding to the end of the judge state are not executed.

The game R0 is a game in which the number of remaining games in the high navigation state is 0 and the number of remaining games in the AT2 state is 2, and a two-card betting game is performed. In this game R0, when a certain condition is satisfied (in this example, the third stop operation is accepted), the remaining number of games in the AT2 state (effect state counter) is used by using the effect image display device 157. The count value) is 2, but since it is the final game in the high navigation state, the ED effect end screen corresponding to the end of the LMT state is displayed and the high navigation state is displayed even though the game has not shifted to the LMT state. While the result display 2 (for example, the display of the number of acquired game media, the number of games in the AT2 state, etc.) is being executed, the AT2 effect is finished.

In this example, since the two-card betting game is performed during the period from game R27 to game R0, the remaining number of games in the AT2 state (count value of the production state counter) is not consumed, and the high navigation state is achieved. Only the remaining number of games in (count value of high navigation state counter) is consumed. As a result, the transition to the judge state or the LMT state in the high navigation state is not performed, and the transition to the normal state in the low navigation state is performed without being able to digest all the games in the LMT state (20 games in this example). There is.

<Specific examples of ED production, freeze production, and setting suggestion production>
Next, specific examples of the ED effect, the freeze effect, and the setting suggestion effect will be described with reference to FIGS. 55 to 58. FIGS. 55 to 58 are timing charts showing the flow of the effect, respectively, and show the effect mode of the effect to be executed in association with the timing chart.

<Specific examples of ED production, freeze production, and setting suggestion production / 3-card betting game only>
FIG. 55 shows the ED when only a three-card betting game is performed when the effect state shifts from the judge state to the LMT state (limit state) in the high navigation state and then shifts to the normal state in the low navigation state. It is a figure which showed an example of production and freeze production.

The game R19 is a game in which the number of remaining games in the high navigation state is 19, and the number of remaining games in the LMT state shifted from the judge state is 19, and a three-card betting game is performed. In this game R19, when a certain condition is satisfied (in this example, the pressing operation of the start lever 135 is accepted), the freeze effect is started, and at the same time, the effect image display device 157 is used to produce the effect state. Has transitioned from the judge state to the LMT state, so the ED effect (ending effect) corresponding to the start of the LMT state is started, and the operation navigation (in this example, "2-1-3") suggesting a stop operation. (Display) is executed, and since the total number of games in the LMT state is 20 and the number of remaining games in the LMT state (count value of the effect state counter) is 20, the total number of games in the LMT state and the remaining number in the LMT state. The display including the image showing the number of games (count value of the effect state counter) (in this example, the display of the image including the characters "20/20 more") is executed.

After that, when a certain condition is satisfied in this game R19 (in this example, the third stop operation is accepted), the effect image display device 157 is used and the effect state is the LMT state. Since the ED effect (ending effect) corresponding to the LMT state is executed, the total number of games in the LMT state is 20, and the number of remaining games in the judge state (count value of the effect state counter) is 19, the LMT state. A display including an image showing the total number of games in the above and the number of remaining games in the LMT state (count value of the effect state counter) (in this example, the display of the image including the characters "19/20") is executed. There is. Since the flow of the subsequent production of games R18 to R2 is almost the same, the description thereof will be omitted.

The game R1 is a game in which the number of remaining games in the high navigation state is 1 and the number of remaining games in the LMT state is 1, and a 3-card betting game is played. In this game R1, when a certain condition is satisfied (in this example, the pressing operation of the start lever 135 is accepted), the effect image display device 157 is used and the effect state is the LMT state. , The ED effect (ending effect) corresponding to the LMT state is executed, and the total number of games in the LMT state is 20, and the number of remaining games in the judge state (count value of the effect state counter) is 1. Execute a display including an image showing the total number of games in the state and the number of remaining games in the LMT state (count value of the effect state counter) (in this example, the display of the image including the characters "1/20"). ing. Further, in this game R1, the effect image display device 157 is used to suggest a setting suggestion effect (setting value can be inferred) indicating a set value (setting 1 to setting 6) indicated by reference numeral A or “suggestion A” in the figure. (Direction) is being executed. The production mode of the setting suggestion effect is not particularly limited, but in this example, the setting suggestion effect is executed so as to overlap a part of the ED effect.

The game R0 is a game in which the number of remaining games in the high navigation state is 0 and the number of remaining games in the LMT state is 0, and a three-card betting game is played. In this game R0, when a certain condition is satisfied (in this example, the pressing operation of the start lever 135 is accepted), the effect image display device 157 is used and the effect state is the LMT state. , The ED effect (ending effect) corresponding to the LMT state is executed, and the total number of games in the LMT state is 20, and the number of remaining games in the judge state (count value of the effect state counter) is 0. A display including an image showing the total number of games in the state and the number of remaining games in the LMT state (count value of the effect state counter) (in this example, the display of the image including the characters "0/20") is executed. ing.

After that, when a certain condition is satisfied in this game R0 (in this example, the third stop operation is accepted), the effect image display device 157 is used to be the final game in the LMT state. While displaying the ED effect end screen corresponding to the end of the LMT state and displaying the result in the LMT state 2 (for example, displaying the number of acquired game media and the number of games in the AT2 state), the LMT state The display including the image showing the remaining number of games (count value of the effect state counter) in (in this example, the display of the image including the characters "0/20") and the display of the operation navigation are deleted. Further, in this game R0, the effect image display device 157 is used to execute a setting suggestion effect (an effect in which the set value can be inferred) indicating a set value, which is indicated by reference numeral B or “suggestion B” in the figure. .. The production mode of the setting suggestion effect is not particularly limited, but in this example, the setting suggestion effect is executed in a part of the background display. Further, the execution timing of the setting suggestion effect is not particularly limited, and suggestion A and suggestion B may be performed at the same time in the final game in the LMT state.

<Specific examples of ED production, freeze production, and setting suggestion production / 3-card betting game and 2-card betting game>
FIG. 56A shows a three-card betting game and a two-card bet when the production state shifts from the judge state to the LMT state (limit state) in the high navigation state and then shifts to the normal state in the low navigation state. It is a figure which showed an example of the ED effect and the freeze effect at the time of performing a game.

The game R19 is a game in which the number of remaining games in the high navigation state is 19, and a two-card betting game is played in the judge state. In this game R19, since the two-card betting game was played in the judge state, the remaining number of games in the judge state (counter value of the effect state counter) is not updated and remains at 4.

Therefore, in the game R19, the effect state is the judge state by using the effect image display device 157 when a certain condition is satisfied (in this example, the pressing operation of the start lever 135 is accepted). Therefore, while executing the judge effect corresponding to the judge state, the display including the image showing the remaining number of games in the judge state (count value of the effect state counter) is not updated. Further, in the game R19, the number of remaining games in the high navigation state is 19, which satisfies the condition for transition from the judge state to the LMT state (the number of remaining games in the high navigation state is less than 20G), but is a two-card betting game. Therefore, the ED effect and the freeze effect are not executed.

In this example, an example is shown in which the judge effect is executed even when the two-card betting game is performed in the judge state, but there are a plurality of related cases in which the judge effect is executed over a plurality of games. When the two-card betting game is played in the judge state, the scene of the judge effect may not be updated in the game.

The following game R18 is a game in which the number of remaining games in the high navigation state is 18, and the number of remaining games in the LMT state shifted from the judge state is 19, and a three-card betting game is performed. In this game R18, when a certain condition is satisfied (in this example, the pressing operation of the start lever 135 is accepted), the freeze effect is started, and at the same time, the effect image display device 157 is used to produce the effect state. Has shifted from the judge state to the LMT state, so the ED effect (ending effect) corresponding to the start of the LMT state is started, and the operation navigation (in this example, "2-1-3") suggesting a stop operation. Show) is running.

On the other hand, the number of games in the high navigation state (count value of the high navigation state counter) is 18, but the total number of games in the LMT state is 20, and the number of remaining games in the LMT state (count value of the production state counter) is 20. Therefore, a display including an image showing the total number of games in the LMT state and the number of remaining games in the LMT state (count value of the effect state counter) (in this example, an image including the characters "20/20 more"). Display) is being executed.

After that, when a certain condition is satisfied in this game R18 (in this example, the third stop operation is accepted), the effect image display device 157 is used and the effect state is the LMT state. High navigation because the ED effect (ending effect) corresponding to the LMT state is executed, the total number of games in the LMT state is 20, and the number of remaining games in the judge state (count value of the effect state counter) is 19. The number of games in the state (count value of the high navigation state counter) is 18, but a display including an image showing the total number of games in the LMT state and the number of remaining games in the LMT state (count value of the effect state counter) (book). In the example, the display of the image including the characters "19/20 more") is executed. Since the flow of the subsequent production of games R17 to R1 is almost the same, the description thereof will be omitted.

The game R0 is a game in which the number of remaining games in the high navigation state is 0 and the number of remaining games in the LMT state is 1, and a 3-card betting game is played. In this game R0, when a certain condition is satisfied (in this example, the pressing operation of the start lever 135 is accepted), the effect image display device 157 is used and the effect state is the LMT state. , The ED effect (ending effect) corresponding to the LMT state is being executed.

On the other hand, the number of games in the high navigation state (count value of the high navigation state counter) is 0, but the total number of games in the LMT state is 20, and the number of remaining games in the judge state (count value of the production state counter) is 1. Therefore, a display including an image showing the total number of games in the LMT state and the number of remaining games in the LMT state (count value of the effect state counter) (in this example, an image including the characters "1/20 remaining"). Display) is being executed. Further, in this game R0, the effect image display device 157 is used to execute a setting suggestion effect (an effect in which the set value can be inferred) indicating a set value indicated by reference numeral A or “suggestion A” in the figure. .. The production mode of the setting suggestion effect is not particularly limited, but in this example, the setting suggestion effect is executed so as to overlap a part of the ED effect.

After that, when a certain condition is satisfied in this game R0 (in this example, the third stop operation is accepted), the effect image display device 157 is used to be the final game in the LMT state. While displaying the ED effect end screen corresponding to the end of the LMT state and displaying the result in the LMT state 2 (for example, displaying the number of acquired game media and the number of games in the AT2 state), the LMT state The display including the image showing the remaining number of games (count value of the effect state counter) in (in this example, the display of the image including the characters "1/20") and the display of the operation navigation are deleted. Further, in this game R0, the effect image display device 157 is used to execute a setting suggestion effect (an effect in which the set value can be inferred) indicating a set value, which is indicated by reference numeral B or “suggestion B” in the figure. .. The production mode of the setting suggestion effect is not particularly limited, but in this example, the setting suggestion effect is executed in a part of the background display. Further, the display timing of the ED effect end screen is not limited to this example, and the display may be started when other conditions such as acceptance of the pressing operation of the start lever 135 are satisfied.

In this example, it is configured so that the execution of a specific effect (ED effect in this example) can be started in an advantageous state (LMT state in this example), and a certain requirement is satisfied when the execution of the game is started. In the case (in this example, when the number of remaining games in the high navigation state is 20G), if the game is the first game (in this example, a 3-card betting game), a specific count value (book). In the example, the high navigation state counter) is updated so that the execution of a specific effect (ED effect) can be started in the first game (three-card betting game).

On the other hand, when a certain requirement is satisfied at the start of execution of the game (when the number of remaining games in the high navigation state reaches 20G), the game is the second game (in this example, a two-card betting game). In the case of, the specific count value (high navigation state counter) is updated so that the execution of the specific effect (ED effect) is not started in the second game (three-card betting game). Therefore, it is possible to notify the player that he / she has played a game that is disadvantageous to the player (second game) in a manner that is not embarrassing to the player. In addition, since the counter regarding the advantageous state is updated, it is possible to ensure the fairness between the player who is correctly playing in the first game and the player who is playing the second game.

In this example, it is configured so that the execution of a certain freeze effect can be started in an advantageous state (in this example, the LMT state), and a certain requirement is satisfied at the start of execution of the game (in this example, high). When the number of remaining games in the navigation state reaches 20G), if the game is the first game (in this example, a 3-card betting game), a specific count value (in this example, a high navigation state counter). ) Is updated so that the execution of a certain freeze effect can be started in the first game (three-card betting game).

On the other hand, when a certain requirement is satisfied at the start of execution of the game (when the number of remaining games in the high navigation state reaches 20G), the game is the second game (in this example, a two-card betting game). In the case of, the specific count value (high navigation state counter) is updated so that the execution of a certain freeze effect is not started in the second game (three-card betting game). Therefore, it is possible to notify the player that he / she has played a game that is disadvantageous to the player (second game) in a manner that is not embarrassing to the player. In addition, since the counter regarding the advantageous state is updated, it is possible to ensure the fairness between the player who is correctly playing in the first game and the player who is playing the second game.

Further, in this example, the game after shifting to the LMT state is a 3-card betting game, but since the 2-card betting game is performed in the immediately preceding judge state, the remaining number of games in the judge state (directing). The count value of the status counter) is not digested, and only the remaining number of games in the high navigation state (count value of the high navigation status counter) is digested. As a result, the transition to the LMT state in the high navigation state is delayed, and the transition to the normal state in the low navigation state is performed without being able to digest some games in the LMT state.

FIG. 56B is a diagram showing a modified example of the setting suggestion effect described with reference to FIG. 56A. In this example, in the game R19, the number of remaining games in the high navigation state is 19, and in the game R18, the number of remaining games in the high navigation state is 18, and the conditions for transition from the judge state to the LMT state, respectively. (The number of remaining games in the high navigation state is less than 20G), but since it is a two-card betting game, the ED effect and the freeze effect are not executed.

In addition, since the two games of game R19 and game R18 are betting games in the judge state, the remaining number of games in the judge state (count value of the production state counter) is not consumed, and the navigation is high. Only the remaining number of games in the state (count value of the high navigation state counter) is exhausted, and the number of games in the LMT state is 18. Therefore, the ED effect of the final game in the high navigation state (the LMT state when shifting to the LMT state) is not executed without executing the setting suggestion effect (suggestion A) that is executed when the 19th game in the LMT state is triggered. Only the setting suggestion effect (suggestion B), which is executed when the end screen is displayed, is executed.

<Specific examples of ED production, freeze production, and setting suggestion production / 2-card betting game only>
FIG. 57 is a diagram showing an example of a setting suggestion effect when the two-card betting game is continued in the judge state in the high navigation state.

The games R25 to R19 are games in which the number of remaining games in the high navigation state is 25 to 19, and the two-card betting game is performed in the judge state. In the period from the game R25 to the game R19, since the two-card betting game was performed in the judge state, the remaining number of games in the judge state (counter value of the effect state counter) is not updated and remains at 9.

Therefore, in the games R25 to R19, when a certain condition is satisfied (in this example, the pressing operation of the start lever 135 is accepted), the effect image display device 157 is used to judge the effect state. Since it is in the state, the judge effect corresponding to the judge state is executed, but the display including the image showing the remaining number of games in the judge state (count value of the effect state counter) is not updated. Further, in the game R19, the number of remaining games in the high navigation state is 19, which satisfies the condition for transition from the judge state to the LMT state (the number of remaining games in the high navigation state is less than 20G), but is a two-card betting game. Therefore, the ED effect and the freeze effect are not executed.

The game R0 is a game in which the number of remaining games in the high navigation state is 0 and the number of remaining games in the judge state is 9, and a two-card betting game is played. In this game R0, when a certain condition is satisfied (in this example, the pressing operation of the start lever 135 is accepted), the effect image display device 157 is used and the effect state is the judge state. , Performs a judge production corresponding to the judge state.

After that, when a certain condition is satisfied in this game R0 (in this example, the third stop operation is accepted), the effect image display device 157 is used to be the final game in the LMT state. While displaying the ED effect end screen corresponding to the end of the LMT state and displaying the result in the LMT state 2 (for example, displaying the number of acquired game media and the number of games in the AT2 state), the judge state The display including the image showing the remaining number of games (count value of the effect state counter) in (in this example, the display of the image including the characters "LAST 9G") and the display of the judge effect are deleted. Further, in this game R0, the effect image display device 157 is used to execute a setting suggestion effect (an effect in which the set value can be inferred) indicating a set value, which is indicated by reference numeral B or “suggestion B” in the figure. ..

In this example, since the two-card betting game is continued in the judge state, the remaining number of games in the judge state (count value of the production state counter) is not consumed from the remaining 9 games, and the remaining in the high navigation state. Only the number of games (count value of the high navigation status counter) has been consumed. As a result, the transition to the LMT state in the high navigation state is not performed, and the transition to the normal state in the low navigation state is performed without being able to digest all the games in the LMT state.

Further, since it has not shifted to the LMT state, the setting suggestion effect (suggestion A) that is executed at the 19th game of the LMT state is not executed, and the high navigation state (when shifting to the LMT state) Only the setting suggestion effect (suggestion B), which is executed when the display of the ED effect end screen of the final game in the LMT state) is displayed, is executed.

<Specific examples of ED effect, freeze effect, and setting suggestion effect / Modified example of freeze effect>
58 (a) and 58 (b) are views showing an example of a modification of the freeze effect. In this example, another freeze effect (hereinafter, may be referred to as “second freeze effect”) different from the freeze effect that is executed at the same time as the ED effect is configured to be executable.

FIG. 58A is a diagram showing an example of a second freeze effect when a three-card betting game is performed. The game R327 is a game in which the number of remaining games in the high navigation state is 327 and the number of remaining games in the AT2 state is 31, and a three-card betting game is played. In this game R327, when a certain condition is satisfied (in this example, the start condition of the interlocking effect is satisfied), the effect for managing the number of games up to the game in which the second freeze effect is started is performed. Start counting the start counter.

The game R325 is a game in which the number of remaining games in the high navigation state is 325 and the number of remaining games in the AT2 state is 229, and a three-card betting game is played. In this game R327, a certain condition is satisfied (in this example, the three-card betting game is started, and the effect start counter that started counting in the game R327 reaches a certain value). The interlocking effect executed from the game R327 to the game R326 is ended (or interrupted), and the second freeze effect is started without executing the ED effect.

In this example, since the AT of 200G was added in the game R325, an image including the number of additional games of AT was displayed after the end of the second freeze effect (in this example, "+ 200G !!" After executing (displaying an image containing the characters), when a certain condition is satisfied (in this example, the third stop operation is accepted), the effect state is changed by using the effect image display device 157. Since it is in the AT2 state, the AT2 effect corresponding to the AT2 state is executed, and since the number of remaining games in the AT2 state (count value of the effect state counter) is 229, the number of games (count of the effect state counter). The display including the image indicating the value) (in this example, the display of the image including the characters "LAST 229G") is being executed.

On the other hand, FIG. 58B is a diagram showing an example of a second freeze effect when a two-card betting game is performed in the middle of the AT2 state. The game R325 of this example is a game in which the number of remaining games in the high navigation state is 325 and a two-card betting game is performed. In this game R325, since the two-card betting game was performed in the AT2 state, the remaining number of games in the AT2 state (counter value of the effect state counter) is not updated and remains at 30.

Therefore, in the game R325, the effect state is the AT2 state by using the effect image display device 157 when a certain condition is satisfied (in this example, the pressing operation of the start lever 135 is accepted). Therefore, while executing the AT2 effect corresponding to the AT2 state, the display including the image showing the remaining number of games in the AT2 state (count value of the effect state counter) is not updated.

The following game R324 is a game in which the number of remaining games in the high navigation state is 324 and the number of remaining games in the AT2 state is 229, and a three-card betting game is performed. In this game R324, a certain condition is satisfied (in this example, the three-card betting game is started, and the effect start counter that started counting in the game R327 reaches a certain value). The interlocking effect executed from the game R327 to the game R325 is terminated (or interrupted), and the second freeze effect is started without executing the ED effect. The flow of the effect after the second freeze effect is the same as the flow of the effect of the game R325 in FIG. 58 (a).

<Specific example of ED production in non-AT state>
Next, a specific example of the ED effect in the non-AT state will be described with reference to FIGS. 59 to 60. 59 to 60 are timing charts showing the flow of the effect, respectively, and show the effect mode of the effect to be executed in association with the timing chart.

FIG. 59 is a diagram showing an example of an ED effect when a three-card betting game is performed. The game R550 is a game in which the number of remaining games in the high navigation state is 550 and the number of remaining games in the AT1 state shifted from the normal state is 19, and a three-card betting game is performed. In this game R550, when a certain condition is satisfied (in this example, the pressing operation of the start lever 135 is accepted), the effect image display device 157 is used and the effect state is the AT1 state. , The AT1 effect corresponding to the AT1 state is executed, and the operation navigation suggesting the stop operation (in this example, "2-1-3" is displayed) is executed, and the number of remaining games in the AT1 state (effect state counter) is executed. Since the count value of (count value) is 19, the display including the image showing the number of games (count value of the effect state counter) (in this example, the display of the image including the characters “LAST 19G”) is executed. ..

The game R50 is a game in which the number of remaining games in the high navigation state is 50 and the number of remaining games in the AT2 state shifted from the AT1 state is 24, and a three-card betting game is performed. In this game R50, when a certain condition is satisfied (in this example, the pressing operation of the start lever 135 is accepted), the effect image display device 157 is used and the effect state is the AT2 state. , The AT2 effect corresponding to the AT2 state is executed, and the operation navigation suggesting the stop operation (in this example, "2-1-3" is displayed) is executed, and the number of remaining games in the AT2 state (effect state counter) is executed. Since the count value of (count value) is 24, the display including the image showing the number of games (count value of the effect state counter) (in this example, the display of the image including the characters “LAST 24G”) is executed. ..

The game R19 is a game in which the number of remaining games in the high navigation state is 19, and the number of remaining games in the LMT state shifted from the AT2 state is 19, and a three-card betting game is performed. In this game R19, when a certain condition is satisfied (in this example, the pressing operation of the start lever 135 is accepted), the effect state is changed from the AT2 state to the LMT state by using the effect image display device 157. Since the transition has occurred, the ED effect (ending effect) corresponding to the start of the LMT state is started, and the operation navigation (in this example, "2-1-3" is displayed) suggesting the stop operation is executed, and the LMT is executed. Since the total number of games in the state is 20 and the number of remaining games in the LMT state (count value of the effect state counter) is 20, the total number of games in the LMT state and the number of remaining games in the LMT state (effect state counter) The display including the image showing the count value of) (in this example, the display of the image including the characters "20/20 more") is executed.

The game R1 is a game in which the number of remaining games in the high navigation state is 1 and the number of remaining games in the LMT state is 1, and a 3-card betting game is played. In this game R1, when a certain condition is satisfied (in this example, the pressing operation of the start lever 135 is accepted), the effect image display device 157 is used and the effect state is the LMT state. , The ED effect (ending effect) corresponding to the LMT state is executed, and the total number of games in the LMT state is 20, and the number of remaining games in the judge state (count value of the effect state counter) is 1. Execute a display including an image showing the total number of games in the state and the number of remaining games in the LMT state (count value of the effect state counter) (in this example, the display of the image including the characters "1/20"). ing. Further, in this game R1, the effect image display device 157 is used to execute a setting suggestion effect (an effect in which the set value can be inferred) indicating a set value indicated by reference numeral A or “suggestion A” in the figure. ..

The game R0 is a game in which the number of remaining games in the high navigation state is 0 and the number of remaining games in the LMT state is 0, and a three-card betting game is played. In this game R0, when a certain condition is satisfied (in this example, the pressing operation of the start lever 135 is accepted), the effect image display device 157 is used and the effect state is the LMT state. , The ED effect (ending effect) corresponding to the LMT state is executed, and the total number of games in the LMT state is 20, and the number of remaining games in the judge state (count value of the effect state counter) is 0. A display including an image showing the total number of games in the state and the number of remaining games in the LMT state (count value of the effect state counter) (in this example, the display of the image including the characters "0/20") is executed. ing.

After that, when a certain condition is satisfied in this game R0 (in this example, the third stop operation is accepted), the effect image display device 157 is used to be the final game in the LMT state. While displaying the ED effect end screen corresponding to the end of the LMT state and displaying the result in the LMT state 2 (for example, displaying the number of acquired game media and the number of games in the AT2 state), the LMT state The display including the image showing the remaining number of games (count value of the effect state counter) in (in this example, the display of the image including the characters "0/20") and the display of the operation navigation are deleted. Further, in this game R0, the effect image display device 157 is used to execute a setting suggestion effect (an effect in which the set value can be inferred) indicating a set value, which is indicated by reference numeral B or “suggestion B” in the figure. ..

FIG. 60A is a diagram showing an example of an ED effect when the game shifts to the LMT state after performing a two-card betting game in the normal state. The games R900 to R18 are games in a normal state in which the number of remaining games in the high navigation state is 900 to 18, and the two-card betting game is performed. In games R19 to R18, the number of remaining games in the high navigation state is 19 to 18, which satisfies the condition for transition from the judge state to the LMT state (the number of remaining games in the high navigation state is less than 20G), but bets two cards. Since it is a game, the ED effect and the freeze effect are not executed.

The following game R17 is a game in which the number of remaining games in the high navigation state is 17, and the number of remaining games in the LMT state shifted from the normal state is 19, and a three-card betting game is performed. In this game R17, when a certain condition is satisfied (in this example, the pressing operation of the start lever 135 is accepted), the ED effect is started, and at the same time, the effect image display device 157 is used to produce the effect state. Has shifted from the normal state to the LMT state, so the ED effect (ending effect) corresponding to the start of the LMT state is started, and the operation navigation (in this example, "2-1-3") suggesting a stop operation. Show) is running.

On the other hand, the number of games in the high navigation state (count value of the high navigation state counter) is 17, but the total number of games in the LMT state is 20, and the number of remaining games in the LMT state (count value of the production state counter) is 20. Therefore, a display including an image showing the total number of games in the LMT state and the number of remaining games in the LMT state (count value of the effect state counter) (in this example, an image including the characters "20/20 more"). Display) is being executed.

After that, when a certain condition is satisfied in this game R17 (in this example, the third stop operation is accepted), the effect image display device 157 is used and the effect state is the LMT state. Since the ED effect (ending effect) corresponding to the LMT state is executed, the total number of games in the LMT state is 20, and the number of remaining games in the judge state (count value of the effect state counter) is 19, high navigation. The number of games in the state (count value of the high navigation state counter) is 17, but a display including an image showing the total number of games in the LMT state and the number of remaining games in the LMT state (count value of the effect state counter) (book). In the example, the display of the image including the characters "19/20 more") is executed. Since the flow of production of the following games R16 to R1 is almost the same, the description thereof will be omitted.

The game R0 is a game in which the number of remaining games in the high navigation state is 0 and the number of remaining games in the LMT state is 2, and a 3-card betting game is played. In this game R0, when a certain condition is satisfied (in this example, the pressing operation of the start lever 135 is accepted), the effect image display device 157 is used and the effect state is the LMT state. , The ED effect (ending effect) corresponding to the LMT state is being executed.

On the other hand, the number of games in the high navigation state (count value of the high navigation state counter) is 0, but the total number of games in the LMT state is 20, and the number of remaining games in the judge state (count value of the production state counter) is 2. Therefore, a display including an image showing the total number of games in the LMT state and the number of remaining games in the LMT state (count value of the effect state counter) (in this example, an image including the characters "2/20 more"). Display) is being executed.

After that, when a certain condition is satisfied in this game R0 (in this example, the third stop operation is accepted), the effect image display device 157 is used to be the final game in the LMT state. The display of the ED effect end screen corresponding to the end of the LMT state (end effect related to the end of the AT2 state (= high navigation state)) is executed, and the result display 2 in the LMT state (for example, the display of the number of acquired game media) is displayed. While executing (the number of games in the AT2 state, etc.), a display including an image showing the number of remaining games in the LMT state (count value of the effect state counter) (in this example, an image including the characters "2/20 more"). Display) and the display of the operation navigation are deleted. Further, in this game R0, the effect image display device 157 is used to execute a setting suggestion effect (an effect in which the set value can be inferred) indicating a set value, which is indicated by reference numeral B or “suggestion B” in the figure. ..

In this example, it is configured to be able to shift to the first advantageous gaming state (AT2 state (= high navigation state) in this example) in the advantageous state (high navigation state in this example), and the first advantageous gaming state. It is configured to be able to execute the end effect (in this example, the display of the ED effect end screen) related to the end of the state (AT2 state (= high navigation state)), and the first game (high navigation state) in the advantageous state (high navigation state). In this example, when only a three-card betting game is performed, the game may shift to the first advantageous game state (AT2 state) and the end effect may be executed, which is an advantageous state. When only the second game (in this example, the two-card betting game) is played in the (high navigation state), the end effect is executed without shifting to the first advantageous game state (AT2 state). It is configured to.

Therefore, it is possible to notify the player that he / she has played a game that is disadvantageous to the player (second game) in a manner that is not embarrassing to the player. In addition, since the counter regarding the advantageous state is updated, it is possible to ensure the fairness between the player who is correctly playing in the first game and the player who is playing the second game. In addition, it is possible to ensure the fairness of the player by notifying that the advantageous state has ended for the game in which the second game is being performed. In addition, by giving the player the impression that the number of games has been lost in an advantageous game state, it is possible to carefully select the number of bets on the game medium in the subsequent games.

In this example, the state shifts to the LMT state without shifting from the normal state to a state other than the LMT state (AT1 state, AT2 state, etc.), but since the three-card betting game was performed, the ED effect and setting suggestion The production is being carried out.

FIG. 60B is a diagram showing an example of an ED effect when the two-card betting game is continued in the normal state.

The game R0 is a game in which the number of remaining games in the high navigation state is 0 and the number of remaining games in the normal state is 0, and a two-card betting game is played. In this game R0, when a certain condition is satisfied (in this example, the pressing operation of the start lever 135 is accepted), the effect image display device 157 is used and the effect state is the normal state. , The normal production corresponding to the normal state is executed.

After that, when a certain condition is satisfied in this game R0 (in this example, the third stop operation is accepted), the effect image display device 157 is used to be the final game in the high navigation state. , The display of the ED effect end screen corresponding to the end of the high navigation state is executed, and the result display 2 (for example, the display of the number of acquired game media) in the high navigation state is executed, while the display of the normal effect is displayed. It is erasing. Further, in this game R0, the effect image display device 157 is used to execute a setting suggestion effect (an effect in which the set value can be inferred) indicating a set value, which is indicated by reference numeral B or “suggestion B” in the figure. ..

In this example, in the high navigation state, the state shifts to the low navigation state without shifting to the state other than the normal state (AT1 state, AT2 state, etc.), but the ED effect and the setting suggestion effect are executed.

<Specific example of ED production during BB internal winning>
Next, a specific example of the ED effect during the BB internal winning will be described with reference to FIG. 61. FIG. 61 is a timing chart showing the flow of the effect, and shows the effect mode of the effect to be executed in association with the timing chart.

FIG. 61A is a diagram showing an example of an ED effect performed after the BB game. In order to avoid duplicate explanations, only an effect different from the effect described with reference to FIG. 59 will be described.

The game R580 is a game in which the number of remaining games in the high navigation state is 580, and the BB is internally elected in the normal state. In this game R580, when a certain condition is satisfied (in this example, the bet operation is accepted), the effect image display device 157 is used to change the effect state to the normal state. In addition to executing the corresponding normal effect, the BB confirmation effect (in this example, the display of the image including the characters "bonus confirmed!") That suggests the internal winning of the BB is executed.

After that, when a certain condition is satisfied in this game R580 (in this example, the pressing operation of the start lever 135 is accepted), the effect image display device 157 is used to suggest a stop operation related to the BB prize. The operation navigation (in this example, the navigation suggesting that the symbol combination "Seven 1-Seven 1-Seven 1" corresponding to the BB (bonus combination) is aimed at) is being executed.

The following game R579 is a game in which the number of remaining games in the high navigation state is 579 and the BB is won in the normal state. In this game R579, the production image is displayed when a certain condition is satisfied (in this example, the symbol combination "Seven 1-Seven 1-Seven 1" corresponding to BB is stopped and displayed on the winning line). The device 157 is used to start a BB effect that notifies the start of a BB game.

FIG. 61B is a diagram showing an example of an ED effect performed during the internal winning of the BB. In order to avoid duplicate explanations, only an effect different from the effect described with reference to FIG. 61B will be described.

The game R0 is a game in which the number of remaining games in the high navigation state is 0 and the BB is internally elected. In this game R0, when a certain condition is satisfied (in this example, the third stop operation is accepted), the effect image display device 157 is used to be the final game in the LMT state. The display of the ED effect end screen corresponding to the end of the state (the end effect related to the end of the AT2 state (= high navigation state)) is executed, and the result display 2 in the LMT state (for example, the display of the number of acquired game media). Is running.

Further, in this game R0, the effect image display device 157 is used to suggest an operation navigation related to a BB winning operation (in this example, a symbol combination “Seven 1-Seven 1-Seven 1” corresponding to a BB (bonus combination). While continuing to display the navigation) that suggests aiming at ..

In this example, it is configured to be able to shift to a certain advantageous gaming state (a certain gaming state) (in this example, the AT2 state) in an advantageous state (high navigation state in this example), and is configured to be in a certain gaming state. It is configured to be able to execute the effect related to the end (end effect) (in this example, the display of the ED effect end screen), and shifts to a certain game state (AT2 state) in the advantageous state (high navigation state) to end the effect. (Display of the ED effect end screen) can be started, and when the game is played in the advantageous state (high navigation state) and the special role is internally won, the advantageous state (high navigation state) It is configured so that the execution of the end effect (display of the ED effect end screen) can be started without shifting to a certain game state (AT2 state) in the high navigation state).

For this reason, even if the advantageous state ends without aligning the symbols related to the special role, the player's feelings of disappointment and impatience can be alleviated by making the player feel as if he / she has shifted to a certain advantageous gaming state. It becomes possible. In addition, since the counter regarding the advantageous state is updated, it is possible to ensure the fairness between the player who is correctly playing in the first game and the player who is playing the second game.

<Specific example of interlocking production>
Next, a specific example of the interlocking effect will be described with reference to FIGS. 62 to 64. 62 to 63 are timing charts showing the flow of the effect, respectively, and show the effect mode of the effect to be executed in association with the timing chart. Further, FIG. 64 is a diagram showing an example of the interlocking effect in chronological order.

<Specific example of interlocking production / When interlocking production proceeds normally>
FIG. 62A is a diagram showing the flow of the effect when the interlocking effect normally proceeds.
Here, the interlocking effect refers to an effect that is composed of a plurality of related scenes (story) and is executed over a plurality of games. The production mode of the interlocking effect is not particularly limited, but in the interlocking effect (normal pattern) of this example, as shown in FIG. 64 (A), the scene of "enemy selection" indicated by the symbol N and the "enemy determination" indicated by the symbol N + 1. , Confrontation "scene," enemy attack "scene indicated by code N + 2," ally attack "scene indicated by code N + 3," victory (or defeat) "scene indicated by code N + 4.

Returning to FIG. 62, the game R90 is a game in which the number of remaining games in the high navigation state is 90 and the number of remaining games in the judge state is 9, and a three-card betting game is played. In this game R90, a scene of "enemy selection" is executed as one scene of the interlocking effect. Although not shown, in the following period from the game R89 to the game R85, since the three-card betting game was performed, one scene of the interlocking effect is executed in each game, and the interlocking effect normally proceeds.

Subsequent games R86 to R83 are games in which the number of remaining games in the high navigation state is 86 to 83 and the number of remaining games in the judge state is 5 to 2, and the three-card betting game is performed. In the period from game R86 to game R83, as a continuation of the interlocking production, the scene of "enemy decision, confrontation" → "enemy attack" scene → "ally attack" scene → "victory" scene is executed in this order. And the interlocking production is executed until the last scene.

<Specific example of interlocking production / When interlocking production does not proceed normally>
FIG. 62B is a diagram showing a flow of the effect when the interlocking effect does not normally proceed.
The games R86 to R85 are games in which the number of remaining games in the high navigation state is 86 to 85 and the number of remaining games in the judge state is 5 to 4, and the three-card betting game is performed. In the period from the game R86 to the game R85, as the interlocking effect, the scene of "enemy determination, confrontation" → the scene of "enemy attack" is executed in this order, and the interlocking effect normally proceeds.

The following game R84 is a game in which the number of remaining games in the high navigation state is 84, and a two-card betting game is played in the judge state. In this game R84, since the two-card betting game was performed in the judge state, the remaining number of games in the judge state (counter value of the effect state counter) is not updated and remains at 4.

Therefore, in the game R84, the effect state is the judge state by using the effect image display device 157 when a certain condition is satisfied (in this example, the pressing operation of the start lever 135 is accepted). Therefore, while executing the judge effect corresponding to the judge state, the display including the image showing the remaining number of games in the judge state (count value of the effect state counter) (in this example, the character "LAST 4G" is included. Display) has not been updated. Further, since the two-card betting game was performed during the interlocking production in the judge state, the scene of the interlocking production is not advanced, and the scene of the "enemy attack" executed in the immediately preceding game R85 is executed again. Therefore, in this example, the same "enemy attack" scene is duplicated in both the game R85 and the game R84, and the interlocking effect does not normally proceed. However, in the subsequent games R83 to R82, a three-card betting game was performed, so during the period of this game R83 to game R82, as a continuation of the interlocking production, the scene of "ally attack" → the scene of "victory" However, they are executed in this order, and the interlocking effect is executed until the final scene.

In this example, a certain effect (first effect) (in this example, the judge effect) can be executed over a plurality of games, and the first effect (judgment effect) is the first scene. (In this example, the "enemy attack" scene) and the second scene (in this example, the "ally attack" scene) are included, and the first scene ("enemy attack" scene) is produced. If the execution of the first game (in this example, the three-card betting game) is started after the game in which the game is played, the second scene (“Friends”) in the first game (three-card betting game) It is configured so that the execution of the production of the "attack" scene) can be started, and after the game in which the production of the first scene (the scene of the "enemy attack") is performed, the second game (two in this example) When the execution of the betting game) is started, the execution of the production of the second scene (the scene of the "ally attack") is not started in the second game (two-card betting game). ..

Therefore, it is possible to notify the player that he / she has played a game that is disadvantageous to the player (second game) in a manner that is not embarrassing to the player.

FIG. 63A is a diagram showing the flow of the effect when the ED effect is started without the interlocking effect normally progressing.
The games R86 to R85 are games in which the number of remaining games in the high navigation state is 86 to 85 and the number of remaining games in the judge state is 5 to 4, and the three-card betting game is performed. In the period from the game R86 to the game R85, as the interlocking effect, the scene of "enemy determination, confrontation" → the scene of "enemy attack" is executed in this order, and the interlocking effect normally proceeds.

Subsequent games R84 to R18 are games in which the number of remaining games in the high navigation state is 84 to 18, and two betting games are played in the judge state. During the period from the game R84 to the game R18, since the two-card betting game was performed in the judge state, the remaining number of games in the judge state (counter value of the effect state counter) is not updated and remains at 4.

Therefore, in the games R84 to R18, when a certain condition is satisfied (in this example, the pressing operation of the start lever 135 is accepted), the effect image display device 157 is used to judge the effect state. Since it is in a state, while performing a judge effect corresponding to the judge state, a display including an image showing the number of remaining games in the judge state (count value of the effect state counter) (in this example, it is called "LAST 4G"). The display including characters) has not been updated. Furthermore, since the two-card betting game was performed during the interlocking production in the judge state, the scene of the interlocking production is not advanced, and the scene of the "enemy attack" executed in the immediately preceding game R85 is continuously executed. .. Therefore, in this example, the same "enemy attack" scene is executed in duplicate during the period of the game R85 to the game R18, and the interlocking effect does not normally proceed.

The following game R17 is a game in which the number of remaining games in the high navigation state is 17, and the number of remaining games in the LMT state shifted from the judge state is 19, and a three-card betting game is performed. In this game R17, when a certain condition is satisfied (in this example, the pressing operation of the start lever 135 is accepted), the ED effect is started, and at the same time, the effect image display device 157 is used to produce the effect state. Has shifted from the judge state to the LMT state, so the ED effect (ending effect) corresponding to the start of the LMT state is started, and the operation navigation (in this example, "2-1-3") suggesting a stop operation. Show) is running.

On the other hand, the number of games in the high navigation state (count value of the high navigation state counter) is 17, but the total number of games in the LMT state is 20, and the number of remaining games in the LMT state (count value of the production state counter) is 20. Therefore, a display including an image showing the total number of games in the LMT state and the number of remaining games in the LMT state (count value of the effect state counter) (in this example, an image including the characters "20/20 more"). Display) is being executed.

In this example, the same "enemy attack" scenes are duplicated during the period from game R85 to game R18, and the interlocking effect does not proceed normally. Therefore, in game R17, the ED effect shifts to the LMT state. It has been started, and the interlocking effect cannot be executed until the final scene (in this example, the "win" scene or the "defeat" scene of the interlocking effect that functions as a notice of the subsequent game).

FIG. 63 (b) is a diagram showing an example of an interlocking effect when the two-card betting game is continued in the judge state.

The games R86 to R85 are games in which the number of remaining games in the high navigation state is 86 to 85 and the number of remaining games in the judge state is 5 to 4, and the three-card betting game is performed. In the period from the game R86 to the game R85, as the interlocking effect, the scene of "enemy determination, confrontation" → the scene of "enemy attack" is executed in this order, and the interlocking effect normally proceeds.

Subsequent games R84 to R1 are games in which the number of remaining games in the high navigation state is 84 to 1, and two betting games are played in the judge state. During the period from game R84 to game R1, since the two-card betting game was performed in the judge state, the remaining number of games in the judge state (counter value of the effect state counter) is not updated and remains at 4.

Therefore, in the games R84 to R1, the effect state is judged by using the effect image display device 157 when a certain condition is satisfied (in this example, the pressing operation of the start lever 135 is accepted). Since it is in a state, while performing a judge effect corresponding to the judge state, a display including an image showing the number of remaining games in the judge state (count value of the effect state counter) (in this example, it is called "LAST 4G"). The display including characters) has not been updated.

Furthermore, since the two-card betting game was performed during the interlocking production in the judge state, the scene of the interlocking production is not advanced, and the scene of the "enemy attack" executed in the immediately preceding game R85 is continuously executed. .. Therefore, in this example, during the period of games R85 to game R1, as shown in FIG. 64 (B), the same "enemy attack" scenes are duplicated, and the interlocking effect does not normally proceed. Therefore, the player can easily notice that the two-card betting game has been performed by watching the progress of the interlocking effect.

The following game R0 is a game in which the number of remaining games in the high navigation state is 0 and the number of remaining games in the judge state is 4, and a two-card betting game is performed. In this game R0, when a certain condition is satisfied (in this example, the pressing operation of the start lever 135 is accepted), the final game in the high navigation state is performed by using the effect image display device 157. From, while executing the display of the ED effect end screen corresponding to the end of the high navigation state and the result display 2 (for example, the display of the number of acquired game media) in the high navigation state, the display of the judge effect. Is being erased. Further, in this game R0, the effect image display device 157 is used to execute a setting suggestion effect (an effect in which the set value can be inferred) indicating a set value, which is indicated by reference numeral B or “suggestion B” in the figure. ..

In this example, the same "enemy attack" scenes are duplicated during the period of games R85 to R1, and the interlocking effect does not proceed normally. Therefore, the high navigation state ends in game R0 and the ED effect is produced. Has been started, and the interlocking production has not been executed until the final scene (in this example, the "winning" scene or the "defeating" scene of the interlocking production that functions as a notice of the subsequent game). Therefore, the player can easily notice that the two-card betting game has been performed by watching the progress of the interlocking effect.

64 (B) to 64 (D) are views showing a modified example of the interlocking effect. The interlocking effect according to the present invention is not limited to the interlocking effect described with reference to FIG. 64 (A), and for example, as shown by reference numeral N in FIG. 64 (B), a scene of “enemy selection” and “enemy determination”. , Confrontation "scene may be composed of one scene.

Further, as shown in FIG. 64 (C), a new scene of "enemy attack and ally attack" is added, and as shown by the symbol N + 1 in the same figure (C), a scene of "enemy attack and ally attack" is added. And "enemy attack" scene is composed of one scene, or as shown by the code N + 2 in the figure (C), "enemy attack and ally attack" scene and "ally attack" scene are composed of one scene. You may.

Further, after executing the scene of "enemy attack and ally attack" composed of one scene as shown by the reference numeral N + 1 in FIG. 64 (D), one scene as shown by the reference numeral N + 2 in the same figure (D). You may execute multiple "enemy attack" scenes composed of.

Further, the content of the privilege given to the player may be changed or the degree of expectation may be different depending on the type of the interlocking effect shown in FIGS. 64 (A) to 64 (D). Further, even when a two-card betting game is performed, it may be configured so that all scenes are always executed in some aspect of the interlocking effect, and when a two-card betting game is performed, all (Or the last scene that suggests a judge result (eg, a "win" or "defeat" scene) may not be played.

<Specific example of specific display>
Next, a specific example of the specific display will be described with reference to FIGS. 65 to 67. FIGS. 65 to 66 are timing charts showing the flow of the effect, respectively, and show the effect mode of the effect to be executed in association with the timing chart. Further, FIG. 67 is a diagram showing an example of the specific display in chronological order.

<Specific example of specific display / Three-card betting game when transitioning to a judge>
FIG. 65A is a diagram showing an example of the flow of the effect when a three-card betting game is performed when the effect state shifts from the AT2 state to the judge state in the high navigation state.

The game R82 is a game in which the number of remaining games in the high navigation state is 82 and the number of remaining games in the AT2 state is 1, and a three-card betting game is played. In this game R82, when a certain condition is satisfied (in this example, the pressing operation of the start lever 135 is accepted), the effect image display device 157 is used and the effect state is the AT2 state. , The AT2 effect corresponding to the AT2 state (for example, the effect in which the character of the palace is running, which is indicated by the reference numeral d1 in FIG. 67 (A)) is executed, and the operation navigation suggesting the stop operation (in this example, "2". Since the number of games remaining in the AT2 state (count value of the effect state counter) is 1, the image showing the number of games (count value of the effect state counter) is included. Display (in this example, display of an image including the characters "LAST 1G") is being executed.

In this game R82, the number of game media acquired in the high navigation state is displayed by using the effect image display device 157 (in the example shown by the reference numeral d1 in FIG. 67 (A), the characters "GET 1320" are included. Display) and when a certain condition is satisfied (in this example, the third stop operation is accepted), it is suggested that the third stop operation is accepted by using the effect image display device 157. (For example, the effect of darkening the entire screen, which is indicated by the reference numeral d1'in FIG. 67 (A)) is executed.

The following game R81 is a game in which the number of remaining games in the high navigation state is 81 and the number of remaining games in the AT2 state is 0, and a three-card betting game is performed. In this game R81, while executing the AT2 effect and the operation navigation as in the game R82, a display including an image showing the number of remaining games (count value of the effect state counter) in the AT2 state (in this example, Displaying an image containing the characters "LAST 0G") is being executed.

Further, in this game R81, when a certain condition is satisfied (in this example, the third stop operation is accepted), the effect image display device 157 is used to be the final game in the AT2 state. , The AT2 end effect screen corresponding to the end of the AT2 state (for example, the background image including the character "end" indicated by the reference numeral d2 in FIG. 67 (A)) is displayed, and the result display 1 in the AT2 state (for example) For example, while executing the display of the number of game media acquired in the high navigation state indicated by the reference numeral d2 in FIG. 67 (A), an image showing the remaining number of games in the AT2 state (count value of the effect state counter) is displayed. The display including (in this example, the display of the image including the characters "LAST 0G") and the display of the operation navigation are deleted. In this example, the display of the AT2 end effect screen is executed in the final game in the AT2 state, but it may be executed at other timings (for example, after shifting to the judge state).

The following game R80 is a game in which the number of remaining games in the high navigation state is 80 and the number of remaining games in the judge state shifted from the AT2 state is 9, and a three-card betting game is performed. In this game R80, until a certain condition is satisfied (in this example, until the pressing operation of the start lever 135 is accepted (immediately after BET, etc.)), the effect image display device 157 is used to judge the effect state from the AT2 state. Since the state has been changed, the judge effect corresponding to the start of the judge state is started, and since the number of remaining games in the judge state (count value of the effect state counter) is 10, the number of games (effect state counter) is concerned. The display including the image showing the count value of) (in this example, the display of the image including the characters "defeat within 10G") is executed.

After that, when a certain condition is satisfied in this game R80 (in this example, the pressing operation of the start lever 135 is accepted), the effect image display device 157 is used and the effect state is the judge state. Therefore, since the judge effect corresponding to the judge state is executed and the number of remaining games in the judge state (count value of the effect state counter) is 9, an image showing the number of games (count value of the effect state counter). (In this example, the display of the image including the characters "LAST 9G") is being executed.

Here, an example of a judge effect executed in the game R80 will be described with reference to FIG. 67 (A). In this example, when the pressing operation of the start lever 135 is accepted, the judge effect start screen indicated by the reference numeral d3 is displayed, and when the first stop operation is accepted in the game, the judge effect indicated by the reference numeral d4 (interlocking effect) is displayed. (Enemy selection) scene, which is one scene, and the effect indicating that the enemy is not selected) is executed, and when the third stop operation is accepted in the game, the judge effect indicated by the symbol d4'is executed. When a certain amount of time has passed since the third stop operation was received in the game after executing (a scene of "enemy selection" which is one scene of the interlocking effect and indicating that the enemy was selected). In addition, a judge effect (an effect indicating that the enemy has been confirmed, which is a scene of "enemy selection" which is one scene of the interlocking effect) is executed.

<Specific example of specific display / Two-card betting game when transitioning to a judge>
FIG. 65B is a diagram showing an example of the flow of the effect when a two-card betting game is performed when the effect state shifts from the AT2 state to the judge state in the high navigation state. Since the flow of the production of the games R82 to R81 and the game R79 is almost the same as the production described with reference to FIG. 65A, the description thereof will be omitted.

The game R80 is a game in which the number of remaining games in the high navigation state is 80 and a two-card betting game is played. In this game R80, since the two-card betting game was performed in the judge state, a display including a judge effect corresponding to the judge state and an image showing the number of remaining games in the judge state (count value of the effect state counter) is displayed. When a certain condition is satisfied (in this example, the pressing operation of the start lever 135 is accepted) without performing the specific display (in this example, black painting is performed) using the effect image display device 157. Display that includes only the background image) is displayed.

Here, the "specific display (specific display)" means a display not related to the advantageous state, for example, a display displayed at the end of the first advantageous gaming state (for example, AT2 state) (for example, AT2 state). A display different from any of the AT2 end screen display) and a certain display (for example, judge effect) corresponding to the second advantageous gaming state (for example, the judge state) is applicable. The display mode of the specific display is not particularly limited, and is, for example, the display of an image including a certain character (in this example, the character "preparing for production") represented by the reference numeral d5 in FIG. 67 (B). It may be a display consisting of a certain pattern, a figure, or the like.

In this example, the three-card betting game is performed after the two-card betting game is performed in the judge state, but when the two-card betting game is continued, a certain condition is also satisfied in the two-card betting game. With the establishment (in this example, the pressing operation of the start lever 135 is accepted), the specific display is displayed by using the effect image display device 157. Further, in this case, the display of the AT2 end screen may be executed until a certain condition is satisfied (in this example, until the pressing operation of the start lever 135 is accepted). With such a configuration, the player can grasp the end of the AT2 state even when the specific display is displayed, and the convenience of the player can be enhanced.

<Specific example of specific display / Modified example of 3-card betting game at the time of judge transition>
FIG. 66A is a diagram showing a modified example of the flow of the effect when a three-card betting game is performed when the effect state shifts from the AT2 state to the judge state in the high navigation state.

The game R81 is a game in which the number of remaining games in the high navigation state is 81 and the number of remaining games in the AT2 state is 0, and a three-card betting game is played. In this game R81, as in the game R82, the AT2 effect (for example, the effect in which the character of the palace is running, which is indicated by the reference numeral d1 in FIG. 67 (A)) is executed and the operation navigation is executed, while in the AT2 state. A display including an image showing the number of remaining games (count value of the effect state counter) (in this example, an image including the characters "LAST 0G") is being executed.

Further, in this game R81, the number of game media acquired in the high navigation state is displayed by using the effect image display device 157 (in the example shown by the reference numeral d1 in FIG. 67 (A), the characters "GET 1320" are included. (Display) and when a certain condition is satisfied (in this example, the third stop operation is accepted), the effect image display device 157 is used to determine that the final game is in the AT2 state. While displaying the AT2 end effect screen corresponding to the end of the AT2 state (for example, the background image including the character "end" indicated by the reference numeral d2 in FIG. 67 (A)), the result display 1 in the AT2 state is displayed. Not running.

The following game R80 is a game in which the number of remaining games in the high navigation state is 80 and the number of remaining games in the judge state shifted from the AT2 state is 9, and a three-card betting game is performed. In this game R80, the result display 1 in the AT2 state (for example, the display of the number of game media acquired in the high navigation state, the display including the characters "GET 1328 sheets" shown by the reference numeral d2 in FIG. 67 (A)) is executed. doing.

<Specific example of specific display / Modified example of two-card betting game at the time of judge transition>
FIG. 66B is a diagram showing a modified example of the flow of the effect when a two-card betting game is performed when the effect state shifts from the AT2 state to the judge state in the high navigation state. Since the flow of the production of the game R81 is almost the same as the production described with reference to FIG. 66A, the description thereof will be omitted.

The game R80 is a game in which the number of remaining games in the high navigation state is 80 and a two-card betting game is played. In this game R80, since the two-card betting game was performed in the judge state, a display including a judge effect corresponding to the judge state and an image showing the number of remaining games in the judge state (count value of the effect state counter) is displayed. When a certain condition is satisfied (in this example, the pressing operation of the start lever 135 is accepted) without performing the specific display (in this example, black painting is performed) using the effect image display device 157. Display that includes only the background image) is displayed.

Further, in this game R81, when a certain condition is satisfied (in this example, the third stop operation is accepted), the result display 1 in the AT2 state (for example, in FIG. 67 (B), the reference numeral d2 is used). The number of game media acquired in the high navigation state is displayed, and the display including the characters "GET 1326 sheets (1328 sheets-2 sheets because the player won the loss by multiplying 2 sheets)" is being executed.

In this example, in the advantageous state (high navigation state in this example), it is possible to shift to the first advantageous gaming state (AT2 state in this example) and the second advantageous gaming state (judgment state in this example). It is configured, and the first advantageous gaming state (AT2 state) is more advantageous to the player than the second advantageous gaming state (judgment state), and the first advantageous gaming state (AT2 state) is After the end, it is configured to be able to shift to the second advantageous gaming state (judgment state), and the display means (in this example, the effect image display device 157) is the first display (in this example, the AT2 end screen). ), The second display (in this example, the judge effect), and the third display (in this example, the specific display (display including only the black-painted background image)), which is the first means. The display is a display displayed at the end of the first advantageous gaming state (AT2 state), and the second display is a display corresponding to the second advantageous gaming state (judgment state). The third display is a specific display not related to the advantageous state (high navigation state), and the execution of the first game (in this example, the three-card betting game) is started after the first display is displayed. In that case, a specific count value (in this example, the high navigation state counter) is updated so that the second display can be displayed in the first game, and the first display is displayed. Later, when the execution of the second game (two-card betting game in this example) is started, the specific count value (high navigation state counter in this example) is updated and the third display in the game is displayed. Is configured to be displayable.

Therefore, it is possible to notify the player that he / she has played a game that is disadvantageous to the player (second game) in a manner that is not embarrassing to the player. Since the counter regarding the advantageous state is updated, it is possible to ensure the fairness between the player who is correctly playing in the first game and the player who is playing the second game. In addition, it is possible to comfortably enjoy the game in the next game state while correctly performing the first game.

FIGS. 67 (A) to 67 (D) are views showing a specific example of the flow of the effect including the specific display. In the above embodiment, the effects of FIGS. (A) and (B) are mainly applied, but the interlocking effects according to the present invention are not limited to these effects, and for example, the effects of FIGS. As shown by reference numeral d6 in FIG. (D), the number of game media acquired in a certain effect state (AT2 state in this example) is displayed instead of the number of game media acquired in the high navigation state. May be good.

<Specific example of updating the ceiling counter and promotion counter>
Next, a specific example of updating the ceiling counter and the promotion counter will be described with reference to FIGS. 68 to 74. 68 to 74 are timing charts showing the flow of the effect, respectively, and show the effect mode of the effect to be executed in association with the timing chart.

Here, the item of "ceiling counter" in each figure indicates the number of games remaining until the ceiling is reached. Further, the "promotion counter", "AT1 type", "judgment mode", and "confirmation notification flag" in each figure indicate variables, flags, and the like (internal information of the slot machine) in the above-mentioned various flowcharts, respectively. In addition, the item of "conditional device" in each figure is the No. of the conditional device in FIG. (Number) is shown.

<Specific example of updating the ceiling counter and promotion counter / When reaching the ceiling in a 3-card betting game>
FIG. 68 is a diagram showing an example of the flow of the effect when the three-card game is performed in the high navigation state, the ceiling is reached, and the effect state shifts in the order of the normal state → the confirmed notification state → the AT1 state.

The game R300 is a game in which the number of remaining games in the high navigation state is 300 and the number of remaining games in the normal state is 4, and a 3-card betting game is played. In this game R300, since the ceiling counter after subtraction reaches a certain value (0 in this example), it is determined that the ceiling has been reached, and as a normal effect, a precursor effect suggesting that the AT1 state is entered. Has started. Further, in the normal state processing A described with reference to FIG. 19, since the ceiling counter after subtraction has reached a certain value (0 in this example), the AT1 type lottery is performed and the AT1 winning flag is turned on. We are preparing to set and shift the production state to the AT1 state. Although not shown, in the following period from game R299 to game R297, the precursory effect is continued as a normal effect.

The following game R296 is a game in which the number of remaining games in the high navigation state is 296 and the number of remaining games in the normal state is 0, and a three-card betting game is played. In this game R296, since the effect status counter has become 0 in the normal state (because the normal state has ended), preparations are being made to shift the effect state from the normal state to the finalized notification state, and as a normal effect. , Is performing a precursory effect that suggests a transition to the AT1 state.

The following game R295 is a game in which the number of remaining games in the high navigation state is 295 and the game is in the finalized notification state immediately after the transition from the normal state, and the three-card betting game is performed. In this game R295, as a normal effect, a bonus confirmation display (in this example, a display including the characters "bonus confirmed!") That notifies the transition to the AT1 state (pseudo-bonus in this example) is executed. Further, in this game R295, since the AT1 type is low in the final notification state processing A described with reference to FIG. 20, a promotion counter addition lottery is performed, and it is determined whether or not to promote the AT1 type. After that, in the final notification state process B described with reference to FIG. 29, a process of setting the final notification flag from off to on is performed.

The following game R294 is a second game in which the number of remaining games in the high navigation state is 294 and the final notification state is set, and a three-card betting game is played. In this game R294, the bonus confirmation display (in this example, the display including the characters "bonus confirmation!") Is continued as a normal effect. Further, in this game R294, in the final notification state processing A described with reference to FIG. 20, since the AT1 type is low, a promotion counter addition lottery is performed and whether or not to promote the AT1 type is determined. After that, the display related to the promotion lottery of AT1 type (promotion lottery display) is performed.

Further, in this game R294, since the final notification flag is turned on in the final notification state process B described with reference to FIG. 29, the condition device is the internal winning result related to the AT1 type (in this example, No. 3 or No. 3 or It is determined whether or not it is No. 4). In this example, the condition device is No. Since it was 5, the production state is maintained in the final notification state.

The following game R293 is a third game in which the number of remaining games in the high navigation state is 293 and the final notification state is set, and a three-card betting game is played. In this game R293, the bonus confirmation display (in this example, the display including the characters "bonus confirmed!") Is continued as a normal effect. Further, in this game R293, since the AT1 type is low in the final notification state processing A described with reference to FIG. 20, a promotion counter addition lottery is performed, and it is determined whether or not to promote the AT1 type. Is going.

Further, in this game R293, since the final notification flag is on in the final notification state process B described with reference to FIG. 29, the condition device is the internal winning result related to the AT1 type (No. 3 or No. 3 in this example). It is determined whether or not it is No. 4). In this example, the condition device is No. Since it was 3, the operation navigation (in this example, the navigation that prompts the reverse push operation aiming at the symbol of Seven 1 or Seven 2) is executed, and the preparation for shifting the production state from the finalized notification state to the AT1 state is prepared. Is going.

The following game R292 is a game in which the number of remaining games in the high navigation state is 292 and the number of remaining games in the AT1 state shifted from the finalized notification state is 20, and a three-card betting game is performed. In this game R292, when a certain condition is satisfied (in this example, the BET operation is performed), the effect image display device 157 is used and the effect state is the AT1 state. Therefore, the AT1 state. In addition to executing the AT1 effect corresponding to, the operation navigation suggesting the stop operation (in this example, "2-1-3" is displayed) is executed, and the number of remaining games in the AT1 state (effect state counter before subtraction) is executed. Since the count value of (count value) is 20, a display including an image showing the number of games (count value of the effect state counter) (in this example, a display of an image including the character “20G”) is executed.

<Specific example of updating the ceiling counter and promotion counter / When the ceiling is not reached in the 2-card betting game>
FIG. 69 is a diagram showing an example of the flow of the effect when the two-card betting game is performed in the high navigation state, the ceiling is not reached, and the effect state is maintained in the normal state.

In this example, the ceiling counter is not subtracted because the two-card betting game is continued in the game after the ceiling counter reaches 699. Therefore, in the normal state processing A described with reference to FIG. 19, it is not determined that the ceiling counter after subtraction has reached a certain value (0 in this example), and the effect state shifts to the AT1 state. There is no such thing. Further, since the effect state counter in the normal state is not updated in the two-card betting game, it is not determined that the effect state counter has become 0 in the normal state process B described with reference to FIG. 28. , The production state will not be the final notification state.

That is, in this example, there is a second counter (ceiling counter in this example) different from the first counter (high navigation state counter in this example) regarding the advantageous state (high navigation state in this example). It is configured so that a certain count value of the second counter (ceiling counter) can be updated every time the game is played in the advantageous state (high navigation state), and a certain count value is the second one. When the value (0 in this example) is reached, it is configured to shift to a specific advantageous state (AT1 state in this example) which is advantageous for the player, and is the first in the recorded advantageous state (high navigation state). When one game (in this example, a three-card betting game) is played, both a specific count value (value of the high navigation state counter) and a certain count value (value of the ceiling counter) are counted. The value is configured to be updatable, and when a second game (in this example, a two-card betting game) is played in an advantageous state (high navigation state), a specific count value (high navigation state counter) Only the specific count value (value of the high navigation state counter) out of the value) and a certain count value (value of the ceiling counter) is configured to be updatable.

Therefore, since the counter regarding the advantageous state is updated, it is possible to ensure the fairness between the player who is correctly playing in the first game and the player who is playing the second game. In addition, by giving preferential treatment to the player who correctly played the first game, it can be expected that the player who did not play the game correctly will be corrected.

<Specific example of updating the ceiling counter and promotion counter / When reaching the ceiling in a 3-card betting game and a 2-card betting game>
FIG. 70 shows an example of the flow of the production when the 3-card game and the 2-card betting game are performed in the high navigation state, the ceiling is reached, and the production state shifts in the order of the normal state → the confirmed notification state → the AT1 state. It is a figure.

In this example, since the two-card betting game is performed in a plurality of games after the ceiling counter reaches 699, the period of the two-card betting game (in this example, the game starts from the game following the game R999). The ceiling counter is not subtracted during the period of 100 games up to R899). Therefore, in the subsequent games R898 and later, a three-card betting game is performed and the ceiling counter is subtracted. However, the production example described with reference to FIG. 68 (the number of remaining games in the high navigation state is 300 and the ceiling is on the ceiling). The number of games to reach the ceiling is delayed by 100 games, and the number of remaining games in the high navigation state reaches the ceiling at 200. Since the flow of the effect in the transition from the normal state to the finalized notification state to the AT1 state is the same as in other embodiments, the description thereof will be omitted.

<Update of ceiling counter and promotion counter / When shifting to LMT state without reaching the ceiling>
FIG. 71 is a diagram showing an example of a flow of production when a three-card game and a two-card betting game are performed in a high navigation state and the game shifts to the LMT state without reaching the ceiling.

In this example, since the two-card betting game is performed in a plurality of games after the ceiling counter reaches 699, the period of the two-card betting game (in this example, the game starts from the game following the game R999). The ceiling counter is not subtracted in the period until the game before R20). For this reason, in the subsequent games after the game R19, a three-card betting game is performed, but compared to the production example described with reference to FIG. 68 (the number of remaining games in the high navigation state reaches the ceiling at 300). The number of games to reach the ceiling is delayed, and the game shifts to the LMT state without reaching the ceiling (the ceiling counter never reaches 0). Since the flow of the effect when shifting from the normal state to the LMT state is the same as that of the other embodiments, the description thereof will be omitted.

<Specific example of updating the ceiling counter and promotion counter / When shifting to the low navigation state without reaching the ceiling>
FIG. 72 is a diagram showing an example of a flow of production when a three-card game and a two-card betting game are performed in a high navigation state and the game shifts to a low navigation state without reaching the ceiling.

In this example, since the two-card betting game is performed in a plurality of games after the ceiling counter reaches 699, the period of the two-card betting game (in this example, the game starts from the game following the game R999). The ceiling counter is not subtracted in the period up to R0). For this reason, the number of games until reaching the ceiling is delayed as compared with the production example described with reference to FIG. 68 (the number of remaining games in the high navigation state reaches the ceiling at 300), and the number of games does not reach the ceiling. (The ceiling counter never becomes 0), the high navigation state ends in the normal state, and the state shifts to the low navigation state.

Since the flow of the effect when shifting from the normal state in the high navigation state to the normal state in the low navigation state is the same as in other embodiments, the description thereof will be omitted, but FIG. 60 (b) will be used. As explained, in this example, in the high navigation state, the state shifts to the low navigation state without shifting to the state other than the normal state (AT1 state, AT2 state, etc.), but the ED effect and the setting suggestion effect are executed. ing.

<Specific example of updating the ceiling counter and promotion counter / When the promotion counter is not updated>
FIG. 73 is a diagram showing an example of the flow of the production when the three-card game and the two-card betting game are performed in the final notification state in the high navigation state and the promotion counter is not updated.

In this example, since the two-card betting game is performed in a plurality of games in the finalized notification state in which the production state has changed from the normal state, the period of the two-card betting game (in this example, the next of the game R294). The promotion counter is not subtracted during the period from the game to the game R270). For this reason, the number of games from the final notification state to the AT1 state is delayed compared to the production example described with reference to FIG. 68 (the number of remaining games in the high navigation state reaches the ceiling at 300), and AT1 After displaying the type of promotion lottery (promotion lottery display) over a plurality of game periods (in this example, the period from game R294 to game R270), the state shifts to the AT1 state. Since the flow of the effect when shifting from the finalized notification state to the AT1 state is the same as in other embodiments, the description thereof will be omitted.

<Specific example of updating the ceiling counter and promotion counter / When operation navigation is not performed>
FIG. 74 is a diagram showing an example of the flow of the effect when the operation navigation is not performed in the final notification state of the high navigation state.

In this example, in contrast to the production example described with reference to FIG. 68 (the number of remaining games in the high navigation state reaches the ceiling at 300), the condition device is No. 1 in the first game in the final notification state. The only difference is that it is 3. In the final notification state process B described with reference to FIG. 29, when the final notification flag is on, the condition device is the internal winning result (No. 3 or No. 4 in this example) related to the AT1 type. Whether or not it is judged. However, in the game R295, since the final notification flag is off, the determination itself is not performed, so that the operation navigation performed when the conditional device is the internal winning result related to the AT1 type (in this example, Seven 1). Alternatively, the navigation that prompts the reverse push operation aiming at the symbol of Seven 2) is not executed, and the preparation for shifting the effect state from the finalized notification state to the AT1 state is not performed.

<Specific example of updating the ceiling counter and promotion counter / When the AT1 type is promoted>
FIG. 75 is a diagram showing an example of the flow of production when the AT1 type is promoted in the final notification state in the high navigation state.

The game R270 is a game in which the number of remaining games in the high navigation state is 270 and the promotion counter reaches a certain value (10 in this example) in the finalized notification state, and a three-card betting game is played. is there. In this game R270, since the promotion counter has reached a certain value (10 in this example), the AT1 type is changed from low to high (AT1 type is promoted), and the judge mode is changed from normal to high accuracy. doing.

Further, in this game R270, when a certain condition is satisfied (in this example, the pressing operation of the start lever 135 is accepted), the effect image display device 157 is used to display the AT1 type promotion lottery. After performing (promotion lottery display), when another certain condition is satisfied (in this example, the third stop operation is accepted), the promotion of AT1 type is promoted using the effect image display device 157. Is displayed (promotion display) to suggest that is confirmed.

Since the final notification flag is on in the game R270, if the condition device is an internal winning result related to the AT1 type, in addition to the promotion display, the operation navigation (in this example, Seven 1 or Seven 2). (Navigation that encourages the reverse push operation aiming at the symbol of) is executed, and preparations are made to shift the effect state from the finalized notification state to the AT1 state.

The game R268 is a game in which the number of remaining games in the high navigation state is 268 and a three-card betting game is played. In this game R268, the bonus confirmation display (in this example, the display including the characters "bonus confirmation!") Is continued as a normal effect. Further, in this game R268, since the final notification flag is on in the final notification state process B described with reference to FIG. 29, the condition device is the internal winning result related to the AT1 type (in this example, No. 3 or No. 3 or It is determined whether or not it is No. 4). In this example, the condition device is No. Since it was 4, the operation navigation (in this example, the navigation that encourages the reverse push operation aiming at the symbol of blue 7) is being executed.

<Specific examples of changes in rights due to reaching the ceiling>
Next, specific examples of changes in rights due to reaching the ceiling will be described with reference to FIGS. 76 to 77. 76 to 77 are timing charts showing the flow of the effect, respectively, and show the effect mode of the effect to be executed in association with the timing chart.

FIG. 76 is a diagram showing an example of the flow of the effect when the ceiling is not reached in the final notification state in the high navigation state.

The game R329 is a game in which the number of remaining games in the high navigation state is 329, and the game is in the final notification state immediately after the transition from the normal state, and the three-card betting game is performed. In this game R329, as a normal effect, a bonus confirmation display (in this example, a display including the characters "bonus confirmation!") Notifying the transition to the AT1 state is executed. Further, in this game R329, since the internal winning result was a loss, the production state is maintained in the final notification state.

The following game R328 is a second game in which the number of remaining games in the high navigation state is 328 and the final notification state is set, and a three-card betting game is played. In this game R328, the bonus confirmation display (in this example, the display including the characters "bonus confirmation!") Is continued as a normal effect. Further, in this game R328, the condition device is No. Since it was 3, the operation navigation (in this example, the navigation that prompts the reverse push operation aiming at the symbol of Seven 1 or Seven 2) is executed, and the preparation for shifting the production state from the finalized notification state to the AT1 state is prepared. Is going.

The following game R327 is a game in which the number of remaining games in the high navigation state is 327, the number of remaining games in the AT1 state shifted from the finalized notification state is 20, and a three-card betting game is performed. In this game R327, when a certain condition is satisfied (in this example, the BET operation is performed), the effect image display device 157 is used and the effect state is the AT1 state. Therefore, the AT1 state. In addition to executing the AT1 effect corresponding to, the operation navigation suggesting the stop operation (in this example, "2-1-3" is displayed) is executed, and the number of remaining games in the AT1 state (effect state counter before subtraction) is executed. Since the count value of (count value) is 20, a display including an image showing the number of games (count value of the effect state counter) (in this example, a display of an image including the character “20G”) is executed.

In this example, since the ceiling was not reached in the confirmed notification state in the high navigation state, the AT1 type was not changed from low to high (not promoted).

FIG. 77 is a diagram showing an example of the flow of the effect when the ceiling is reached in the final notification state in the high navigation state.

The game R300 is a game in a finalized notification state with 300 remaining games in the high navigation state. In this game R300, since the ceiling counter after subtraction has reached a certain value (0 in this example), it is determined that the ceiling has been reached, and the AT1 type is changed from low to high (promoted). There is). Further, in this game R300, as a normal effect, a bonus confirmation display (display including the characters "bonus confirmation!" In this example) for notifying the transition to the AT1 state is executed. Further, in this game R300, the condition device is No. Since it was 4, the operation navigation (in this example, the navigation that encourages the reverse push operation aiming at the symbol of Seven 1) is being executed.

In this example, when the ceiling is reached in the high navigation state, the first right (pseudo-bonus with low profit) is acquired and the second right (pseudo-bonus with high profit) is obtained. Since it is configured to be in the acquired state, even if the game from the determination of the bonus grant to the transition to a certain advantageous gaming state (for example, AT1 state) in the advantageous state becomes long. You can play the game with a sense of expectation.

<Other production examples>
Next, other production examples will be described with reference to FIG. 78. FIG. 78 is a diagram for explaining other production examples.

FIG. 78 (a) is a diagram showing an example of an ED effect when a three-card betting game is performed in the LMT state, and FIG. 78 (b) is a diagram showing a case where a two-card betting game is performed in the LMT state. It is a figure which showed an example of the ED production of.

According to the slot machine according to the modified example of the first embodiment, when the normal three-card betting game continues to be executed in the LMT state, as shown in FIG. 78 (a), the period of 20 games in the LMT state. During the middle, the ED effect is performed, and the end screen is executed in the final game. On the other hand, when the two-card betting game continues to be executed in the LMT state, the display of the end screen is continued as shown in FIG. 78 (b).

FIG. 78 (c) is a diagram showing a modified example of the specific display shown in FIG. 67 (D). In the effect example shown in FIG. 67 (D), the specific display is displayed using all the display areas of the effect image display device 157, but as shown in FIG. 78 (c), at least the first display area (this example). The first display area has a plurality of display areas including the upper half display area) and the second display area (in this example, the lower half display area), and the first display area switches the display in a certain period of time. It is a display area, and the second display area is a display area in which the display is not switched in the certain period, and the specific display may be displayed in the first display area. With such a configuration, a specific display can be displayed in the first display area, and a certain display can be continuously displayed in the second display area, so that the effect can be enhanced. There is.

As described above, the game counter (for example, the slot machine 100 shown in FIG. 1) according to the present invention (hereinafter, may be referred to as “the present invention 1-1”) is an operating means (for example, FIG. 1). Stop button 137 to 139) and transition to either a normal state (for example, the low navigation state shown in FIG. 6B) or an advantageous state (for example, the high navigation state shown in FIG. 6B). A game counter provided with a control means (for example, the main control unit 300 shown in FIG. 3) and a display means capable of displaying a plurality of types of displays (for example, the effect image display device 157 shown in FIG. 1). Stopping each reel of the operation information of the operation means (for example, the operation navigation using the payout number display 127 shown in FIGS. 8 and 45, the operation navigation using the effect image display device 157 shown in FIG. 52, etc.) It is configured to be able to notify the position and the stop order (information that can identify the stop order), and the advantageous state is a state that is more advantageous than the normal state with respect to the notification of the operation information, and a specific counter (for example, the advantageous state) regarding the advantageous state. , The high navigation state counter shown in FIGS. 18 and 52) is provided, and the count value of the specific counter can be updated every time a game is played in the advantageous state, and a certain end condition is satisfied. In the case of the above, the state is configured to shift from the advantageous state to the normal state, and the certain end condition is when the count value becomes a specific value (for example, 0) (for example, in the advantageous state). This is a condition that is satisfied when the number of games since the transition reaches the upper limit), and the first game (for example, a three-card betting game) in which the number of bets on the game medium is the first number, and the game medium A second game (for example, a two-card betting game) in which the number of bets is the second number is playable, and the second number is different from the first number. In the advantageous state, the first game is more advantageous to the player than the second game, and the display of one of the plurality of types of displays includes an image showing a certain value. It is a display (hereinafter, referred to as “first display”; for example, the first display d1 shown in FIG. 79), and the display of one of the plurality of types of displays is a value after updating the certain value. It is a display including the image to be represented (hereinafter, referred to as “second display”; for example, the numerical value 30 shown in FIG. 79), and after the first display is displayed in the advantageous state, the first game When the execution is started, the count value is updated so that the second display can be displayed in the first game. If the execution of the second game is started after the first display is displayed in the profit state, the count value is updated and the second display is not displayed in the second game. It is a game table characterized by being configured as follows. Note that FIG. 79 is a diagram showing an outline of the present invention 1-1.

According to the game console according to the invention 1-1 of the present application, it is possible to notify the player that he / she has played a game (second game) that is disadvantageous to the player in a manner that is not embarrassing to the player. In addition, since the counter regarding the advantageous state is updated, it is possible to ensure the fairness between the player who is correctly playing in the first game and the player who is playing the second game.

The game console according to the present invention 1-1 is not limited to the configuration of the slot machine according to the present embodiment. Therefore, for example, the advantageous game state is configured to be able to shift to the first advantageous game state (for example, the AT2 state shown in FIG. 6 or the like), and the first advantageous game state can notify the operation information. It is a certain gaming state, and the certain value is a value indicating a value regarding the number of games played (for example, the number of remaining games) in the first advantageous gaming state, and is one of the plurality of types of displays. Is a display including an image showing that the number of remaining games in the first advantageous game state is 0 (hereinafter, referred to as “third display”), and is the first display in the first advantageous game state. When the second game is played, the first advantageous game state may end without displaying the third display.

With such a configuration, when returning from the second game to the first game, it is notified in a manner that the player is not embarrassed that the game (second game) that is disadvantageous to the player has been performed. It becomes possible to do. In addition, since the first advantageous gaming state may end without displaying the third display, the player is given the impression that the number of games has been lost in the advantageous gaming state, and the third display is displayed. By being displayed suddenly, it becomes possible to carefully select the number of bets on the game medium in the subsequent games. In addition, it is possible to ensure the fairness between the player who is playing the first game correctly and the player who is playing the second game.

Further, one of the plurality of types of displays is a display including an image relating to an increase in the number of remaining games in the first advantageous gaming state (hereinafter, referred to as a "fourth display"). The fourth display includes a display including an image relating to an increase in the number of remaining games in the first advantageous game state (for example, a display including characters such as "+20" and the number of remaining games "LAST 5" to "LAST 25". The display to be changed), and when the first game is performed in the first advantageous gaming state, the fourth display may be displayed, and the first advantageous gaming state. When the second game is played, the fourth display may not be displayed.

With such a configuration, the fourth display may not be displayed when the second game is played in the first advantageous game state, so that the impression that the number of games is lost in the advantageous game state is lost. By giving to the player, it is possible to carefully select the number of bets on the game medium in the subsequent game. In addition, it is possible to ensure the fairness between the player who is playing the first game correctly and the player who is playing the second game.

Further, even when the first game is performed after the second game is performed in the first advantageous game state, the first display is not displayed and the first game is performed. The advantageous gaming state may end.

With such a configuration, the first advantageous gaming state may end without displaying the third display, thereby giving the player the impression that the number of games has been lost in the advantageous gaming state. Therefore, it is possible to carefully select the number of bets on the game medium in the subsequent games. In addition, it is possible to ensure the fairness between the player who is playing the first game correctly and the player who is playing the second game.

Further, the advantageous gaming state is configured to be able to shift to the second advantageous gaming state (for example, the LMT state shown in FIG. 6 or the like), and the second advantageous gaming state is different from the first advantageous gaming state. In another gaming state in which the operation information can be notified, when the first game is performed after the second game is performed in the first advantageous gaming state, the third game is performed. The first advantageous gaming state may end and the second advantageous gaming state may start without displaying the above.

With such a configuration, the first advantageous gaming state may end without displaying the third display, thereby giving the player the impression that the number of games has been lost in the advantageous gaming state. As a result, while the number of bets on the game medium in the subsequent games is carefully selected, the second advantageous game state may start when the second game is returned to the first game. , It becomes possible to give a privilege to the player who has returned to the first game, and the motivation to play can be maintained.

Further, a lottery means for determining the lottery result by performing a lottery process regarding the internal winning of the winning combination (for example, the winning combination internal lottery process (step S104) shown in FIG. 10) is provided, and the winning combination does not depend on the input of the game medium. In a certain control state, the probability of winning the re-game combination in the second game is higher than the probability of winning the re-game combination in the first game. The winning probability may be high.

With such a configuration, it is difficult for the player to return to the first game (for example, a three-card game) after playing the second game (for example, a two-card game). You may be able to play the game more carefully. In addition, even if the game from the decision of granting the privilege to the transition to a certain game state becomes long, the game can be played with a sense of expectation.

Further, the certain control state may be a state in which at least the count value can be updated and the winning probability of the replay combination is higher than the normal state.

Further, the above-mentioned "when the execution of the first game is started after the first display is displayed in the advantageous state" means "the first display in a certain state in the advantageous state". Is displayed, and then the execution of the first game is started. ”The above-mentioned“ execution of the second game is started after the first display is displayed in the advantageous state. ” "When the game is performed" may mean "when the execution of the second game is started after the first display is displayed in a certain state in the advantageous state". Further, when the execution of the first game is started after the first display is displayed in the above-mentioned advantageous state, the count value is updated and the first game is described. "The second display is configured to be displayable" means "when the execution of the first game is started after the first display is displayed in the advantageous state, the count value is described." Is updated so that the second display is displayed in the first game. "

Further, the game table according to this example (for example, the slot machine 100 shown in FIG. 1) has an operating means (for example, the stop buttons 137 to 139 shown in FIG. 1) and a normal state (for example, FIG. 6 (b)). A control means (for example, the main control unit 300 shown in FIG. 3) that shifts to one of a plurality of states including a low navigation state) and an advantageous state (for example, the high navigation state shown in FIG. 6B). A game counter provided with a display means capable of displaying a plurality of types of displays (for example, an effect image display device 157 shown in FIG. 1), and is configured to be capable of notifying operation information of the operation means. The advantageous state is the notification of the operation information (hereinafter, referred to as "operation navigation". For example, the operation navigation using the payout number display 127 shown in FIGS. 8 and 45, the effect image display device 157 shown in FIG. 52, etc. The operation navigation using the above is more advantageous than the normal state, and the operation navigation is a navigation about the push order combination, and the first counter (for example, FIG. 18 and FIG. 52, etc.) regarding the advantageous state, etc. The high navigation state counter shown in (1) is provided, and the count value of the first counter (hereinafter referred to as "first count value") can be updated every time one game is played in the advantageous state. It is configured to shift from the advantageous state to the normal state when one of a plurality of end conditions including the first end condition and the second end condition is satisfied. The first end condition is when the first count value becomes the first specific value (for example, 0) (for example, when the number of games after the transition to the advantageous state reaches the upper limit). It is a condition that can be established in the above, and in the advantageous state, it is configured to be able to shift to any one of a plurality of advantageous gaming states, and one of the plurality of advantageous gaming states is the first advantageous gaming state. (For example, AT2 shown in FIG. 53), the first advantageous gaming state is an advantageous gaming state in which the operation navigation can be executed, and a second counter relating to the first advantageous gaming state. (For example, the effect state counter shown in FIG. 53) is provided, and each time one game is played in the first advantageous gaming state, the count value of the second counter (hereinafter, referred to as "second count value"). ) Is updatable, and even if a game that has not won the push order combination is performed in the first advantageous game state, the second count value is updatable. The first game (for example, three bets) in which the number of bets on the game medium is the first number. It is configured to be able to execute a second game (for example, a two-card betting game) in which the number of bets on the game medium is a second number, and the second number is the first number. In the advantageous state, the first game is more advantageous to the player than the second game, and one of the plurality of types of displays is displayed. Display including an image showing the value (hereinafter referred to as "first display". For example, the first display d1) shown in FIG. 79, and the display of one of the plurality of types of displays includes a display showing an updated value of the certain value (hereinafter, “second display”. "Display". For example, the numerical value 30) shown in FIG. 79, the certain value is a value related to the second count value, and the first display is displayed in the first advantageous gaming state. After that, when the execution of the first game is started, the count values of both the first count value and the second count value are updated, and in the first game, the second count value is updated. The display is configured to be displayable, and when the execution of the second game is started after the first display is displayed in the first advantageous game state, the first count value is displayed. And, of the second count values, only the first count value is updated so that the second display is not displayed in the second game, and the use of the game medium in the advantageous state. A third counter for counting the total number of game media acquired by the player based on the number and the number of payouts of the game media is provided, and the count of the third counter is performed every time one game is played in the advantageous state. The value (hereinafter referred to as "third count value"; for example, the difference number counter shown in FIG. 18) is configured to be updatable, and the second end condition is such that the third count value is the second. It is a condition that can be satisfied when a specific value (for example, 1840) is reached, and even if any of the first game and the second game is executed in the advantageous state, the said game. The third count value is configured to be updatable based on the result of the game, includes a setting value setting means capable of setting any one of a plurality of types of setting values, and the plurality of types of displays. One of the displays is a certain display (hereinafter, referred to as “third display”; for example, suggestion A (setting suggestion effect) shown in FIG. 55) that suggests the set value that has been set. When the first game is played in the advantageous state, the third display may be displayed, and when the second game is played in the advantageous state, the third display may be displayed. Is a game counter characterized in that the third display is not displayed in some cases.

According to the game console according to this example, when the execution of the second game, which is more disadvantageous to the player than the first game, is started, the first count value and the second count value are said to be the same. Since only the first count value is updated and the second display (display including an image showing the updated value of the value related to the second count value) is not displayed in the second game, the second game is played. It is possible to notify what has been done in a manner that is not embarrassing for the player. In addition, since the first counter (counter related to the advantageous state) and the third counter (total number of game media acquired by the player) are updated in both the first game and the second game, the first counter is updated. It is possible to ensure the fairness between the player who is playing the game correctly and the player who is playing the second game.

Further, the gaming table (for example, the slot machine 100 shown in FIG. 1) according to the present invention (hereinafter, may be referred to as “the present invention 1-2”) has an operating means (for example, the stop button 137 to the stop button 137 to shown in FIG. 1). A control means (for example, a control means for shifting to one of a normal state (for example, a low navigation state shown in FIG. 6B) and an advantageous state (for example, a high navigation state shown in FIG. 6B). For example, an operation navigation system using the operation information of the operation means (for example, the payout number display 127 shown in FIGS. 8 and 45) of the game console provided with the main control unit 300 shown in FIG. Information that can identify the stop position and stop order of each reel of the operation navigation using the effect image display device 157 shown in 52 or the like) can be notified, and the advantageous state is the notification of the operation information. It is a state more advantageous than the normal state, and is provided with a specific counter (for example, a high navigation state counter shown in FIGS. 18 and 52) regarding the advantageous state, and each time a game is played in the advantageous state, the said The count value of a specific counter is configured to be updatable, and when a certain end condition is satisfied, the state is changed from the advantageous state to the normal state, and the certain end condition is the said. It is a condition that is satisfied when the count value becomes the first specific value (for example, 0) (for example, when the number of games after the transition to the advantageous state reaches the upper limit), and is a bet on the game medium. The first game in which the number is the first number (for example, a three-card betting game) and the second game in which the number of bets on the game medium is the second number (for example, a two-card betting game) can be executed. The second number is a number different from the first number, and in the advantageous state, the first game is more advantageous to the player than the second game. The game is configured so that the execution of a specific effect (for example, the ED effect ed1 shown in FIG. 80) can be started in the advantageous state, and a certain requirement is satisfied at the time of starting the execution of the game. In the case of the first game, the count value is updated so that the execution of the specific effect can be started in the first game, and the certain requirement at the time of starting the execution of the game. Is satisfied, and if the game is the second game, the count value is updated so that the execution of the specific effect is not started in the second game. It is a featured game table. Note that FIG. 80 is a diagram showing an outline of Invention 1-2 of the present application.

According to the game console according to the invention 1-2 of the present application, it is possible to notify the player that he / she is playing a game that is disadvantageous to the player (second game) in a manner that is not embarrassing to the player. In addition, since the counter regarding the advantageous state is updated, it is possible to ensure the fairness between the player who is correctly playing in the first game and the player who is playing the second game.

The game console according to Invention 1-2 is not limited to the configuration of the slot machine according to the present embodiment. Therefore, for example, when the certain requirement is satisfied, the game may be configured to shift to the second advantageous gaming state, and the execution of the specific effect can be started on condition of the shift.

Further, the certain requirement is that the first count value is a second specific value, and even if the first specific value and the second specific value are different values. Good.

With such a configuration, it is possible to notify the player that he / she has played a game that is disadvantageous to the player (second game) in a manner that is not embarrassing to the player.

Further, in the advantageous state, it is possible to shift to the second advantageous gaming state (for example, the LMT state shown in FIG. 6 or the like), and the second advantageous gaming state is such that the operation information can be notified. The second advantageous gaming state is a gaming state, and the second advantageous gaming state is a gaming state in which the number of games after shifting to the advantageous state reaches a certain number of times, and the second advantageous gaming state is said. It is a gaming state in which the player can stay until the end of the advantageous game state, and the specific effect may be an effect that can be performed in the second advantageous game state.

With such a configuration, by giving the player the impression that the number of games has been lost in an advantageous game state, it is possible to carefully select the number of bets on the game medium in the subsequent games. In addition, it is possible to ensure the fairness between the player who is playing the first game correctly and the player who is playing the second game.

Further, when the transition to the second advantageous gaming state is performed without the second advantageous gaming being performed after the transition to the advantageous state (hereinafter, referred to as "first case"), the second advantage The maximum number of times the first game is executed in the gaming state is the first number of times, and when the second advantageous game is performed after the transition to the advantageous state is performed and then the second advantageous gaming state is entered. (Hereinafter referred to as "the second case"), the maximum number of times the first game is executed in the second advantageous game state may be the second number of times, and the number of times is higher than the first number of times. The second number of times is smaller, and a display means capable of displaying a plurality of types of displays (for example, the effect image display device 157 shown in FIG. 1) is provided, and one of the plurality of types of displays is displayed. , The display corresponding to the first number of times (hereinafter, referred to as "first display"), and in the first case, the first display is displayed when shifting to the second advantageous gaming state. It is configured to be displayed, and in the second case, the first display may be displayed at the time of transition to the second advantageous gaming state.

With such a configuration, by giving the player the impression that the number of games has been lost in an advantageous game state, it is possible to carefully select the number of bets on the game medium in the subsequent games. In addition, it is possible to ensure the fairness between the player who is playing the first game correctly and the player who is playing the second game.

Further, the advantageous game state is configured to be able to shift to the first advantageous gaming state, and the first advantageous gaming state can notify the operation information different from the second advantageous gaming state. The display of one of the plurality of types of displays includes an image showing that the number of remaining games in the first advantageous game state is 0 (hereinafter, "second". "Display"), and when the second game is performed in the first advantageous gaming state, the first advantageous gaming state ends without displaying the second display. There may be.

Further, when the second game is performed in the advantageous state, the advantageous state may end without performing the specific effect.

With such a configuration, the advantageous state may end without performing a specific effect, and by giving the player the impression that the number of games has been lost in the advantageous game state, in the subsequent game. It is possible to carefully select the number of bets on the game medium. In addition, it is possible to ensure the fairness between the player who is playing the first game correctly and the player who is playing the second game.

In addition, the specific effect may be an effect in which information advantageous to the player may be notified.

With such a configuration, the advantageous state may end without being notified of information that is advantageous to the player, and by giving the player the impression that the number of games has been lost in the advantageous game state. It is possible to carefully select the number of bets on the game medium in the subsequent games. In addition, it is possible to ensure the fairness between the player who is playing the first game correctly and the player who is playing the second game.

Further, it is configured so that the execution of a certain freeze effect (for example, the freeze effect fz1 shown in FIG. 81) can be started in the advantageous state, and the specific effect is an effect related to the certain freeze effect. May be good.

Further, the display means (for example, the effect image display device 157 shown in FIG. 1) is provided, and the display means has a first display (for example, the first display d1 shown in FIG. 79) and a second display (for example, the display means). It is a means capable of displaying the first display d2) shown in FIG. 79, and the first display includes an image showing the number of remaining games in the advantageous state (for example, the numerical value 30 shown in FIG. 79). The second display is a display including an image showing a certain number of remaining games (for example, the numerical value 29 shown in FIG. 79), and the second display is performed after the second game is performed in the advantageous state. When the first game is played, the second display may be displayed without displaying the first display.

With such a configuration, when returning from the second game to the first game, it is notified in a manner that the player is not embarrassed that the game (second game) that is disadvantageous to the player has been performed. It becomes possible to do. In addition, since the first advantageous gaming state may end without displaying the third display, the player is given the impression that the number of games has been lost in the advantageous gaming state, and the third display is displayed. By being displayed suddenly, it becomes possible to carefully select the number of bets on the game medium in the subsequent games. In addition, it is possible to ensure the fairness between the player who is playing the first game correctly and the player who is playing the second game.

Further, a lottery means for determining the lottery result by performing a lottery process regarding the internal winning of the winning combination (for example, the winning combination internal lottery process (step S104) shown in FIG. 10) is provided, and the winning combination does not depend on the input of the game medium. In a certain control state, the probability of winning the re-game combination in the second game is higher than the probability of winning the re-game combination in the first game. The winning probability may be high.

With such a configuration, it is difficult for the player to return to the first game (for example, a three-card game) after playing the second game (for example, a two-card game). You may be able to play the game more carefully. In addition, even if the game from the decision of granting the privilege to the transition to a certain game state becomes long, the game can be played with a sense of expectation.

Further, the certain control state may be a state in which at least the count value can be updated and the winning probability of the replay combination is higher than the normal state.

Further, the gaming table (for example, the slot machine 100 shown in FIG. 1) according to the present invention (hereinafter, may be referred to as “the present invention 1-3”) has an operating means (for example, the stop button 137 to the stop button 137 to shown in FIG. 1). A control means (for example, a control means for shifting to one of a normal state (for example, a low navigation state shown in FIG. 6B) and an advantageous state (for example, a high navigation state shown in FIG. 6B). For example, an operation navigation system using the operation information of the operation means (for example, the payout number display 127 shown in FIGS. 8 and 45) of the game console provided with the main control unit 300 shown in FIG. Information that can identify the stop position and stop order of each reel of the operation navigation using the effect image display device 157 shown in 52 or the like) can be notified, and the advantageous state is the notification of the operation information. It is a state more advantageous than the normal state, and is provided with a specific counter (for example, a high navigation state counter shown in FIGS. 18 and 52) regarding the advantageous state, and each time a game is played in the advantageous state, the said The count value of a specific counter is configured to be updatable, and when a certain end condition is satisfied, the state is changed from the advantageous state to the normal state, and the certain end condition is the said. It is a condition that is satisfied when the count value becomes the first specific value (for example, 0) (for example, when the number of games after the transition to the advantageous state reaches the upper limit), and is a bet on the game medium. The first game in which the number is the first number (for example, a three-card betting game) and the second game in which the number of bets on the game medium is the second number (for example, a two-card betting game) can be executed. The second number is a number different from the first number, and in the advantageous state, the first game is more advantageous to the player than the second game. In the advantageous state, the execution of a certain freeze effect (for example, the freeze effect fz1 shown in FIG. 81) can be started, and when a certain requirement is satisfied at the time of starting the execution of the game, the said. When the game is the first game, the count value is updated so that the execution of the certain freeze effect can be started in the first game, and the execution of the certain freeze effect is started at the time of starting the execution of the game. When the requirement is satisfied, if the game is the second game, the count value is updated so that the execution of the certain freeze effect is not started in the second game. It is a game table characterized by this. Note that FIG. 81 is a diagram showing an outline of Invention 1-3 of the present application.

According to the game console according to the invention 1-3 of the present application, it is possible to notify the player that he / she is playing a game that is disadvantageous to the player (second game) in a manner that is not embarrassing to the player. In addition, since the counter regarding the advantageous state is updated, it is possible to ensure the fairness between the player who is correctly playing in the first game and the player who is playing the second game.

The game console according to the invention 1-3 of the present application is not limited to the configuration of the slot machine according to the present embodiment. Therefore, for example, when the certain requirement is satisfied, the game may be configured to shift to the second advantageous gaming state, and the execution of the specific effect can be started on condition of the shift.

Further, the certain requirement is that the first count value is a second specific value, and even if the first specific value and the second specific value are different values. Good.

With such a configuration, it is possible to notify the player that he / she has played a game that is disadvantageous to the player (second game) in a manner that is not embarrassing to the player.

Further, the advantageous state is configured to be able to shift to a certain advantageous gaming state (hereinafter, referred to as "second advantageous gaming state"; for example, the LMT state shown in FIG. 6 or the like), and the second advantageous gaming state is described. The state is a certain gaming state in which the operation information can be notified, and the second advantageous gaming state is a gaming state in which the number of games after shifting to the advantageous state reaches a certain number of times. The second advantageous gaming state is a gaming state in which the player can stay until the end of the advantageous gaming state, and the certain freeze effect is started to be executed in connection with the transition to the second advantageous gaming state. It may be a production.

With such a configuration, by giving the player the impression that the number of games has been lost in an advantageous game state, it is possible to carefully select the number of bets on the game medium in the subsequent games. In addition, it is possible to ensure the fairness between the player who is playing the first game correctly and the player who is playing the second game.

Further, when the transition to the second advantageous gaming state is performed without the second advantageous gaming being performed after the transition to the advantageous state (hereinafter, referred to as "first case"), the second advantage The maximum number of times the first game is executed in the gaming state is the first number of times, and when the second advantageous game is performed after the transition to the advantageous state is performed and then the second advantageous gaming state is entered. (Hereinafter referred to as "the second case"), the maximum number of times the first game is executed in the second advantageous game state may be the second number of times, and the number of times is higher than the first number of times. The second number of times is smaller, and a display means capable of displaying a plurality of types of displays (for example, the effect image display device 157 shown in FIG. 1) is provided, and one of the plurality of types of displays is displayed. , The display corresponding to the first number of times (hereinafter, referred to as "first display"), and in the first case, the first display is displayed when shifting to the second advantageous gaming state. It is configured to be displayed, and in the second case, the first display may be displayed at the time of transition to the second advantageous gaming state.

With such a configuration, by giving the player the impression that the number of games has been lost in an advantageous game state, it is possible to carefully select the number of bets on the game medium in the subsequent games. In addition, it is possible to ensure the fairness between the player who is playing the first game correctly and the player who is playing the second game.

Further, the advantageous game state is configured to be able to shift to the first advantageous gaming state, and the first advantageous gaming state can notify the operation information different from the second advantageous gaming state. The display of one of the plurality of types of displays includes an image showing that the number of remaining games in the first advantageous game state is 0 (hereinafter, "second". "Display"), and when the second game is performed in the first advantageous gaming state, the first advantageous gaming state ends without displaying the second display. There may be.

Further, when the second game is performed in the advantageous state, the advantageous state may end without performing the certain freeze effect.

With such a configuration, the advantageous state may end without a certain freeze effect, and by giving the player the impression that the number of games has been lost in the advantageous game state, the subsequent game It is possible to carefully select the number of bets on the game medium in. In addition, it is possible to ensure the fairness between the player who is playing the first game correctly and the player who is playing the second game.

Further, it is configured so that the execution of a specific effect (for example, the ED effect ed1 shown in FIG. 80) can be started in the advantageous state, and the certain freeze effect may be an effect related to the specific effect. Good.

In addition, the specific effect may be an effect in which information advantageous to the player may be notified.

With such a configuration, the advantageous state may end without being notified of information that is advantageous to the player, and by giving the player the impression that the number of games has been lost in the advantageous game state. It is possible to carefully select the number of bets on the game medium in the subsequent games. In addition, it is possible to ensure the fairness between the player who is playing the first game correctly and the player who is playing the second game.

Further, the display means (for example, the effect image display device 157 shown in FIG. 1) is provided, and the display means has a first display (for example, the first display d1 shown in FIG. 79) and a second display (for example, the display means). It is a means capable of displaying the first display d2) shown in FIG. 79, and the first display includes an image showing the number of remaining games in the advantageous state (for example, the numerical value 30 shown in FIG. 79). The second display is a display including an image showing a certain number of remaining games (for example, the numerical value 29 shown in FIG. 79), and the second display is performed after the second game is performed in the advantageous state. When the first game is played, the second display may be displayed without displaying the first display.

With such a configuration, when returning from the second game to the first game, it is notified in a manner that the player is not embarrassed that the game (second game) that is disadvantageous to the player has been performed. It becomes possible to do. In addition, since the first advantageous gaming state may end without displaying the third display, the player is given the impression that the number of games has been lost in the advantageous gaming state, and the third display is displayed. By being displayed suddenly, it becomes possible to carefully select the number of bets on the game medium in the subsequent games. In addition, it is possible to ensure the fairness between the player who is playing the first game correctly and the player who is playing the second game.

Further, a lottery means for determining the lottery result by performing a lottery process regarding the internal winning of the winning combination (for example, the winning combination internal lottery process (step S104) shown in FIG. 10) is provided, and the winning combination does not depend on the input of the game medium. In a certain control state, the probability of winning the re-game combination in the second game is higher than the probability of winning the re-game combination in the first game. The winning probability may be high.

With such a configuration, it is difficult for the player to return to the first game (for example, a three-card game) after playing the second game (for example, a two-card game). You may be able to play the game more carefully. In addition, even if the game from the decision of granting the privilege to the transition to a certain game state becomes long, the game can be played with a sense of expectation.

Further, the certain control state may be a state in which at least the count value can be updated and the winning probability of the replay combination is higher than the normal state.

Further, the gaming table (for example, the slot machine 100 shown in FIG. 1) according to the present invention (hereinafter, may be referred to as “the present invention 1-4”) has an operating means (for example, the stop button 137 to the stop button 137 to shown in FIG. 1). A control means (for example, a control means for shifting to one of a normal state (for example, a low navigation state shown in FIG. 6B) and an advantageous state (for example, a high navigation state shown in FIG. 6B). For example, an operation navigation system using the main control unit 300 shown in FIG. 3) and operation information of the operating means (for example, the payout number display 127 shown in FIGS. 8 and 45). Information that can identify the stop position and stop order of each reel of the operation navigation using the effect image display device 157 shown in 52 or the like) can be notified, and the advantageous state is the notification of the operation information. It is a state more advantageous than the normal state, and is provided with a specific counter (for example, a high navigation state counter shown in FIGS. 18 and 52) related to the advantageous state, and each time a game is played in the advantageous state, the said The count value of a specific counter is configured to be updatable, and when a certain end condition is satisfied, the state is changed from the advantageous state to the normal state, and the certain end condition is the said. This is a condition that is satisfied when the count value reaches a specific value (for example, 0) (for example, when the number of games played after shifting to the advantageous state reaches the upper limit), and the number of bets on the game medium is the first. It is configured to be able to execute a first game (for example, a three-card betting game) which is one number and a second game (for example, a two-card betting game) where the number of bets on the game medium is the second number. The second number is different from the first number, and in the advantageous state, the first game is more advantageous to the player than the second game. In the advantageous state, it is configured to be able to shift to the first advantageous gaming state (for example, the AT2 state shown in FIG. 6 and the like), and a certain effect regarding the end of the first advantageous gaming state (for example, shown in FIG. 82). The end effect fn1) is configured to be executable, and when only the first game is performed in the advantageous state, the process shifts to the first advantageous game state and the certain effect is executed. It is configured so that when only the second game is played in the advantageous state, the certain effect is executed without shifting to the first advantageous game state. It is a game table characterized by being configured. Note that FIG. 82 is a diagram showing an outline of Inventions 1-4 of the present application.

According to the game console according to the invention 1-4 of the present application, it is possible to notify the player that he / she is playing a game that is disadvantageous to the player (second game) in a manner that is not embarrassing to the player. In addition, since the counter regarding the advantageous state is updated, it is possible to ensure the fairness between the player who is correctly playing in the first game and the player who is playing the second game. In addition, it is possible to ensure the fairness of the player by notifying that the advantageous state has ended for the game in which the second game is being performed. In addition, by giving the player the impression that the number of games has been lost in an advantageous game state, it is possible to carefully select the number of bets on the game medium in the subsequent games.

The game console according to the invention 1-4 of the present application is not limited to the configuration of the slot machine according to the present embodiment. Therefore, for example, a display means (for example, the effect image display device 157 shown in FIG. 1) is provided, and the display means determines the difference number of sheets, which is the difference between the game medium introduced by the player and the game medium acquired by the player. It is a means capable of displaying the difference number display to be shown, and when the difference number is less than 0, the difference number display is configured to display 0, and in the advantageous state, the first The expected value of the difference number is less than 0 when only the second game is played, and the certain one is executed when only the second game is played in the advantageous state. Even if it is an effect, it may be configured so that the difference number display is displayed.

With such a configuration, it is possible to ensure the fairness of the player who is correctly playing in the first game and the player who is playing the second game. In addition, by giving the player the impression that the number of games has been lost in an advantageous game state, it is possible to carefully select the number of bets on the game medium in the subsequent games.

Further, even when the first game is performed after the second game is performed in the advantageous state, the certain effect is executed without shifting to the first advantageous game state. May be the case.

With such a configuration, a certain effect may be executed without shifting to the first advantageous gaming state, thereby giving the player the impression that the number of games has been lost in the advantageous gaming state. , It becomes possible to carefully select the number of bets on the game medium in the subsequent games. In addition, it is possible to ensure the fairness between the player who is playing the first game correctly and the player who is playing the second game.

Further, in the advantageous state, it is possible to shift to the second advantageous gaming state (for example, the LMT state shown in FIG. 6 or the like), and the second advantageous gaming state is different from the first advantageous gaming state. In another advantageous gaming state, when the first game is performed after the second game is performed in the advantageous state, the first advantageous gaming state is not performed without shifting to the first advantageous gaming state. It may be configured so that the certain effect may be executed by shifting to the second advantageous gaming state.

With such a configuration, the number of games is lost in the advantageous gaming state because the ending effect may be executed by shifting to the second advantageous gaming state without shifting to the first advantageous gaming state. By giving the player an impression, the number of bets on the game medium in the subsequent games is carefully selected, while the second advantageous game state is obtained when the second game is returned to the first game. By starting the game, it is possible to give a privilege to the player who has returned to the first game, and the motivation for the game can be maintained.

Further, the above-mentioned "certain effect regarding the end of the first advantageous gaming state" may mean "a certain effect regarding the end of the advantageous state".

Further, a lottery means for determining the lottery result by performing a lottery process regarding the internal winning of the winning combination (for example, the winning combination internal lottery process (step S104) shown in FIG. 10) is provided, and the winning combination does not depend on the input of the game medium. In a certain control state, the probability of winning the re-game combination in the second game is higher than the probability of winning the re-game combination in the first game. The winning probability may be high.

With such a configuration, it is difficult for the player to return to the first game (for example, a three-card game) after playing the second game (for example, a two-card game). You may be able to play the game more carefully. In addition, even if the game from the decision of granting the privilege to the transition to a certain game state becomes long, the game can be played with a sense of expectation.

Further, the certain control state may be a state in which at least the count value can be updated and the winning probability of the replay combination is higher than the normal state.

Further, the game counter (for example, the slot machine 100 shown in FIG. 1) according to the present invention (hereinafter, may be referred to as “the present invention 1-5”) has an operating means (for example, the stop button 137 to the stop button 137 to shown in FIG. 1). 139) and the control means (for example, a control means for shifting to either a normal state (for example, the low navigation state shown in FIG. 6B) or an advantageous state (for example, the high navigation state shown in FIG. 6B). For example, the main control unit 300 shown in FIG. 3) and a lottery means for determining the lottery result by performing a lottery process relating to the internal winning of the winning combination (for example, the winning combination internal lottery process (step S104) shown in FIG. 10) are provided. In the game table, the operation information of the operation means (for example, the operation navigation using the payout number display 127 shown in FIGS. 8 and 45, the operation navigation using the effect image display device 157 shown in FIG. 52 and the like, etc. , Information that can identify the stop position and stop order of each reel), and the advantageous state is a state that is more advantageous than the normal state with respect to the notification of the operation information, and the advantageous state. A specific counter (for example, a high navigation state counter shown in FIGS. 18 and 52) is provided, and the count value of the specific counter can be updated every time a game is played in the advantageous state. It is configured to shift from the advantageous state to the normal state when a certain end condition is satisfied, and the certain end condition is when the count value becomes a specific value (for example, 0). It is a condition that is satisfied (for example, when the number of games after the transition to the advantageous state reaches the upper limit), and the winning combination is a special game (for example, FIG. 6A and FIG. 43 (for example). The special gaming state shown in a) is included, and the advantageous game state can be shifted to a certain advantageous gaming state (for example, the AT2 state shown in FIG. 6 or the like) in the advantageous state. It is configured to be able to execute a certain effect related to the end of the gaming state (for example, the end effect fn1 shown in FIG. 83), and the execution of the end effect can be started by shifting to the certain advantageous game state in the advantageous state. When a game is played in the advantageous state in which the special combination is internally won, the effect of the certain effect is achieved without shifting to the certain advantageous game state in the advantageous state. It is a game table characterized in that it is configured so that execution can be started. Note that FIG. 83 is a diagram showing an outline of Invention 1-5 of the present application.

According to the game table according to the invention 1-5 of the present application, even if the advantageous state ends without aligning the symbols related to the special role, the player feels as if he / she has shifted to a certain advantageous game state. It is possible to reduce feelings of disappointment and impatience. In addition, since the counter regarding the advantageous state is updated, it is possible to ensure the fairness between the player who is correctly playing in the first game and the player who is playing the second game.

The game console according to the present invention 1-5 is not limited to the configuration of the slot machine according to the present embodiment. Therefore, for example, a display means (for example, the effect image display device 157 shown in FIG. 1) is provided, and the display means determines the difference number of sheets, which is the difference between the game medium introduced by the player and the game medium acquired by the player. It is a means capable of displaying the difference number display to be shown, and when the difference number is less than 0, the difference number display is configured to display 0, and in the advantageous state, the above-mentioned or Even in the certain effect that is executed without shifting to the advantageous gaming state, the difference number display may be displayed.

With such a configuration, it is possible to ensure the fairness of the player who is correctly playing in the first game and the player who is playing the second game. In addition, by making it possible to emphasize the small number of acquired sheets, it is possible to give the player the impression of loss, so that the number of bets on the game medium in the subsequent games can be carefully selected. In addition, a player who is playing the game correctly has a relatively large number of acquired sheets, so that the superiority complex of such a player can be satisfied.

In addition, in the certain effect executed without shifting to the certain advantageous gaming state in the advantageous state, the notification regarding the special combination is not performed even in the state where the special combination is internally elected. It may be configured in.

With such a configuration, it may be possible to satisfy the superiority complex of advanced users.

Further, the above-mentioned "certain effect regarding the end of the advantageous gaming state" may mean "a certain effect regarding the end of the advantageous state".

Further, the first game in which the number of bets on the game medium is the first number and the second game in which the number of bets on the game medium is the second number can be executed, and the second number is described above. Is a number different from the first number, and in the advantageous state, the first game is more advantageous to the player than the second game, and the combination is a game medium. Including a re-gaming combination that can play a game regardless of input, in a certain control state, the winning of the re-gambling combination in the second game is higher than the winning probability of the re-gambling combination in the first game. The probability of winning may be higher.

With such a configuration, it is difficult for the player to return to the first game (for example, a three-card game) after playing the second game (for example, a two-card game). You may be able to play the game more carefully. In addition, even if the game from the decision of granting the privilege to the transition to a certain game state becomes long, the game can be played with a sense of expectation.

Further, the certain control state may be a state in which at least the count value can be updated and the winning probability of the replay combination is higher than the normal state.

Further, when the second game is performed in the advantageous state and the special combination is internally won, the effect of the certain effect is performed without shifting to the certain advantageous game state in the advantageous state. It may be configured to start execution.

Further, in the gaming table (for example, the slot machine 100 shown in FIG. 1) according to the present invention (hereinafter, may be referred to as “the present invention 1-6”), the number of bets on the gaming medium is the first number. It is configured to be able to execute one game (for example, a three-card betting game) and a second game (for example, a two-card betting game) in which the number of bets on the game medium is the second number. The number is a number different from the first number, and in a certain state, the first game is more advantageous to the player than the second game, and the number is spread over a plurality of games. It is configured so that a certain effect (for example, the interlocking effect shown in FIG. 84) can be executed, and the certain effect is an effect including the effect of a plurality of scenes, and is one of the effects of the plurality of scenes. The production of the scene is the production of the first scene (for example, the first scene shown in FIG. 84), and the production of one of the plurality of scenes is the production of the second scene (for example, FIG. It is the production of the second scene shown in 84), and when the execution of the first game is started after the game in which the production of the first scene is performed, the first game is described in the first game. The execution of the effect of the second scene is configured to be startable, and when the execution of the second game is started after the game in which the effect of the first scene is performed, the second game is started. It is a game table characterized in that the execution of the production of the second scene is not started in the above. Note that FIG. 84 is a diagram showing an outline of Invention 1-6 of the present application.

According to the game console according to the invention 1-6 of the present application, it is possible to notify the player that he / she is playing a game (second game) that is disadvantageous to the player in a manner that is not embarrassing to the player.

The game console according to the invention 1-6 of the present application is not limited to the configuration of the slot machine according to the present embodiment. Therefore, for example, when the second game is performed after the game in which the production of the first scene is performed, and then the execution of the first game is started, in the first game. It may be configured so that the execution of the effect of the second scene can be started.

With such a configuration, it is possible to entertain the player who has returned from the second game to the first game by seeing the correct flow of production.

In addition, when the second game is performed after the game in which the production of the first scene is performed, and then the execution of the first game is started, the second game is performed in the first game. It may be configured so that the execution of the effect of the scene is not started and the execution of another effect can be started.

With such a configuration, a certain effect is suddenly executed, which strongly impresses the player with the effect, and the player who has returned to the first game is given the first game again. You can reconfirm what you were doing.

Further, when the execution of the second game is started after the game in which the production of the first scene is performed, the execution of the production of the second scene is not started in the second game. In addition, at least a part of the effects of the first scene may be configured to be startable.

With such a configuration, it is possible to notify the player that he / she has played a game that is disadvantageous to the player (second game) in a manner that is not embarrassing to the player. In addition, by repeatedly performing the production, it is possible to give the player a sense of discomfort and make the player aware that the second game is being performed. In addition, by attracting the player's attention as if it were a rare production in which the same production is repeated, it may be possible to make the player pay attention to the number of bets on the game medium.

Further, the operation information of the operation means (for example, the operation navigation using the payout number display 127 shown in FIGS. 8 and 45, the operation navigation using the effect image display device 157 shown in FIG. 52, etc.) It is configured to be able to notify the stop position and stop order (information that can identify the stop order), and the advantageous state is a state that is more advantageous than the normal state with respect to the notification of the operation information, and a specific counter (information relating to the advantageous state). For example, the high navigation state counter shown in FIGS. 18 and 52) is provided, and the count value of the specific counter can be updated every time a game is played in the advantageous state, and a certain end condition is satisfied. When it is satisfied, it is configured to shift from the advantageous state to the normal state, and the certain termination condition is when the count value becomes the first specific value (for example, 0) (for example, 0). , When the number of games after the transition to the advantageous state reaches the upper limit), and the above-mentioned "execution of the first game after the game in which the production of the first scene is performed" Is configured to be able to start the execution of the effect of the second scene in the first game, "means" the game in which the effect of the first scene is performed. When the execution of the first game is started later, the count value is updated so that the execution of the effect of the second scene can be started in the first game. " That is, when the execution of the second game is started after the game in which the production of the first scene is performed, the production of the second scene is performed in the second game. "It is configured so that the execution is not started," means "when the execution of the second game is started after the game in which the production of the first scene is performed, the first count value is calculated." It may be updated so that the execution of the effect of the second scene is not started in the second game. "

With such a configuration, the counter regarding the advantageous state is updated, so that the fairness between the player who is playing the first game correctly and the player who is playing the second game can be ensured. It will be possible.

Further, a lottery means for determining the lottery result by performing a lottery process regarding the internal winning of the winning combination (for example, the winning combination internal lottery process (step S104) shown in FIG. 10) is provided, and the winning combination does not depend on the input of the game medium. In a certain control state, the probability of winning the re-game combination in the second game is higher than the probability of winning the re-game combination in the first game. The winning probability may be high.

With such a configuration, it is difficult for the player to return to the first game (for example, a three-card game) after playing the second game (for example, a two-card game). You may be able to play the game more carefully. In addition, even if the game from the decision of granting the privilege to the transition to a certain game state becomes long, the game can be played with a sense of expectation.

Further, the certain control state may be a state in which at least the count value can be updated and the winning probability of the replay combination is higher than the normal state.

Further, a first game in which the number of bets on the game medium is the first number (for example, a three-card bet game) and a second game in which the number of bets on the game medium is the second number (for example, a two-card bet). The second number is a number different from the first number, and in a certain state, the first game is more playable than the second game. It is a game that is advantageous for the player, and is configured to be able to execute a certain effect (for example, the interlocking effect shown in FIG. 63 or the interlocking effect shown in FIG. 64 (D)) over a plurality of games. The production includes the production of a plurality of scenes, and the production of one of the productions of the plurality of scenes includes the first scene (for example, the “enemy attack” scene shown in FIG. 63, and the production. This is the production of the “enemy attack” scene shown in FIG. 64 (D), and when the execution of the first game is started after the game in which the production of the first scene is performed, the first game is performed. When the production of the first scene is continuously executable in one game and the execution of the second game is started after the game in which the production of the first scene is performed. May be a game table characterized in that the production of the first scene is not continuously executed in the second game.

According to such a game table, it is possible to notify the player that he / she is playing a game (second game) that is disadvantageous to the player in a manner that is not embarrassing to the player.

In addition, when the second game is performed after the game in which the production of the first scene is performed, and then the execution of the first game is started, the first game is performed. It may be configured so that the execution of the production of one scene can be started.

In addition, when the second game is performed after the game in which the production of the first scene is performed, and then the execution of the first game is started, the first game is performed. The execution of the effect of one scene may not be started, and the execution of another effect may be started.

Further, when the execution of the second game is started after the game in which the production of the first scene is performed, the execution of the production of the second scene is not started in the second game. In addition, at least a part of the effects of the first scene may be configured to be startable.

Further, the gaming table (for example, the slot machine 100 shown in FIG. 1) according to the present invention (hereinafter, may be referred to as “the present invention 1-7”) has an operating means (for example, the stop button 137 to shown in FIG. 1). A control means (for example, a control means for shifting to one of a normal state (for example, a low navigation state shown in FIG. 6B) and an advantageous state (for example, a high navigation state shown in FIG. 6B). For example, a first game (for example, a three-card betting game), which is a game table including a main control unit 300) shown in FIG. 3 and the number of bets on the game medium is the first number, and a game medium. A second game (for example, a two-card betting game) in which the number of bets is the second number is playable, and the second number is different from the first number. In the advantageous state, the first game is more advantageous to the player than the second game, and the operation information of the operating means (for example, the payout number display 127 shown in FIGS. 8 and 45). Information that can identify the stop position and stop order of each reel, such as the operation navigation using the above and the operation navigation using the effect image display device 157 shown in FIG. 52 and the like), and the above-mentioned advantageous state Is a state more advantageous than the normal state with respect to the notification of the operation information, and includes a specific counter (for example, a high navigation state counter shown in FIGS. 18 and 52) related to the advantageous state, and the game is played in the advantageous state. Is configured to be able to update the count value of the specific counter (hereinafter, referred to as “specific count value”) each time a certain end condition is satisfied, and when a certain end condition is satisfied, the above-mentioned normal state is changed from the advantageous state. It is configured to shift to a state, and the certain end condition is that when the count value becomes a specific value (for example, 0) (for example, the number of games played after shifting to the advantageous state is the upper limit number of times). Is provided, and a certain counter (for example, the ceiling counter shown in FIGS. 85, 19, 68, etc.) relating to the advantageous state is provided, and each time a game is played in the advantageous state, The count value of the certain counter (hereinafter, referred to as "a certain count value") can be updated, and when the certain count value becomes a certain value (for example, 0), the player When the first game is performed in the advantageous state, which is configured to shift to the specific advantageous state (for example, the specific advantageous state shown in FIG. 85 or the AT1 state shown in FIG. 68). The count value of both the specific count value and the certain count value is updated in It is configured to be possible, and when the second game is performed in the advantageous state, only the specific count value among the specific count value and the certain count value is configured to be updatable. It is a game table characterized by being. Note that FIG. 85 is a diagram showing an outline of Invention 1-7 of the present application.

According to the game console according to the invention 1-7 of the present application, the counter regarding the advantageous state is updated, so that the fairness of the player who is correctly playing in the first game and the player who is playing the second game is fair. Can be secured. In addition, by giving preferential treatment to the player who correctly played the first game, it can be expected that the player who did not play the game correctly will be corrected.

The game console according to the invention 1-7 of the present application is not limited to the configuration of the slot machine according to the present embodiment. Therefore, for example, when the first game is performed after the second game is performed in the advantageous state, the process may shift to the specific advantageous state in the advantageous state. May be good.

With such a configuration, it is possible to sustain the player's willingness to play by making it possible to give a privilege to the player who has returned from the second game to the first game.

Further, when the number of games of the second game in the advantageous state exceeds a certain number of times, even if the first game is performed in the advantageous state, there is no possibility of shifting to the specific advantageous state. It may be configured as follows.

With such a configuration, a player who has made a mistake in counting the number of games is allowed to play the second game, while a player who maliciously played the second game (for example, searching for a strategy). By not giving benefits to players who play irregular games such as, etc., preferential treatment is given to the player who is playing the first game correctly, and the player who is playing the second game is corrected. Can be expected.

Further, in the advantageous state, it is configured so as to be able to shift to the first advantageous gaming state, and the first advantageous gaming state is a certain advantageous gaming state in which the operation information can be notified, and the specific advantageous state. May be a state relating to the transition to the first advantageous gaming state.

Further, in the advantageous state, it is possible to shift to a second advantageous gaming state (for example, the LMT state shown in FIG. 6 or the like), and the second advantageous gaming state can notify the operation information. It is an advantageous gaming state, and when the specific count value becomes a third value (for example, 20), it is configured to be able to shift to the second advantageous gaming state, and the specific value and the said The third value is another value, and even when the number of games of the second game in the advantageous state exceeds the certain number of times, the first game is performed in the advantageous state. In some cases, it may be configured so that the second advantageous gaming state may be entered before the advantageous state ends.

With such a configuration, it is possible to sustain the player's willingness to play by making it possible to give a privilege to the player who has returned from the second game to the first game.

Further, a lottery means for determining the lottery result by performing a lottery process regarding the internal winning of the winning combination (for example, the winning combination internal lottery process (step S104) shown in FIG. 10) is provided, and the winning combination does not depend on the input of the game medium. In a certain control state, the probability of winning the re-game combination in the second game is higher than the probability of winning the re-game combination in the first game. The winning probability may be high.

With such a configuration, it is difficult for the player to return to the first game (for example, a three-card game) after playing the second game (for example, a two-card game). You may be able to play the game more carefully. In addition, even if the game from the decision of granting the privilege to the transition to a certain game state becomes long, the game can be played with a sense of expectation.

Further, the certain control state may be a state in which at least the count value can be updated and the winning probability of the replay combination is higher than the normal state.

Further, the gaming table (for example, the slot machine 100 shown in FIG. 1) according to the present invention (hereinafter, may be referred to as “the present invention 1-8”) has an operating means (for example, the stop button 137 to shown in FIG. 1). A control means (for example, a control means for shifting to one of a normal state (for example, a low navigation state shown in FIG. 6B) and an advantageous state (for example, a high navigation state shown in FIG. 6B). For example, a gaming table including a main control unit 300 shown in FIG. 3) and a display means capable of displaying a plurality of types of displays (for example, an effect image display device 157 shown in FIG. 1). Operation information (for example, operation navigation using the payout number display 127 shown in FIGS. 8 and 45, operation navigation using the effect image display device 157 shown in FIG. 52, etc., stop position and stop order of each reel, etc. The advantageous state is configured to be able to notify the information that can identify the above, and the advantageous state is a state that is more advantageous than the normal state with respect to the notification of the operation information, and a specific counter (for example, FIG. The high navigation state counter shown in FIG. 52 and the like) is provided, and the count value of the specific counter can be updated each time a game is played in the advantageous state, and when a certain end condition is satisfied, It is configured to transition from the advantageous state to the normal state, and the certain termination condition is when the count value becomes a specific value (for example, 0) (for example, after shifting to the advantageous state). The first game (for example, a three-card bet game) in which the number of bets on the game medium is the first number, and the number of bets on the game medium are the conditions that are satisfied (when the number of games in the game reaches the upper limit). The second number, which is a second game (for example, a two-card betting game), is configured to be playable, and the second number is different from the first number and is in the advantageous state. The first game is more advantageous to the player than the second game, and in the advantageous state, it is possible to shift to any of a plurality of advantageous game states. The advantageous gaming state of one of the plurality of advantageous gaming states is the first advantageous gaming state (for example, the first advantageous gaming state shown in FIG. 86 and the AT2 state shown in FIG. 6 and the like). The advantageous gaming state of one of the plurality of advantageous gaming states is the second advantageous gaming state (for example, the first advantageous gaming state shown in FIG. 86 and the judge state shown in FIG. 6 and the like). The first advantageous gaming state is more advantageous to the player than the second advantageous gaming state, and the first advantageous gaming state is described. After the gaming state ends, it is configured to be able to shift to the second advantageous gaming state, and one of the plurality of types of displays is displayed at the end of the first advantageous gaming state. Display (hereinafter referred to as "first display". For example, the first display d1) shown in FIG. 86, and one of the plurality of types of displays is a display corresponding to the second advantageous gaming state (hereinafter, “second display””. For example, in the second display d2) shown in FIG. 86, the display of one of the plurality of types of displays is a specific display different from any of the first display and the second display. (Hereinafter referred to as “third display”. For example, the third display d1 shown in FIG. 86), and when the execution of the first game is started after the first display is displayed. , When the count value is updated so that the second display can be displayed in the first game, and the execution of the second game is started after the first display is displayed. Is configured so that the count value is updated so that the third display can be displayed in the game.

It is a game table characterized by that. Note that FIG. 86 is a diagram showing an outline of Invention 1-8 of the present application.

According to the game console according to the invention 1-8 of the present application, it is possible to notify the player that he / she is playing a game (second game) that is disadvantageous to the player in a manner that is not embarrassing to the player. Since the counter regarding the advantageous state is updated, it is possible to ensure the fairness between the player who is correctly playing in the first game and the player who is playing the second game. In addition, it is possible to comfortably enjoy the game in the next game state while correctly performing the first game.

The game console according to the invention 1-8 of the present application is not limited to the configuration of the slot machine according to the present embodiment. Therefore, for example, the second display may be a display relating to the start of the second advantageous gaming state.

With such a configuration, it is possible to comfortably enjoy the game in the next game state while correctly performing the first game.

Further, the second display is a display composed of displays of a plurality of scenes, and the display of one scene among the displays of the plurality of scenes is a display of the first scene, and the display of the plurality of scenes. The display of one of the scenes is a display of a second scene, and the display of the first scene is a display in which the display is started by an operation related to the progress of the game. The display of the second scene may be a display in which the display is started by another operation related to the progress of the game, which is performed following the certain operation.

With such a configuration, it is possible to comfortably enjoy the game in the next game state while correctly performing the first game.

Further, a lottery means for performing a lottery process relating to the internal winning of the winning combination and determining the lottery result (for example, the winning winning combination internal lottery process (step S104) shown in FIG. The display mode may change in relation to the lottery result in the game in which the display of the second display is started.

With such a configuration, it is possible to comfortably enjoy the game in the next game state while correctly performing the first game.

Further, a lottery means for determining the lottery result by performing a lottery process regarding the internal winning of the winning combination (for example, the winning combination internal lottery process (step S104) shown in FIG. 10) is provided, and the winning combination does not depend on the input of the game medium. In a certain control state, the probability of winning the re-game combination in the second game is higher than the probability of winning the re-game combination in the first game. The winning probability may be high.

With such a configuration, it is difficult for the player to return to the first game (for example, a three-card game) after playing the second game (for example, a two-card game). You may be able to play the game more carefully. In addition, even if the game from the decision of granting the privilege to the transition to a certain game state becomes long, the game can be played with a sense of expectation.

Further, the certain control state may be a state in which at least the count value can be updated and the winning probability of the replay combination is higher than the normal state.

Further, the game counter (for example, the slot machine 100 shown in FIG. 1) according to the present invention (hereinafter, may be referred to as “the present invention 1-9”) has an operating means (for example, the stop button 137 to the stop button 137 to shown in FIG. 1). 139), a lottery means for determining the lottery result by performing a lottery process relating to the internal winning of the winning combination (for example, the winning combination internal lottery process (step S104) shown in FIG. 10), and a normal state (for example, FIG. 6B). The control means (for example, the main control unit 300 shown in FIG. 3) for shifting to one of the advantageous state (for example, the high navigation state shown in FIG. 6B) and the advantageous state (for example, the high navigation state shown in FIG. A game console provided with a privilege giving means (for example, an AT number addition lottery for AT2 state processing A shown in FIG. 23) capable of giving a privilege related to the advantageous state in an advantageous state, and a certain counter (for example, FIG. The ceiling counter shown in 87, 19, 68, etc.) is provided, and the count value of the certain counter (hereinafter referred to as “a certain count value”) can be updated every time the game is played. , The advantageous gaming state is configured to be able to shift to a certain advantageous gaming state (for example, the BB state shown in FIG. 43B or the AT1 state), and the right to shift to the certain advantageous gaming state (for example, After the BB internal winning or the right to shift to the AT1 state is acquired, the winning notification (for example, the bonus confirmation notification bk1 shown in FIG. 87, the bonus confirmation shown in FIGS. 68, 70, etc.) suggesting the acquisition of the right is acquired. The execution of the display (display of the image including the characters "bonus confirmed!") Is configured to start, and the right to shift to the certain advantageous gaming state includes the first symbol (for example, the figure). The right related to 4 (a) and the Seven 1 symbol shown in FIG. 87 (hereinafter referred to as “first right”; for example, the pseudo bonus 1 shown in FIG. 87) and the second symbol (for example, FIG. 4 (a)). ) And the right related to the Seven 2 symbol shown in FIG. 87 (hereinafter referred to as "second right". For example, the pseudo bonus 2 shown in FIG. 87) is included, and the second right is more than the first right. Is a more advantageous right for the player, and in the state where the first right is acquired after the execution of the winning notification is started, the first result is obtained as a result of the internal winning. The internal winning is configured so that the execution of the first notification can be started when the determination is made, and in the state where the execution of the winning notification is started and the second right is acquired. The execution of the second notification can be started when the second result is determined as a result of In the first result, the first symbol is displayed when the operating means is operated according to the content of the first notification (for example, the effective line shown in FIGS. 87 and 4 (b)). The result (or displayed on a winning line other than the valid line), and the second result is that the second symbol is displayed when the operating means is operated according to the content of the second notification. (For example, it is displayed on the valid line (or the winning line other than the valid line) shown in FIG. 87 and FIG. 4B), and the winning notification is after the execution of the winning notification is started. When the certain count value becomes a certain value (for example, 0) in a certain state from the state in which the first right is acquired to the transition to the certain advantageous gaming state, the first It is a game table characterized in that it is configured so as to change from the state in which the right of the above is acquired to the state in which the second right is acquired. Note that FIG. 87 is a diagram showing an outline of Invention 1-9 of the present application.

According to the game console according to the invention 1-9 of the present application, even if the game from the determination of the privilege grant to the transition to a certain game state becomes long, the game can be performed with a sense of expectation.

The game console according to the present invention 1-9 is not limited to the configuration of the slot machine according to the present embodiment. Therefore, for example, when the state in which the first right is acquired changes to the state in which the second right is acquired, the first notification may not be executed.

Further, a first game in which the number of bets on the game medium is the first number (for example, a three-card bet game) and a second game in which the number of bets on the game medium is the second number (for example, a two-card bet). The second number is different from the first number and is more practicable than the second game in the advantageous state (or / and the normal state). The first game is more advantageous to the player, and the first game is performed after the execution of the winning notification is started and the first right is acquired. If this is the case, the second game is played in a state in which the certain count value is updatable and the first right is acquired after the execution of the winning notification is started. If so, it may be configured so that the certain count value is not updated.

With such a configuration, the counter regarding the advantageous state is updated, so that the fairness between the player who is playing the first game correctly and the player who is playing the second game can be ensured. It will be possible. In addition, by giving preferential treatment to the player when the game is played correctly in the first game, it can be expected that the player who did not play the game correctly will correct the game method. In addition, even if the game from the decision of granting the privilege to the transition to a certain game state becomes long, the game can be played with a sense of expectation.

Further, the operation information of the operation means (for example, the operation navigation using the payout number display 127 shown in FIGS. 8 and 45, the operation navigation using the effect image display device 157 shown in FIG. 52, etc.) It is configured to be able to notify the stop position and the stop order (information that can identify the stop order), and the advantageous state is a state that is more advantageous than the normal state with respect to the notification of the operation information, and a specific counter (information relating to the advantageous state). For example, the high navigation state counter shown in FIGS. 18 and 52) is provided, and the count value of the specific counter (hereinafter referred to as “specific count value”) is updated every time the game is played in the advantageous state. It is configured to be possible, and when a certain end condition is satisfied, it is configured to shift from the advantageous state to the normal state, and in the certain end condition, the specific count value is a specific value. It is a condition that is satisfied when (for example, 0) is satisfied (for example, when the number of games played after shifting to the advantageous state reaches the upper limit), and the certain counter is different from the specific counter. It is a certain counter regarding the advantageous state, and the certain count value is a value that can be updated every time a game is played in the advantageous state, and when the first game is played in the advantageous state. Is configured so that both the specific count value and the count value of the certain count value can be updated, and when the second game is performed in the advantageous state, the specific count value is specified. Of the count value and the certain count value, only the specific count value may be configured to be updatable.

With such a configuration, it is possible to ensure the fairness of the player who is correctly playing in the first game and the player who is playing the second game. In addition, by giving preferential treatment to the player when the game is played correctly in the first game, it can be expected that the player who did not play the game correctly will correct the game method. In addition, even if the game from the decision of granting the privilege to the transition to a certain game state becomes long, the game can be played with a sense of expectation.

Further, the combination includes a re-game combination capable of playing a game without inputting a game medium, and in a certain control state, the combination is higher than the winning probability of the re-game combination in the first game. The winning probability of the re-game combination in the second game may be higher than the winning probability.

With such a configuration, it is difficult for the player to return to the first game (for example, a three-card game) after playing the second game (for example, a two-card game). You may be able to play the game more carefully. In addition, even if the game from the decision of granting the privilege to the transition to a certain game state becomes long, the game can be played with a sense of expectation.

Further, the certain control state may be a state in which at least the specific count value can be updated and the winning probability of the re-game combination is higher than the normal state.

[Embodiment 2]
Hereinafter, the slot machine according to the second embodiment of the present invention will be described in detail with reference to the drawings.
In addition, in order to avoid duplicate explanations, in principle, only the configuration different from the game console according to the first embodiment will be described. In principle, FIGS. 88 to 96 are used only for the description of the second embodiment, and even when overlapping reference numerals are shown in other drawings, the description of the second embodiment is described in FIGS. 88 to 96. The code shown in 96 has priority.

<AT2 state processing A>
First, the AT2 state process A according to the second embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 88 (a). FIG. 88A is a flowchart showing the flow of AT2 state processing A according to the second embodiment, and is a diagram corresponding to the AT2 state processing A according to the first embodiment shown in FIG. 23.

In the AT2 state process A according to the second embodiment, the processes of steps S1451 to S1453 are added to the AT2 state process A according to the first embodiment described with reference to FIG. 23. Specifically, in step S1451, it is determined whether the LMT standby flag is off or on, and if it is off, the process proceeds to step S1452, and if it is on, the process proceeds to step S1453. In step S1452, in the lottery table shown in FIG. 88 (b), the AT number addition lottery 1 is performed using the lottery value corresponding to the “LMT standby flag off”, and then the process proceeds to step S1402. On the other hand, in step S1453, in the lottery table shown in FIG. 88 (b), the AT number addition lottery 2 is performed using the lottery value corresponding to the “LMT standby flag on”, and then the process proceeds to step S1402.

As described above, in this example, the number of AT added games in the AT2 state is different depending on the state of the LMT standby flag. Specifically, when the LMT standby flag is off, the number of AT-added games is selected in the range of 0G to 100G according to the winning combination, but when the LMT standby flag is on, the internal winning is won. Select the number of AT-added games in the range of 0G to 10G according to the combination. That is, in the AT2 state, when the LMT standby flag is on (when shifting from the AT2 state to the LMT state), the AT is more than when the LMT standby flag is off (when the AT2 state does not shift to the LMT state). It is configured to reduce the number of additional games.

<Judge state processing B>
Next, the judge state processing B according to the second embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 89A. FIG. 89A is a flowchart showing the flow of the judge state processing B according to the second embodiment, and is a diagram corresponding to the judge state processing B according to the first embodiment shown in FIG. 31.

In the judge state process B according to the second embodiment, the processes of steps S2251 to S2253 are added to the judge state process B according to the first embodiment described with reference to FIG. 31. Specifically, in step S2251, it is determined whether or not the correction condition is satisfied, and if it is not satisfied (when correction is not necessary), the process proceeds to step S2203 and if it is satisfied (correction is performed). If necessary), the process proceeds to step S2252.

Here, in step S2251, the determination as to whether or not the correction condition is satisfied (correction condition determination) is performed in the following procedure. In the AT2 initial number lottery in step S2202, any one of the AT2 initial number specified in the AT2 initial number lottery table shown in FIG. 89B is selected. Subsequently, in the correction condition determination in step S2251, the value (X) of the high navigation state counter at the time of the determination is acquired, and the AT2 selected by the AT2 initial number lottery in step S2202 from the value X of the high navigation state counter. The initial number of times (Y) is subtracted. Then, when the value after subtraction (XY) is equal to or less than the first determination value (100 in this example), it is determined that the correction condition is satisfied.

Further, in the correction condition determination in step S2251, the difference number (A) at the time of the determination is acquired, and the difference number (A) corresponds to the AT2 initial number (Y) selected in the AT2 initial number lottery in step S2202. The expected number of sheets (B) to be used is subtracted. Then, even when the value after subtraction (AB) is equal to or less than the second determination value (1500 in this example), it is determined that the correction condition is satisfied.

In step 2252, the AT2 correction value is set in the effect state counter, and in the next step S2253, the LMT standby flag is set to ON, and then the process proceeds to step S2204. Here, the AT correction value in step S2252 is calculated by adding a certain value (20 in this example) to the AT2 initial number (Y) selected in the AT2 initial number lottery in step S2202. Therefore, for example, when the value (X) of the high navigation state counter at the time of determining the correction condition is 100 and the AT2 initial number of times (Y) selected in the AT2 initial number of times lottery is 30, the correction condition is satisfied. , In step S2252, 50 (= AT2 initial number of times (Y) 30 + 20 selected in the AT2 initial number of times lottery) is set as the AT2 correction value.

In the judge state processing B according to the second embodiment, the lottery value (number of pullback G) is set in the effect state counter in the pullback state in step S2206, but as shown in FIG. 89C, the lottery value (pullback G) is set. The degree of expectation for pullback is higher when the lottery value (number of pullback G) is 1G than when the number) is 2 to 9G.

<AT2 state processing B>
Next, the AT2 state process B according to the second embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 90. FIG. 90 is a flowchart showing the flow of AT2 state processing B according to the second embodiment, and is a diagram corresponding to the AT2 state processing B according to the first embodiment shown in FIG. 32.

In the AT2 state process B according to the second embodiment, the processes of steps S2351 to S2353 are added to the AT2 state process B according to the first embodiment described with reference to FIG. 32. Specifically, in step S2351, it is determined whether the LMT standby flag is off or on, and if it is off, the process proceeds to step S2302, and if it is on, the process proceeds to step S2352. In step S2352, the LMT initial value + 1 is set in the effect state counter, and in the next step S2353, the LMT state is set in the effect state, and then the process proceeds to step 2306.

As described above, in this example, in the judge state (judgment state process B shown in FIG. 89), when the AT2 state is set to the effect state and the LMT standby flag is set to ON, the AT2 state is started. It is configured to shift to the LMT state.

<Pullback state processing B>
Next, the pullback state process B according to the second embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 91 (a). FIG. 91A is a flowchart showing the flow of the pullback state process B according to the second embodiment, and is a diagram corresponding to the pullback state process B according to the first embodiment shown in FIG. 33.

In the pull-back state process B according to the second embodiment, the processes of steps S2451 to S2453 are added to the pull-back state process B according to the first embodiment described with reference to FIG. 33. Specifically, in step S2451, it is determined whether or not the correction condition is satisfied, and if it is not satisfied (when correction is not necessary), the process proceeds to step S2403 and if it is satisfied (correction is performed). If necessary), the process proceeds to step S2452. The correction condition determination (determination of whether or not the correction condition is satisfied) executed in step S2451 is the same as step S2251 of the judge state process B described with reference to FIG. 89 (a). Is omitted.

In step 2452, the AT2 correction value is set in the effect state counter, and in the next step S2453, the LMT standby flag is set to ON, and then the process proceeds to step S2404.

FIG. 91 (b) is a diagram showing a transition example of the AT state in the high navigation state. FIGS. 91 (b) and 91 (1) show a typical transition example of the AT state, which is an example of transition in the order of AT1 state (20G) → AT2 state (30G to 100G).

On the other hand, FIGS. 91 (b) and 91 (2) show another transition example of the AT state, which is the AT1 state (20G) → the judge state → the AT2 state (30G to 100G) → the pullback state → the AT2 state (10G). This is an example of migrating in order. In this example, the AT2 state shifted from the pullback state is more disadvantageous to the player than the AT1 state. The number of games in the AT2 state shifted from the pullback state is not limited to this example, and may be, for example, 10G to 50G.

Further, FIGS. 91 (b) and 91 (3) show another transition example of the AT state, in which the AT1 state (20G) → the judge state → the AT2 state (30G to 100G) → the pullback state → the AT3 state (10G). This is an example of migrating in order. In this example, the AT state shifted from the pullback state is an AT3 state different from the AT1 state and the AT2 state, which is more disadvantageous to the player than the AT1 state. The number of games in the AT3 state shifted from the pullback state is not limited to this example, and may be, for example, 10G to 50G.

<Specific examples of various effects, various displays, etc.>
Next, specific examples of various effects, various displays, and the like executed by the slot machine according to the second embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 92 to 96. 92 to 96 are timing charts showing the flow of the effect, respectively, and show the effect mode of the effect to be executed in association with the timing chart.

<AT2 state → Judge state → Pullback state → Low navigation state>
FIG. 92A is a diagram showing the flow of the effect when the effect state shifts to the normal state of the low navigation state after shifting to the AT2 state → the judge state → the pullback state in the high navigation state.

The game R328 is a game in which the number of remaining games in the high navigation state is 328 and the number of remaining games in the AT2 state is 2. In this game R328, when a certain condition is satisfied (in this example, the pressing operation of the start lever 135 is accepted), the effect image display device 157 is used and the effect state is the AT2 state. , The AT2 effect corresponding to the AT2 state is executed, and the operation navigation suggesting the stop operation (in this example, "2-1-3" is displayed) is executed, and the number of remaining games in the AT2 state (effect state counter) is executed. Since the count value of (count value) is 2, the display including the image showing the number of games (count value of the effect state counter) (in this example, the display of the image including the characters “LAST 2G”) is executed. ..

The following game R327 is a game in which the number of remaining games in the high navigation state is 327 and the number of remaining games in the AT2 state is 1. In this game R327, while executing the AT2 effect and the operation navigation in the same manner as the game R328, a display including an image showing the number of remaining games (count value of the effect state counter) in the AT2 state (in this example, Displaying an image containing the characters "LAST 1G") is being executed.

The following game R326 is a game in which the number of remaining games in the high navigation state is 326 and the number of remaining games in the AT2 state is 0. In this game R326, while executing the AT2 effect and the operation navigation in the same manner as in the games R328 to R327, the display including an image showing the number of remaining games (count value of the effect state counter) in the AT2 state (book). In the example, the display of an image including the characters "LAST 0G") is being executed.

Further, in this game R326, when a certain condition is satisfied (in this example, the third stop operation is accepted), the effect image display device 157 is used to be the final game in the AT2 state. , The display of the AT2 end effect screen corresponding to the end of the AT2 state is executed, and the result display 1 (for example, the display of the number of acquired game media) in the AT2 state is executed, while the remaining number of games in the AT2 state (for example). The display including the image showing the effect state counter count value) (in this example, the display of the image including the characters "LAST 0G") and the display of the operation navigation are deleted.

The following game R325 is a game in which the number of remaining games in the high navigation state is 325 and the number of remaining games in the judge state shifted from the AT2 state is 9. In this game R325, until a certain condition is satisfied (in this example, until the pressing operation of the start lever 135 is accepted (immediately after BET, etc.)), the effect image display device 157 is used to judge the effect state from the AT2 state. Since the state has been changed, the judge effect corresponding to the start of the judge state is started, and since the number of remaining games in the judge state (count value of the effect state counter) is 10, the number of games (effect state counter) is concerned. The display including the image showing the count value of) (in this example, the display of the image including the characters "LAST 10G") is being executed.

After that, when a certain condition is satisfied in this game R325 (in this example, the pressing operation of the start lever 135 is accepted), the effect image display device 157 is used and the effect state is the judge state. Therefore, since the judge effect corresponding to the judge state is executed and the number of remaining games in the judge state (count value of the effect state counter) is 9, an image showing the number of games (count value of the effect state counter). (In this example, the display of the image including the characters "LAST 9G") is being executed.

The game R315 to game R314 is a game in which the number of remaining games in the high navigation state is 315 to 314, and the number of remaining games in the pullback state after shifting from the judge state is 1 to 0. In the games R315 to R314, when a certain condition is satisfied (in this example, the pressing operation of the start lever 135 is accepted), the effect image display device 157 is used to change the effect state from the judge state. Since the state has shifted to the pullback state, the normal screen (pullback) corresponding to the pullback state is displayed. Further, after the end of the game R314, the pull-back state of the high navigation state ends, the normal state of the low navigation state is entered, and the normal screen corresponding to the normal state of the low navigation state is used by using the effect image display device 157. (Normal) is displayed.

The display mode of the normal screen (normal) may be at least partially the same as the display mode of the normal screen (pull back), or may be completely different from the display mode of the normal screen (pull back). Further, when displaying a screen having the same display mode, it is preferable that the probability that the screen is displayed in the pulled-back state is higher than the probability that the screen is displayed in the low navigation state.

<AT2 state → LMT state → low navigation state>
FIG. 92B is a diagram showing a flow of the effect when the effect state shifts to the normal state of the low navigation state after shifting to the AT2 state → LMT state in the high navigation state.

The game R69 is a game in which the number of remaining games in the high navigation state is 69 and the number of remaining games in the AT2 state is 0. In this game R69, while executing the AT2 effect and the operation navigation in the same manner as the immediately preceding games R71 to R70, a display including an image showing the number of remaining games in the AT2 state (count value of the effect state counter) is included. (In this example, the display of the image including the characters "LAST 0G") is being executed.

Further, in this game R69, when a certain condition is satisfied (in this example, the third stop operation is accepted), the effect image display device 157 is used to be the final game in the AT2 state. , The display of the AT2 end effect screen corresponding to the end of the AT2 state is executed, and the result display 1 (for example, the display of the number of acquired game media) in the AT2 state is executed, while the remaining number of games in the AT2 state (for example). The display including the image showing the effect state counter count value) (in this example, the display of the image including the characters "LAST 0G") and the display of the operation navigation are deleted.

The game R68 is a game in which the number of remaining games in the high navigation state is 68, and the number of remaining games in the LMT state shifted from the AT2 state is 19. In this game R68, when a certain condition is satisfied (in this example, the pressing operation of the start lever 135 is accepted), the effect state is changed from the AT2 state to the LMT state by using the effect image display device 157. Since the transition has occurred, the ED effect (ending effect) corresponding to the start of the LMT state is started, and the operation navigation (in this example, "2-1-3" is displayed) suggesting the stop operation is executed, and the LMT is executed. Since the total number of games in the state is 20 and the number of remaining games in the LMT state (count value of the effect state counter) is 20, the total number of games in the LMT state and the number of remaining games in the LMT state (effect state counter) The display including the image showing the count value of) (in this example, the display of the image including the characters "20/20 more") is executed. The fill in the operation navigation indicates that the stop operation has not yet been performed at the same timing.

After that, when a certain condition is satisfied in this game R68 (in this example, the third stop operation is accepted), the effect image display device 157 is used and the effect state is the LMT state. Since the ED effect (ending effect) corresponding to the LMT state is executed, the total number of games in the LMT state is 20, and the number of remaining games in the judge state (count value of the effect state counter) is 19, the LMT state. A display including an image showing the total number of games in the above and the number of remaining games in the LMT state (count value of the effect state counter) (in this example, the display of the image including the characters "19/20") is executed. There is. Since the flow of production of games R67 to R50 is almost the same, the description thereof will be omitted.

The game R49 is a game in which the number of remaining games in the high navigation state is 49 and the number of remaining games in the LMT state is 0. In this game R49, when a certain condition is satisfied (in this example, the pressing operation of the start lever 135 is accepted), the effect image display device 157 is used and the effect state is the LMT state. , The ED effect (ending effect) corresponding to the LMT state is executed, and the total number of games in the LMT state is 20, and the number of remaining games in the judge state (count value of the effect state counter) is 0. A display including an image showing the total number of games in the state and the number of remaining games in the LMT state (count value of the effect state counter) (in this example, the display of the image including the characters "0/20") is executed. ing.

After that, when a certain condition is satisfied in this game R49 (in this example, the third stop operation is accepted), the effect image display device 157 is used to be the final game in the LMT state. While displaying the ED effect end screen corresponding to the end of the LMT state and displaying the result in the LMT state 2 (for example, displaying the number of acquired game media and the number of games in the AT2 state), the LMT state The display including the image showing the remaining number of games (count value of the effect state counter) in (in this example, the display of the image including the characters "0/20") and the display of the operation navigation are deleted. Further, after the end of the game R49, the LMT state in the high navigation state ends, the normal state shifts to the low navigation state, and the normal screen corresponding to the normal state in the low navigation state is used by using the effect image display device 157. (Normal) is displayed.

In this example, after the second advantageous gaming state (AT2 state in this example) is completed, it is possible to shift to the fourth advantageous gaming state (judgment state or pullback state in this example). After the end of the three advantageous gaming states (LMT state in this example), it is configured to shift to the normal state (low navigation state in this example), and the effect in the second advantageous gaming state (this example). Then, the aspect of the AT2 effect) is different from the aspect of the effect (ED effect in this example) in the third advantageous gaming state.

According to this example, since it is easy to understand the advantageous gaming state that can be expected, it is possible to make the player play the game with a sense of expectation.

<AT2 state → Judge state → Pullback state → AT2 state>
FIG. 93 (a) is a diagram showing a flow of the effect when the effect state shifts in the order of AT2 state → judge state → pullback state → AT2 state in the high navigation state, and FIG. 92 (a) is used. It shows the continuation of the explanation.

The game R315 is a game in which the number of remaining games in the high navigation state is 315 and the number of remaining games in the pullback state after shifting from the judge state is 1, and a specific rare role (in this example, a small role 2 or a small role). Since the game was internally won in 3), it is a game that shifts to the AT2 state from the next game. In this game R315, when a certain condition is satisfied (in this example, the pressing operation of the start lever 135 is accepted), the effect image display device 157 is used to change the effect state from the judge state to the pullback state. Since the transition has occurred, the normal screen (pull back) corresponding to the pullback state is displayed.

The following game R314 is a game in which the number of remaining games in the high navigation state is 314 and the number of remaining games in the AT2 state shifted from the pullback state is 9. In this game R314, until a certain condition is satisfied (in this example, until the start lever 135 is pressed (immediately after BET, etc.)), the effect image display device 157 is used to change the effect state from the judge state to AT2. Since the state has been changed, the AT2 effect corresponding to the start of the AT2 state is started, and the number of games remaining in the AT2 state before the update (count value of the effect state counter) is 50. A display including an image (in this example, an image including the characters "50G") indicating the effect state counter count value) is being executed.

After that, when a certain condition is satisfied in this game R314 (in this example, the pressing operation of the start lever 135 is accepted), the effect state is the AT2 state by using the effect image display device 157. Therefore, since the AT2 effect corresponding to the AT2 state is executed and the number of games remaining in the AT2 state (count value of the effect state counter) is 49, an image showing the number of games (count value of the effect state counter). (In this example, the display of the image including the characters "LAST 49G") is being executed.

In this example, when shifting from the pullback state to the AT state, it is configured to shift to the AT2 state, which is more advantageous to the player than the AT1 state. Although not shown, when a 3-card bet game is played after a 2-card bet game is played in the pullback state, the game shifts to another high navigation state (for example, LMT state) without shifting to the AT2 state. May be done. Further, although not shown, if the two-card betting game is continued in the pull-back state, the high navigation state may end and the low navigation state may be shifted without shifting to the AT2 state.

<AT2 state → LMT state → low navigation state → normal state → confirmed notification state → AT1 state>
In FIG. 93 (b), the effect state shifts from the AT2 state to the LMT state in the high navigation state, then shifts to the normal state of the low navigation state, shifts to the high navigation state again, and the effect state shifts to the normal state → It is a figure which showed the flow of the effect in the case of transitioning in the order of a final announcement state → AT1 state, and shows the continuation of the effect explained using FIG. 92 (b).

In this example, after shifting to the normal state of the low navigation state, the state shifts to the high navigation state again, and the effect state shifts in the order of the normal state → the confirmed notification state → the AT1 state.

The game R658 is a game in which the number of remaining games in the high navigation state is 658, and the number of remaining games in the AT1 state shifted from the finalized notification state is 19. In this game R658, until a certain condition is satisfied (in this example, until the start lever 135 is pressed (immediately after BET, etc.)), the effect image display device 157 is used to change the effect state from the finalized notification state. Since the transition to the AT1 state has started, the AT1 effect corresponding to the start of the AT1 state is started, and the number of games remaining in the AT1 state before the update (count value of the effect state counter) is 20, so that the number of games is concerned. A display including an image showing (count value of the effect state counter) (in this example, a display of an image including the characters "20G") is executed.

After that, when a certain condition is satisfied in this game R658 (in this example, the pressing operation of the start lever 135 is accepted), the effect state is the AT1 state by using the effect image display device 157. Therefore, since the AT1 effect corresponding to the AT1 state is executed and the number of games remaining in the AT1 state (count value of the effect state counter) is 19, an image showing the number of games (count value of the effect state counter). (In this example, the display of the image including the characters "LAST 19G") is being executed.

In this example, after the second advantageous gaming state (AT2 state in this example) is completed, it is possible to shift to the fourth advantageous gaming state (judgment state or pullback state in this example). After the end of the three advantageous gaming states (LMT state in this example), it is configured to shift to the normal state (low navigation state in this example), and the effect in the second advantageous gaming state (this example). Then, the aspect of the AT2 effect) is different from the aspect of the effect (ED effect in this example) in the third advantageous game state, and the operation information is started from the fourth advantageous game state (judgment state or pullback state). Is configured to shift to the second advantageous gaming state (AT2 state) when shifting to the game state in which the game can be notified, and from the state after the third advantageous gaming state (LMT state) is completed. When shifting to a gaming state in which operation information can be notified, the game is configured to shift to the first advantageous gaming state (AT1 state in this example).

According to this example, since it is easy to understand the advantageous gaming state that can be expected, it is possible to make the player play the game with a sense of expectation. In addition, it is possible to have expectations even after the end of a promising advantageous gaming state.

Further, in this example, when the LMT state is changed to the low navigation state, the high navigation state is changed again, and the AT state is changed to the high navigation state, the AT1 state is more disadvantageous to the player than the AT2 state. It is configured to migrate.

<Notification when a combination is established in the AT2 state>
FIG. 94 (a) is a diagram showing an example of notification when a combination is established in the AT2 state.

The game R328 is a game in which the number of remaining games in the high navigation state is 328 and the number of remaining games in the AT2 state is 2. In this game R328, when a certain condition is satisfied (in this example, the pressing operation of the start lever 135 is accepted), the effect image display device 157 is used and the effect state is the AT2 state. , The AT2 effect corresponding to the AT2 state is executed, and the operation navigation (in this example, "2-1-3" is displayed) suggesting the stop operation of the push order combination is executed, and the number of remaining games in the AT2 state is executed. Since (count value of the effect state counter) is 2, a display including an image showing the number of games (count value of the effect state counter) (in this example, display of an image including the characters "LAST 2G") is displayed. Running.

The following game R327 is a game in which the number of remaining games in the high navigation state is 327 and the number of remaining games in the AT2 state is increased from 1 to 51. In this game R327, when a certain condition is satisfied (in this example, the pressing operation of the start lever 135 is accepted), the effect image display device 157 is used and the effect state is the AT2 state. , The AT2 effect corresponding to the AT2 state is executed, and the internally won combination (for example, the watermelon of the small combination 3) cannot be specified. The non-specific display g2 (in this example, "!-!-!" Is displayed. ) Is executed, and since the number of remaining games (count value of the effect state counter) in the AT2 state before the addition is 1, a display including an image showing the number of games (count value of the effect state counter) is included (this example). Is displaying an image containing the characters "LAST 1G").

Further, in this game R327, when a certain condition is satisfied (in this example, the third stop operation is accepted), the effect image is overlapped and displayed in the non-specified display, and then the number of games added to the AT is added. (In this example, the character "+ 50G" is displayed), and the number of remaining games in the AT2 state (count value of the effect state counter) has increased from 1 to 51 due to the addition of AT. A display including an image showing the number of games (count value of the effect state counter) (in this example, an image including the characters "LAST 51G") is executed.

The display mode of the non-specified display is not limited to this example, and for example, the internal winning of the first or second role of the same type is displayed as the first non-specified display (for example, "!-!-!"". (Indication of), and the internal winning of the second or third role of the same type is performed in the second unspecified display (for example, "?-?-?" Display), so that the second role can be won. It may be configured so that the internal winning cannot be specified. In addition, the internal winning of a different type of first role or fourth role is performed with the first unspecified display (for example, "!-!-!" Display), and the second or third role of the same type is displayed. By performing the internal winning of the above in the second non-specified display (for example, the display of "?-?-?"), The internal winning of any combination may not be specified.

<Notification when a combination is established in the LMT state>
FIG. 94 (b) is a diagram showing an example of notification when a combination is established in the LMT state.

The game R50 is a game in which the number of remaining games in the high navigation state is 50 and the number of remaining games in the LMT state is 1. In this game R50, when a certain condition is satisfied (in this example, the pressing operation of the start lever 135 is accepted), the effect image display device 157 is used and the effect state is the LMT state. , ED effect (ending effect) corresponding to the LMT state is executed, and the operation navigation suggesting the stop operation of the push order combination (in this example, "2-1-3" in the same display mode as the operation navigation in the AT2 state. The total number of games in the LMT state is 20, and the number of remaining games in the LMT state (count value of the effect state counter) is 2. Therefore, the total number of games in the LMT state and the total number of games in the LMT state are displayed. A display including an image showing the number of remaining games (count value of the effect state counter) (in this example, an image including the characters "2/20 more" is displayed) is being executed.

Further, in this game R50, when a certain condition is satisfied (in this example, a certain time has elapsed after receiving the pressing operation of the start lever 135), the effect image display device 157 is used. While executing the identifiable display g1 (display of the watermelon symbol in this example) that can identify the internally won combination (for example, the watermelon of the small combination 3), the number of remaining games in the LMT state (effect state counter) Since the count value of (count value) is 1, a display including an image showing the number of games (count value of the effect state counter) (in this example, a display of an image including the characters “1/20”) is executed. ing.

Further, in this game R327, the identifiable display is erased when a certain condition is satisfied (in this example, the third stop operation is accepted). In this example, unlike the notification at the time of establishment of the winning combination in the AT2 state described with reference to FIG. 94A, it is shown that there is no AT addition (regulated).

In this example, after the second advantageous gaming state (AT2 state in this example) is completed, it is possible to shift to the fourth advantageous gaming state (judgment state or pullback state in this example). After the end of the three advantageous gaming states (LMT state in this example), it is configured to shift to the normal state (low navigation state in this example), and the effect in the second advantageous gaming state (this example). Then, the aspect of the AT2 effect) is different from the aspect of the effect (ED effect in this example) in the third advantageous game state, and the lottery result is the first in the third advantageous game state (LMT state). In the case of the combination of (in this example, the small combination 2 (watermelon 1)), the first notification (in this example, the display of the watermelon pattern) that can identify the first combination can be notified. If the lottery result is the first winning combination in the second advantageous gaming state (AT2 state), a second notification indicating that it is a chance (in this example, "!-!-!" Is displayed. ) Can be notified.

According to this example, since it is easy to understand the advantageous gaming state that can be expected, it is possible to make the player play the game with a sense of expectation. In addition, in the advantageous gaming state that can be expected, the player is made to play the game with a sense of expectation, and in the advantageous gaming state in the regulated state, the player is prevented from being missed and the advantageous state is comfortably ended without inciting the player. Can be made to.

The display mode of the identifiable display is not limited to this example, and for example, a character suggesting the name of the combination (for example, the character "Rep" suggesting replay and the character "watermelon" suggesting the small combination 3). ) May be displayed, or some or all of the symbol combinations corresponding to the winning combination may be displayed. Further, the display area, display position, display size, display timing, display mode after display, etc. of each display may be different between the non-specified display and the identifiable display.

<Specific example of correction of AT2 initial number of times>
Next, a specific example of the correction of the AT2 initial number of times described with reference to FIGS. 88 to 90 will be described.

<Specific example of correction of AT2 initial number of times / When performing correction>
FIG. 95 (a) is a diagram showing the flow of the effect when the AT2 initial number of times is corrected.
The game R120 is a game in which the number of remaining games in the high navigation state is 120 and the number of remaining games in the judge state is 0. In this game R120, in the judge state process B described with reference to FIG. 89A, after the AT2 initial number of times lottery is performed, it is determined by the correction condition determination that the correction condition is satisfied, and the AT2 initial number of times is corrected. ing. Specifically, the value (X) of the high navigation state counter at the time of determining the correction condition is 120, the AT2 initial number of times (Y) selected in the AT2 initial number of times lottery is 30, and "X (= 120) -Y". Since the correction condition of (= 30) <= 100 "is satisfied, Y (= 30) +20 = 50 is set as the AT2 correction value, and the LMT standby flag is set to on.

The game R119 is a game in which the number of remaining games in the high navigation state is 119 and the number of remaining games in the AT2 state shifted from the judge state is 50. In this game R119, in the AT2 state processing A described with reference to FIG. 88 (a), since the LMT standby flag is on, the AT number addition lottery 2 is performed, but in this example, the small winning combination 2 ( The watermelon 1) was internally elected, and 0G was selected as the number of AT additional games.

Further, in this game R119, the effect state is in the judge state by using the effect image display device 157 until a certain condition is satisfied (in this example, until the pressing operation of the start lever 135 is accepted (immediately after BET, etc.)). Since the transition from the to AT2 state to the AT2 state, the AT2 effect corresponding to the start of the AT2 state is started, and the number of remaining games (count value of the effect state counter) in the AT2 state before the update is 50. A display including an image showing a number (count value of the effect state counter) (in this example, a display of an image including the character "50G") is executed.

After that, when a certain condition is satisfied in this game R119 (in this example, the pressing operation of the start lever 135 is accepted), the effect state is the AT2 state by using the effect image display device 157. Therefore, since the AT2 effect corresponding to the AT2 state is executed and the number of games remaining in the AT2 state (count value of the effect state counter) is 49, an image showing the number of games (count value of the effect state counter). (In this example, the display of the image including the characters "LAST 49G") is being executed.

The game R69 is a game in which the number of remaining games in the high navigation state is 69 and the number of remaining games in the AT2 state is 0. In this game R69, in the AT2 state process B described with reference to FIG. 90, since the AT2 state is finished and the LMT standby flag is on, preparations are made to shift the effect state from the AT2 state to the LMT state. ing. Further, in this game R69, while executing the AT2 effect and the operation navigation in the same manner as in the games R119 to R70, a display including an image showing the remaining number of games in the AT2 state (count value of the effect state counter) is included. (In this example, the display of the image including the characters "LAST 0G") is being executed.

Further, in this game R69, when a certain condition is satisfied (in this example, the third stop operation is accepted), the effect image display device 157 is used to be the final game in the AT2 state. , The display of the AT2 end effect screen corresponding to the end of the AT2 state is executed, and the result display 1 (for example, the display of the number of acquired game media) in the AT2 state is executed, while the remaining number of games in the AT2 state (for example). The display including the image showing the effect state counter count value) (in this example, the display of the image including the characters "LAST 0G") and the display of the operation navigation are deleted. In this example, the result display 1 may be configured not to be displayed, or the result display 1 may be configured to be performed only when the AT2 initial number of times is not corrected.

In this example, since the AT2 initial number of times is corrected, the AT2 state and the LMT state can be seamlessly shifted (without going through other effect states).

<Specific example of correction of the initial number of AT2 / When displaying the number of remaining games in the AT2 state>
FIG. 95 (b) is a diagram showing the flow of the effect when the number of remaining games is displayed in the AT2 state.
The game R328 is a game in which the number of remaining games in the high navigation state is 328 and the number of remaining games in the AT2 state is 52. In this game R328, in the AT2 state processing A described with reference to FIG. 88 (a), since the LMT standby flag is off, the AT number addition lottery 1 is performed, but in this example, the small winning combination 2 ( The watermelon 1) was internally elected, and 50G was selected as the number of AT additional games.

Further, in this game R328, when a certain condition is satisfied (in this example, the pressing operation of the start lever 135 is accepted), the effect image display device 157 is used to execute and operate the AT2 effect. While executing the navigation, without displaying the image including the remaining number of games (count value of the effect state counter) in the AT2 state (in this example, the image including the characters "LAST 52G") is not displayed. As a false display (gase display), a display including an image showing the number of remaining games (2 in this example) before adding the number of AT added games (50 in this example) (in this example, "LAST 2G"). Display of images containing the characters "") is being executed.

The following game R327 is a game in which the number of remaining games in the high navigation state is 327 and the number of remaining games in the AT2 state is 51. In this game R327, when a certain condition is satisfied (in this example, the pressing operation of the start lever 135 is accepted), the effect image display device 157 is used to execute the AT2 effect in the same manner as in the game R328. While executing the operation navigation, the display including the image showing the remaining number of games (count value of the effect state counter) in the AT2 state (in this example, the display of the image including the characters "LAST 51G") is performed. Instead, as a fake display (gase display), a display including an image showing the remaining number of games (1 in this example) before adding the number of AT-added games (50 in this example) (in this example, 50). Displaying an image containing the characters "LAST 1G") is being executed.

Further, in this game R327, when a certain condition is satisfied (in this example, a certain time has passed from the pressing operation of the start lever 135), a display suggesting AT addition (in this example, " After performing the display of the characters "I'm still going on"), when another certain condition is met (in this example, the third stop operation is accepted), the number of AT-added games is displayed (display). In this example, the character "+ 50G" is displayed), and a display including an image showing the number of remaining games (count value of the production state counter) in the true (true) AT2 state (in this example, "LAST 51G") is displayed. Display of images containing the characters "") is being executed.

<Specific example of correction of AT2 initial number / When displaying the result for transition of AT2 state>
FIG. 96A is a diagram showing the flow of the effect when the result is displayed after the transition to the AT2 state.
The game R326 is a game in which the number of remaining games in the high navigation state is 326 and the number of remaining games in the AT2 state is 0. In this game R326, when a certain condition is satisfied (in this example, the pressing operation of the start lever 135 is accepted), the effect image display device 157 is used to use AT2 as in games R328 to R327. While executing the production and the operation navigation, the display including the image showing the remaining number of games in the AT2 state (count value of the production status counter) (in this example, the display of the image including the characters "LAST 0G"). ) Is being executed.

Further, in this game R326, when a certain condition is satisfied (in this example, the third stop operation is accepted), the effect image display device 157 is used to be the final game in the AT2 state. , While displaying the AT2 end effect screen corresponding to the end of the AT2 state, the result display 1 (for example, displaying the number of acquired game media) in the AT2 state is not executed.

The following game R325 is a game in which the number of remaining games in the high navigation state is 325 and the number of remaining games in the judge state shifted from the AT2 state is 9. In this game R325, the result display 1 in the AT2 state is displayed by using the effect image display device 157 until a certain condition is satisfied (in this example, until the pressing operation of the start lever 135 is accepted (immediately after BET, etc.)). For example, when a certain condition is satisfied (in this example, the pressing operation of the start lever 135 is accepted) by executing (displaying the number of acquired game media), the effect image display device 157 is used. An image showing the number of games (count value of the effect state counter) because the number of remaining games in the judge state (count value of the effect state counter) is 9 while starting the judge effect corresponding to the start of the judge state. (In this example, the display of the image including the characters "LAST 9G") is being executed.

<Specific example of correction of AT2 initial number / When the result is not displayed after the end of AT2 state>
FIG. 96 (b) is a diagram showing a flow of an effect when the result is not displayed after the end of the AT2 state, and is a diagram corresponding to FIG. 95 (a).
In the effect described with reference to FIG. 95 (a), in the game R69, the effect image display device 157 is used to display the AT2 end effect screen corresponding to the end of the AT2 state because it is the final game in the AT2 state. An example of executing the result display 1 in the AT2 state (for example, displaying the number of acquired game media) is shown, but in this example, in the same game R69, the AT2 end effect screen corresponding to the end of the AT2 state is shown. Is executed, but the result display 1 in the AT2 state (for example, the display of the number of acquired game media) is not executed.

According to this example, it is possible to seamlessly shift from the AT2 state to the LMT state (without going through other production states), and since the result is not displayed in the AT2 state at the time of the transition, the AT2 state is changed to the LMT state. It is possible to give a unified impression about the production in the high navigation state without making the player more aware of the transition of.

As described above, the game counter (for example, the slot machine 100 shown in FIG. 1) according to the present invention (hereinafter, may be referred to as “the present invention 2-1”) is shown in the operating means (for example, FIG. 1). Stop button 137 to 139), and shift to either a normal state (for example, the low navigation state shown in FIG. 6B) or an advantageous state (for example, the high navigation state shown in FIG. 6B). It is a game table provided with a control means (for example, the main control unit 300 shown in FIG. 3), and the operation information of the operation means (for example, the payout number display 127 shown in FIGS. 8 and 45) is used. Information capable of identifying the stop position and stop order of each reel of the operation navigation, the operation navigation using the effect image display device 157 shown in FIG. 52, etc.) can be notified, and the advantageous state is described in the above-mentioned advantageous state. It is a state that is more advantageous than the normal state with respect to notification of operation information, and is provided with a specific counter (for example, a high navigation state counter shown in FIGS. 18 and 52) related to the advantageous state, and the game is played in the advantageous state. Each time, the count value of the specific counter is configured to be updatable, and when a certain end condition is satisfied, the advantageous state is changed to the normal state, and the certain end is performed. The condition is a condition that is satisfied when the count value becomes the first specific value (for example, 0) (for example, when the number of games played after shifting to the advantageous state reaches the upper limit number of times). In the advantageous state, it is possible to shift to one of the plurality of advantageous gaming states, and the advantageous gaming state of one of the plurality of advantageous gaming states can notify the operation information. A certain advantageous gaming state (hereinafter, referred to as "second advantageous gaming state"; for example, the second advantageous gaming state shown in FIG. 97 and the AT2 state shown in FIG. 6B and the like). One of the advantageous gaming states is referred to as a certain advantageous gaming state (hereinafter, "third advantageous gaming state") different from the second advantageous gaming state in which the operation information can be notified. For example, the third advantageous gaming state shown in FIG. 97 and the LMT state shown in FIG. 6B and the like), and one of the plurality of advantageous gaming states is the second advantageous gaming state. A certain advantageous gaming state different from any of the state and the third advantageous gaming state (hereinafter, referred to as "fourth advantageous gaming state". For example, the fourth advantageous gaming state shown in FIG. 97 and FIG. 6B). The fourth advantageous gaming state is the second advantageous gaming state and the first advantageous gaming state. It is an advantageous gaming state that is more disadvantageous in terms of notification of the operation information than any of the advantageous gaming states of the three advantageous gaming states, and in the third advantageous gaming state, the count value is a second specific value (for example, 19). ), Which is a gaming state in which the player can shift from the second advantageous gaming state and can stay until the count value reaches the first specific value. The specific value and the second specific value are different values, and are configured to be able to shift to the fourth advantageous gaming state after the second advantageous gaming state is completed, and the third advantageous gaming state is possible. After the advantageous gaming state is completed, it is configured to shift to the normal state, and the effect in the second advantageous game state (for example, AT2 effect ad2 shown in FIG. 97, AT2 effect shown in FIG. 92, etc.). The aspect of the game table is different from the aspect of the effect in the third advantageous gaming state (for example, the ED effect ed1 shown in FIG. 97 and the ED effect shown in FIG. 92 and the like). is there. Note that FIG. 97 is a diagram showing an outline of Invention 2-1 of the present application.

According to the gaming table according to the invention 2-1 of the present application, since it is easy to understand the expected advantageous gaming state, it is possible to make the player play the game with a sense of expectation.

The advantageous gaming state of one of the plurality of advantageous gaming states is a certain advantageous gaming state different from any of the second advantageous gaming state and the third advantageous gaming state in which the operation information can be notified. (Hereinafter, referred to as "first advantageous gaming state"), and the first advantageous gaming state is more disadvantageous than the second advantageous gaming state in terms of notification of the operation information. Good.

Further, the game console (for example, the slot machine 100 shown in FIG. 1) according to the present invention (hereinafter, may be referred to as “the present invention 2-2”) is operated by the operating means (for example, the stop button 137 to shown in FIG. 139) and the control means (for example, a control means for shifting to either a normal state (for example, the low navigation state shown in FIG. 6B) or an advantageous state (for example, the high navigation state shown in FIG. 6B). For example, an operation navigation system using the main control unit 300 shown in FIG. 3) and operation information of the operating means (for example, the payout number display 127 shown in FIGS. 8 and 45). Information that can identify the stop position and stop order of each reel of the operation navigation using the effect image display device 157 shown in 52 or the like) can be notified, and the advantageous state is the notification of the operation information. It is a state more advantageous than the normal state, and is provided with a specific counter (for example, a high navigation state counter shown in FIGS. 18 and 52) related to the advantageous state, and each time a game is played in the advantageous state, the said It is configured so that the count value of a specific counter can be updated, and when a certain end condition is satisfied, it is configured to shift from the advantageous state to the normal state, and the certain end condition is the said. It is a condition that is satisfied when the count value becomes the first specific value (for example, 0) (for example, when the number of games played after shifting to the advantageous state reaches the upper limit number), and in the advantageous state. , It is configured to be able to shift to any advantageous gaming state among the plurality of advantageous gaming states, and the advantageous gaming state of one of the plurality of advantageous gaming states is a certain advantage capable of notifying the operation information. It is a gaming state (hereinafter, referred to as “first advantageous gaming state”; for example, the first advantageous gaming state shown in FIG. 98 and the AT1 state shown in FIG. 6B and the like), and the plurality of advantageous gaming states. One of the advantageous gaming states is a certain advantageous gaming state different from the first advantageous gaming state (hereinafter, referred to as "second advantageous gaming state") capable of notifying the operation information (for example, FIG. 98. The second advantageous gaming state shown in the above and the AT2 state shown in FIG. 6B and the like), and the advantageous gaming state of one of the plurality of advantageous gaming states can notify the operation information. A certain advantageous gaming state different from both one advantageous gaming state and the second advantageous gaming state (hereinafter, referred to as "third advantageous gaming state"; the third advantageous gaming state shown in FIG. 98 and FIG. 6 ( b) and the like (LMT state), and the advantageous gaming state of one of the plurality of advantageous gaming states is the said first. A certain advantageous gaming state (hereinafter, referred to as "fourth advantageous gaming state") that is different from any of the one advantageous gaming state, the second advantageous gaming state, and the third advantageous gaming state. The fourth advantageous gaming state shown in FIG. 98 and the pulling back state shown in FIG. 6B and the like), and the fourth advantageous gaming state is the first advantageous gaming state and the second advantageous gaming state. And the advantageous gaming state which is more disadvantageous in terms of notification of the operation information than any of the advantageous gaming states of the third advantageous gaming state, and in the third advantageous gaming state, the count value is the second specific value ( For example, in the case of 19), it is a gaming state in which the transition from the second advantageous gaming state can be made, and the gaming state in which the count value can stay until the first specific value is reached. One specific value and the second specific value are different values, and after the second advantageous gaming state is completed, the fourth advantageous gaming state can be shifted to, and the first advantageous gaming state is configured. After the three advantageous gaming states are completed, the normal state is configured to shift to the normal state, and the effects in the second advantageous gaming state (for example, the AT2 effect ad2 shown in FIG. 98 and the AT2 shown in FIG. 92 and the like). The aspect of the effect) is different from the aspect of the effect in the third advantageous gaming state (for example, the ED effect ed1 shown in FIG. 98, the ED effect shown in FIG. 92, etc.), and the first advantageous game The second advantageous gaming state is a more advantageous gaming state than the state, and when the fourth advantageous gaming state shifts to a gaming state in which the operation information can be notified, the second advantageous gaming state is performed. It is configured to shift to the state, and when shifting from the state after the third advantageous gaming state to the gaming state in which the operation information can be notified, the transition to the first advantageous gaming state is performed. It is a game table characterized by being configured to do so. Note that FIG. 98 is a diagram showing an outline of Invention 2-2 of the present application.

According to the gaming table according to the invention 2-2 of the present application, since it is easy to understand the expected advantageous gaming state, it is possible to make the player play the game with a sense of expectation. In addition, it is possible to have expectations even after the end of a promising advantageous gaming state.

Further, the game counter (for example, the slot machine 100 shown in FIG. 1) according to the present invention (hereinafter, may be referred to as “the present invention 2-3”) has an operating means (for example, the stop button 137 to shown in FIG. 1). A control means (for example, a control means for shifting to either a normal state (for example, a low navigation state shown in FIG. 6B) or an advantageous state (for example, a high navigation state shown in FIG. 6B). For example, in a game table provided with a main control unit 300 (shown in FIG. 3), an operation navigation using the operation information of the operation means (for example, the payout number display 127 shown in FIGS. 8 and 45), FIG. Information that can identify the stop position and stop order of each reel, such as the operation navigation using the effect image display device 157 shown in 52 and the like) can be notified, and the advantageous state is the notification of the operation information. It is a state more advantageous than the normal state, and is provided with a specific counter (for example, a high navigation state counter shown in FIGS. 18 and 52) related to the advantageous state, and each time a game is played in the advantageous state, the said The count value of a specific counter is configured to be updatable, and when a certain end condition is satisfied, it is configured to shift from the advantageous state to the normal state, and the certain end condition is the said. It is a condition that is satisfied when the count value becomes the first specific value (for example, 0) (for example, when the number of games played after shifting to the advantageous state reaches the upper limit number), and in the advantageous state. , It is configured to be able to shift to any advantageous gaming state among the plurality of advantageous gaming states, and the advantageous gaming state of one of the plurality of advantageous gaming states is a certain advantage capable of notifying the operation information. It is a gaming state (hereinafter referred to as "second advantageous gaming state"; for example, the second advantageous gaming state shown in FIG. 99 and the AT2 state shown in FIG. 6B and the like), and the plurality of advantageous gaming states. One of the advantageous gaming states is a certain advantageous gaming state different from the second advantageous gaming state (hereinafter, referred to as a "third advantageous gaming state", in which the operation information can be notified, for example, FIG. 99. The third advantageous gaming state shown in FIG. 6 and the LMT state shown in FIG. 6B and the like), and one of the plurality of advantageous gaming states is the second advantageous gaming state and the first advantageous gaming state. A certain advantageous gaming state different from any of the three advantageous gaming states (hereinafter, referred to as "fourth advantageous gaming state". For example, the fourth advantageous gaming state shown in FIG. 99, the pullback shown in FIG. 6B, etc. State), and the fourth advantageous gaming state is the second advantageous gaming state and the third advantageous gaming state. It is an advantageous gaming state that is more disadvantageous with respect to the notification of the operation information than any of the advantageous gaming states of the state, and in the third advantageous gaming state, the count value becomes a second specific value (for example, 19). In this case, it is a gaming state that can be shifted from the second advantageous gaming state, and is an advantageous gaming state that can stay until the count value reaches the first specific value, and is the same as the first specific value. The second specific value is another value, and is configured to be able to shift to the fourth advantageous gaming state after the end of the second advantageous gaming state, and the third advantageous gaming state is After the end, the mode is configured to shift to the normal state, and the mode of the effect in the second advantageous gaming state (for example, AT2 effect ad2 shown in FIG. 99, AT2 effect shown in FIG. 92, etc.) The mode is different from the mode of the effect in the third advantageous game state (for example, the ED effect ed1 shown in FIG. 99, the ED effect shown in FIG. 92, etc.), and the lottery result is obtained in the third advantageous game state. In the case of the first combination (for example, the small combination 2 (watermelon 1) shown in FIG. 5), the first notification that can identify the first combination (for example, the second image g1 shown in FIG. 99) or , The identifiable display g1 (display of the watermelon symbol) shown in FIG. 94 (b)) can be notified, and when the lottery result is the first combination in the second advantageous gaming state. , A second notification indicating that it is a chance (for example, a second image g2 shown in FIG. 99 and an unspecified display g2 shown in FIG. 94 (a) (“! -! -! It is a game table characterized in that it is configured to be able to notify (display))). Note that FIG. 99 is a diagram showing an outline of the present invention 2-3.

According to the gaming table according to the invention 2-3 of the present application, since it is easy to understand the expected advantageous gaming state, it is possible to make the player play the game with a sense of expectation. In addition, in the advantageous gaming state that can be expected, the player is made to play the game with a sense of expectation, and in the advantageous gaming state in the regulated state, the player is prevented from being missed and the advantageous state is comfortably ended without inciting the player. Can be made to.

The game console according to the inventions 2-1 to 2-3 of the present application is not limited to the configuration of the slot machine according to the present embodiment. Therefore, for example, when the lottery process for the internal winning of the winning combination is performed and the lottery result is determined (for example, the winning winning combination internal lottery process shown in FIG. 10) is provided and the lottery result is the first winning combination, or The notification is configured to be noticeable, and the certain notification mode in the third advantageous gaming state may be different from the certain notification mode in the second advantageous gaming state. ..

Further, when the lottery result is the second combination (for example, the small combination 4 (bell) shown in FIG. 5A or FIG. 7), the operation information can be notified, and the third combination can be notified. The mode of notifying the operation information of the second combination in the advantageous gaming state may be the same as the mode of notifying the operation information of the second combination in the second advantageous gaming state.

With such a configuration, since the operation navigation mode does not change depending on the type of advantageous gaming state, it is possible to prevent the push order combination from being missed and to maintain the player's willingness to play. In addition, since it is easy to understand the advantageous gaming state that can be expected, it is possible to give the player a sense of expectation and play the game.

The operation information may be information that can identify the stop position and stop order of each reel that can display the combination of symbols related to the second combination.

Further, in the second advantageous gaming state, the number of remaining games in the second advantageous gaming state can be increased, and in the third advantageous gaming state, in the third advantageous gaming state. It may be configured so that the number of remaining games is not increased.

With such a configuration, in the advantageous gaming state of the regulated state, the advantageous state can be comfortably ended without inciting the player more than necessary. In addition, since it is easy to understand the advantageous gaming state that can be expected, it is possible to give the player a sense of expectation and play the game.

In addition, it is configured so that a display indicating that the number of remaining games in the second advantageous game state increases may be displayed, and the number of remaining games in the third advantageous game state increases. It may be configured so that the display indicating is not performed.

Further, when the second advantageous gaming state ends, a certain end display (for example, the AT end screen suggesting the end of the AT2 state shown in FIG. 92 or the like) can be displayed. A process for restricting the transition to the third advantageous gaming state after the transition to the second advantageous gaming state and before the certain end display related to the second advantageous gaming state is displayed. (For example, the process using the LMT standby flag described with reference to FIGS. 88 to 91) may be configured to be executable.

With such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the situation where the profit in the expected advantageous gaming state cannot be taken out, satisfy the player's satisfaction, and as a result, give the player a sense of expectation. It becomes possible. In addition, since it is easy to understand the advantageous gaming state that can be expected, it is possible to give the player a sense of expectation and play the game.

Further, when shifting to the third advantageous gaming state, a certain freeze effect may be enabled to be executed.

With such a configuration, it is easy to understand an advantageous gaming state that should not be expected, so that it is possible to give an opportunity for the player to switch feelings. In addition, since it is easy to understand the advantageous gaming state that can be expected, it is possible to give the player a sense of expectation and play the game.

Further, the initial remaining number of games in the second advantageous game state is variable (for example, a game corrected by the number of games determined by the AT2 initial number lottery in FIG. 89 (a) and the number of games shown in FIG. 89 (b). The number of times), and the initial number of remaining games in the third advantageous gaming state may be fixed (for example, 20G).

With such a configuration, it is possible to comfortably end the advantageous state without being agitated in the advantageous gaming state of the regulated state. In addition, since it is easy to understand the advantageous gaming state that can be expected, it is possible to give the player a sense of expectation and play the game.

Further, in the second advantageous game state, a display showing the number of times less than the actual number of remaining games in the second advantageous game state (for example, a display showing the number of remaining games as shown in FIG. 95 (b) and the like). (False display)) is configured to be displayed, and in the third advantageous game state, a display indicating the number of times less than the actual number of remaining games in the third advantageous game state. May be configured so that is not displayed.

With such a configuration, it is possible to comfortably end the advantageous state without being agitated in the advantageous gaming state of the regulated state. In addition, since it is easy to understand the advantageous gaming state that can be expected, it is possible to give the player a sense of expectation and play the game.

Further, in one of the advantageous states, after the third advantageous gaming state is completed, the fourth advantageous gaming state (for example, the pullback state) may not be changed.

Further, a first game in which the number of bets on the game medium is the first number (for example, a three-card bet game) and a second game in which the number of bets on the game medium is the second number (for example, a two-card bet). The second number is different from the first number, and the first game is more advantageous to the player than the second game. It is a game, and may be configured so that when the second game is played, the transition to the second advantageous game state is not started.

With such a configuration, the player can easily grasp whether the game is played in the first game or the second game depending on whether or not the game shifts to the second advantageous game state. It is possible, and it may be possible to notice that the first game is more advantageous to the player than the second game.

Further, when the fourth advantageous gaming state does not shift to the advantageous gaming state in which the operation information can be notified, the normal state may be configured to be able to shift.

Further, the above-mentioned "the second advantageous gaming state is a more advantageous gaming state than the first advantageous gaming state" means "acquisition of the gaming medium in the first advantageous gaming state." The expected value of acquisition of the game medium in the second advantageous gaming state is higher than the expected value. "

Further, the above-mentioned "the fourth advantageous gaming state is a notification of the operation information rather than any of the advantageous gaming states of the first advantageous gaming state, the second advantageous gaming state, and the third advantageous gaming state." "The fourth advantageous gaming state is an advantage of any of the first advantageous gaming state, the second advantageous gaming state, and the third advantageous gaming state." The frequency of notification of the operation information is lower than that of the game state, or the operation information is not notified in an advantageous gaming state. "

[Embodiment 3]
Hereinafter, the slot machine according to the third embodiment of the present invention will be described in detail with reference to the drawings.
In addition, in order to avoid duplicate explanations, in principle, only the configuration different from the game console according to the first and second embodiments will be described. In principle, FIGS. 100 to 107 are used only for the description of the third embodiment, and even when overlapping reference numerals are shown in other drawings, FIGS. 100 to 107 are shown in the description of the third embodiment. The code shown in 107 has priority.

<Various operations>
First, various operations possible in the slot machine according to the third embodiment will be described.
The slot machine according to the third embodiment includes the start lever 135, the stop buttons 137 to 139, the bet buttons 130 to 132, the medal return button 133, the settlement button 134, and the cross key 192 shown in FIG. 101, which are described with reference to FIG. It also has operating means such as the PUSH button 194 shown in FIG. 102, and various operations can be performed by these operating means. Further, in addition to various operations by these operation means, a medal insertion operation or the like by inserting a medal from the medal insertion port 141 is also possible.

In the following, the operation by the start lever 135 may be referred to as "lever operation", the operation by the PUSH button 194 may be referred to as "PUSH button operation", and the operation by the cross key 192 may be referred to as "cross key operation".

<State transition of various operations>
Next, an example of the state transition of various operations will be described with reference to FIG. 100. FIG. 100 is a diagram showing state transitions of PUSH button operation, cross key operation, closing operation, and lever operation.

The state indicated by "◯" in FIG. 100 is a state in which acceptance of various operations is valid, and the state indicated by "x" in FIG. 100 is a state in which acceptance of various operations is invalid. The slot machine according to the third embodiment is configured to determine whether various operations are valid or invalid according to the state transitions shown in the figure, and when the operations are valid, perform the corresponding display.

For example, when the previous game is non-replay, the selection screen is displayed (or hidden), and the setting screen is hidden, the operation with the cross key 192 corresponding to the "call setting screen" is effective. , When the operation is accepted, the display of the setting screen is started (calling the setting screen), but since the PUSH button operation, the closing operation, and the lever operation are invalid, even if the operation is performed. , The display of the setting screen does not start (the setting screen is not called).

In addition, when the previous game is non-replay, the selection screen is hidden, and the setting screen is hidden, the input operation corresponding to "AT2 type determination" is effective, so when the operation is accepted. Determines the character of the AT2 effect (AT2 type determination), which will be described later. However, since the PUSH button operation, the cross key operation, and the lever operation are invalid, even if the operation is performed, the character of the AT2 effect is determined. No decision (AT2 type decision) is made.

On the other hand, when the previous game is non-replay, the selection screen is displayed, and the setting screen is hidden, the PUSH button operation is also effective in addition to the input operation corresponding to "AT2 type determination". Even when the button operation is accepted, the character of the AT2 effect is determined (AT2 type determination).

In addition, when the previous game is non-replay, the selection screen is hidden, and the setting screen is displayed, all of the PUSH button operation, the cross key operation, the input operation, and the lever operation corresponding to "AT2 type determination" are performed. Since it is invalid, the character cannot be determined, but since it is valid except for the lever operation corresponding to the "AT2 type selection screen display", it is possible to select the character by an operation other than the lever operation.

In addition, when the previous game is replayed, the selection screen is hidden, and the setting screen is hidden, the lever operation corresponding to "AT2 type determination" is effective, so when the operation is accepted, , The character of the AT2 effect is determined (AT2 type determination), but since the PUSH button operation, the cross key operation, and the input operation are invalid, the character of the AT2 effect is determined (AT2) even if the operation is performed. Type determination) is not performed.

On the other hand, when the previous game is replayed, the selection screen is displayed, and the setting screen is not displayed, the PUSH button operation is effective in addition to the input operation corresponding to "AT2 type determination", so that the PUSU button is enabled. Even when the operation is accepted, the character of the AT2 effect is determined (AT2 type determination). In these cases, the input operation is invalid, but the input operation may be enabled, and when the operation is accepted, the character of the AT2 effect may be determined (AT2 type determination).

<Specific examples of various operations>
Next, specific examples of various operations including PUSH button operation, cross key operation, closing operation, and lever operation will be described with reference to FIGS. 101 to 104.
FIG. 101 (A) is a diagram showing an example of various operations for switching the display between the normal screen and the demo screen in chronological order.
In this example, when the normal screen is displayed by using the effect image display device 157 and the operation of the decision button 192a of the cross key 192 is received, the display of the setting screen is started. Here, the setting screen is a screen for making various settings related to the slot machine (for example, adjusting the volume, adjusting the amount of light, displaying model information, etc.).

The conditions for starting the display of the setting screen are not particularly limited, but in this example, the display of the setting screen is started and the game is in progress only when the operation of the enter button 192a of the cross key 192 is accepted during the non-game. When the operation of the enter button 192a of the cross key 192 is accepted, the display of the setting screen is not started.

When the operation of the enter button 192a of the cross key 192 is accepted while the setting screen is being displayed, the display of the demo screen is started. Here, the demo screen is a screen mainly displayed during non-game, for example, a screen for introducing a new model or displaying an advertisement / advertisement of a game store. When the operation of inserting a medal into the medal insertion slot 141 is accepted while the demo screen is being displayed, the display of the normal screen is started (the demo screen returns to the normal screen).

FIG. 101 (B) is a diagram showing an example of various operations in the case of performing volume adjustment using the setting screen in chronological order.
In this example, when the normal screen is displayed by using the effect image display device 157 and the operation of the decision button 192a of the cross key 192 is received, the display of the setting screen is started. When the operation of the up button 192b (or down button 192c) of the cross key 192 is accepted while the setting screen is displayed, the cursor (arrow) displayed on the setting screen moves upward (or downward). In this example, since the operation of the upper button 192b is accepted on the setting screen, the cursor is moved upward to the volume adjustment position.

When you move the cursor to a certain menu, the submenu corresponding to the cursor starts to be displayed. In this example, since the cursor has been moved to the volume adjustment position, the display of the volume adjustment screen corresponding to the volume adjustment is started. When the operation of the right button 192d (or the left button 192e) of the cross key 192 is received while the volume adjustment screen is displayed, the volume can be adjusted and the adjusted volume is displayed by the volume meter. .. In this example, since the operation of the right button 192d is accepted once on the volume adjustment screen, the volume is raised by one step (in this example, the volume is raised from level 3 to level 4 in five levels of levels 1 to 5). ), And the adjusted volume (level 4) is displayed by the volume meter.

Further, when the operation of the enter button 192a of the cross key 192 is accepted while the volume adjustment screen is being displayed, the volume adjustment is ended and the screen returns to the setting screen. In this example, since the operation of the enter button 192a is accepted after adjusting the volume, the volume adjustment is finished and the display of the volume adjustment screen is switched to the display of the setting screen. Further, since the operation of the lower button 192c on the setting screen is subsequently accepted, the cursor is moved downward to the "return" position. The subsequent operations and displays are the same as the examples described with reference to FIG. 101 (A).

FIG. 101 (C) is a diagram showing in chronological order an example of various operations when adjusting the volume without displaying the setting screen.
In this example, when the normal screen is displayed by using the effect image display device 157 and the operation of the right button 192d (or the left button 192e) of the cross key 192 is received, the display of the volume adjustment screen is started.

The conditions for starting the display of the volume adjustment screen are not particularly limited, but in this example, the volume adjustment screen is displayed only when the operation of the right button 192d (or the left button 192e) of the cross key 192 is accepted during non-game. Is started, and when the operation of the right button 192d (or the left button 192e) of the cross key 192 is accepted during the game, the display of the volume adjustment screen is not started.

When the operation of the right button 192d (or the left button 192e) of the cross key 192 is received while the volume adjustment screen is displayed, the volume can be adjusted and the adjusted volume is displayed by the volume meter. The points are the same as the example described with reference to FIG. 101 (B). Further, when the operation of the decision button 192a of the cross key 192 is received while the volume adjustment screen is being displayed, the volume adjustment is terminated and the screen returns to the volume adjustment end screen indicating that the volume has been determined. Further, when the operation of the enter button 192a of the cross key 192 is accepted during the display of the volume adjustment end screen, the display of the demo screen is started.

FIGS. 101 (D) and 101 (E) are diagrams showing examples of various other operations in chronological order.
In the example described with reference to FIG. 101 (A), when the operation of inserting a medal into the medal insertion slot 141 is accepted while the demo screen is being displayed, the display of the normal screen is started (returns from the demo screen to the normal screen). ) An example is shown, but as shown in FIG. 101 (D), when the operation of inserting a medal into the medal insertion slot 141 is accepted during the display of the setting screen, the display of the normal screen is started (normally from the demo screen). It may be configured to return to the screen).

Further, in the example described with reference to FIG. 101 (B), when the operation of inserting a medal into the medal insertion slot 141 is received during the display of the demo screen after adjusting the volume, the display of the normal screen is started (demo screen). As shown in FIG. 101 (E), when the operation of inserting a medal into the medal insertion slot 141 is accepted during the display of the volume adjustment screen, the display of the normal screen is displayed. It may be configured to start (return from the demo screen to the normal screen). In this case, if the input operation is accepted after the volume adjustment end screen is displayed, the volume may not be adjusted because the volume has not been determined, or the volume adjustment end screen may be configured. Even before the display of (even before the volume is determined), the volume may be adjusted with the volume displayed on the volume adjustment screen at the time of the on operation.

<Specific example of character select operation>
Next, a specific example of the character select operation (hereinafter, may be referred to as “character selection operation”) will be described with reference to FIGS. 102 to 105.
Here, the character select operation is an operation for selecting a character to appear in various effects according to the preference of the player, and in the slot machine according to the third embodiment, the character select operation is performed by the above-mentioned various operations. It can be performed.

<Specific example of character select operation / Example in which a character cannot be selected at the player's will>
FIG. 102 is a diagram showing the character selection operation when the effect state shifts from the judge state to the AT2 state in the high navigation state in chronological order, and FIG. 102 (A) shows Example 1 of the character selection operation in chronological order. It is a figure shown.

In this example, since the operation of the PUSH button 194 is accepted while the AT2 confirmation display screen indicating that the transition to the AT2 state is confirmed is displayed, the display of the character selection operation screen for performing the character selection operation in the AT2 state is displayed. It has started. The display mode of this character selection operation screen is not particularly limited, but in this example, it is configured so that the player can select a favorite character from the three types of characters A, B, and C, and the first character selection operation screen is displayed. In the display (default) of, the character A is temporarily selected.

When the operation of the PUSH button 194 is accepted while the character selection operation screen is displayed, the operation becomes a character determination operation, and the character temporarily selected on the character selection operation screen becomes a character appearing in the AT2 effect executed in the AT2 state. It is determined. As a result, in the AT2 state, the effect by the character determined by the player is started.

In this example, since the character A is temporarily selected on the character selection operation screen, the character appearing in the AT2 effect is determined to be the character A by the character determination operation, and the AT2 effect by the character A is started. Subsequently, the throwing operation (or BET operation) is performed with the AT2 effect started, and when the pressing operation of the start lever 135 is accepted, the first game in the AT2 state is started.

FIG. 102 (B) is a diagram showing Example 2 of the character selection operation in chronological order.
In this example, since the input operation is accepted while the AT2 confirmation display screen is displayed, the default character is displayed without displaying the character selection operation screen (without giving the player an opportunity to select a favorite character). AT2 production by A has started.

FIG. 102 (C) is a diagram showing Example 3 of the character selection operation in chronological order.
In this example, since the operation of the PUSH button 194 was accepted while the AT2 confirmation display screen was being displayed, the character selection operation screen was started to be displayed, but the input operation was accepted while the character selection operation screen was being displayed. Therefore, the AT2 effect by the default character A is started without selecting a character on the character selection operation screen (without giving the player an opportunity to select a favorite character).

FIG. 102 (D) is a diagram showing Example 4 of the character selection operation in chronological order. In this example, the volume adjustment screen is displayed because the right button 192d of the cross key 192 is accepted while the AT2 confirmation display screen is displayed. However, the input operation is accepted while the volume adjustment screen is displayed. Therefore, the AT2 effect by the default character A is started without displaying the character selection operation screen (without giving the player an opportunity to select a favorite character).

<Specific example of character select operation / Example in which a character can be selected at the player's will>
FIG. 103 (A) is a diagram showing Example 5 of the character selection operation in chronological order. In this example, since the operation of the PUSH button 194 is accepted while the AT2 confirmation display screen is being displayed, the display of the character selection operation screen cd1 is started, and the right button of the cross key 192 is displayed while the character selection operation screen cd1 is being displayed. Since 192d has been accepted, the volume adjustment screen sd1 is displayed. Further, in this example, since the input operation is accepted while the volume adjustment screen sd1 is displayed, when the input operation is accepted while the character selection operation screen cd1 is displayed after the character selection operation screen cd1 is redisplayed. Even so, the input operation is not accepted as a character determination operation (the character is not selected against the player's intention), and the display of the character selection operation screen cd1 is maintained.

Then, when the pressing operation (lever operation) of the start lever 135 is received while the character selection operation screen cd1 is being displayed, the character that notifies that the character (character A in this example) to appear in the AT2 effect has been determined. After displaying the decision screen ed1, the AT2 effect in which the character appears is started.

FIG. 103 (B) is a diagram showing Example 6 of the character selection operation in chronological order.
In this example, the flow until the character selection operation screen cd1 is redisplayed after the volume adjustment screen sd1 is displayed is the same as the example described with reference to FIG. 103 (A), but the character selection operation screen cd1 after the redisplay is displayed. Since the operation of the PUSH button 194, that is, the character determination operation is accepted during the display, the character appearing in the AT2 effect is determined to be the character A temporarily selected on the character selection operation screen, and is made to appear in the AT2 effect. After displaying the character determination screen ed1 that notifies that the character (character A in this example) has been determined, the AT2 effect in which the character appears is started.

In the examples shown in FIGS. 104 (A) to 104 (C), the PUSH button 194 is configured to emit light, and the PUSH button 194 is configured to emit light when the character selection operation screen can be displayed. doing.

FIG. 104 (A) is a diagram showing Example 6 of the character selection operation in chronological order.
In this example, since the character selection operation screen can be displayed while the AT2 confirmation display screen is being displayed, the non-emission PUSH button 194 that has been turned off is made to emit light, and the operation of the PUSH button 194 (character selection operation). When the screen call operation) is accepted, the display of the character selection operation screen is started. Further, since the character selection operation screen can be displayed even while the character selection operation screen is being displayed, when the PUSH button 194 is made to emit light and the operation (character determination operation) of the PUSH button 194 is accepted, The character appearing in the AT2 effect is determined to be the character A tentatively selected on the character selection operation screen, and the AT2 effect by the character A is started. Further, during this AT2 production, since the character selection operation screen cannot be displayed, the PUSH button 194 is turned off.

FIG. 104 (B) is a diagram showing Example 7 of the character selection operation in chronological order.
In this example, since the character selection operation screen cannot be displayed while the volume adjustment screen is being displayed and the demo screen is being displayed, the PUSH button 194 is turned off. In this example, the volume adjustment end screen is displayed when the enter button 192a of the cross key 192 is received while the volume adjustment screen is displayed. For example, the volume adjustment screen is displayed for a certain period of time (for example, 10). Seconds) may elapse, and the display of the volume adjustment end screen may be started.

FIG. 104 (C) is a diagram showing Example 8 of the character selection operation in chronological order.
In this example, the flow until the volume adjustment end screen is displayed is the same as the example described with reference to FIG. 104 (B), but when the operation of the PUSH button 194 (not shown) is accepted, the AT2 confirmation display screen is displayed. Is displayed again, and since the character selection operation screen can be displayed during the display, the non-light emitting push button 194, which has been turned off, is made to emit light.

<Specific example / modification of character select operation>
FIG. 105 (A) is a diagram showing a modified example 1 of the character selection operation in chronological order.
In this example, after the character selection operation screen is displayed, the selection decision effect for notifying the information of the character selected on the character selection operation screen (character A in this example) is performed. With such a configuration, the player can confirm whether or not the desired character is selected before the production is started, and the player's interest may be enhanced.

FIG. 105 (B) is a diagram showing a modified example 2 of the character selection operation in chronological order.
In this example, since the input operation is accepted while the screen other than the character selection operation screen is displayed, the default character selection operation screen is not displayed (the player is not given the opportunity to select a favorite character). Since the AT2 effect by the character A has been started, the selection decision effect is not performed. With such a configuration, the disappointment of the player may be reduced even if the player is not given the opportunity to select a favorite character.

As described above, the game console (for example, the slot machine 100 shown in FIG. 1) according to the present invention (hereinafter, may be referred to as “the present invention 3-1”) is a display capable of displaying a plurality of types of displays. A game table provided with means, the game table is a slot machine, and the display of one of the plurality of types of displays is a display prompting an operation for the first decision (hereinafter, "first display"). For example, the first display d1 shown in FIG. 106 and the character selection operation screen cd1) shown in FIG. 103 (A), and the display of one of the plurality of types of displays is an operation for the second determination. (Hereinafter referred to as “second display”; for example, the second display d2 shown in FIG. 106 and the volume adjustment screen sd1 shown in FIG. 103 (A)), and the first display is displayed. In this state, any of the first operations (for example, a certain operation h1 shown in FIG. 106, a closing operation shown in FIG. 103 (A), an operation of the PUSH button 194, and an operation of a plurality of buttons included in the cross key 192. When the operation or a plurality of operations among these operations is performed, the decision regarding the first decision (for example, selection of a character to appear in a certain effect) is configured to be feasible. The second display can be started to be displayed in the state where the first display is displayed, and the decision regarding the first decision is executed after the first display is started to be displayed. Even if the first operation is performed in the state where the second display is displayed (hereinafter, referred to as "first state") in which the display is started before, the first determination is made. It is a game console characterized in that it is configured so that decisions regarding. Note that FIG. 106 is a diagram showing an outline of Invention 3-1 of the present application.

According to the game console according to the invention 3-1 of the present application, it is possible to carefully make a decision regarding the previous decision (decision regarding the first decision). Also, after the second display, there is a risk of forgetting the contents of the first display, and the decision regarding the first display is not intended by the player (for example, it is first made at the start of the game). There are cases where it is inadvertently determined by an operation (inserting a medal into the insertion slot, pressing the insertion button), but prevent such an unintended operation of the player and prevent the player from losing his or her motivation to play. Is possible.

The game console according to the invention 3-1 of the present application is not limited to the configuration of the slot machine according to the present embodiment. Therefore, for example, when the first operation is performed in the first state, the display of the second display ends, and even if the first operation is performed after the display of the second display ends. It may be configured so that the decision regarding the first decision is not executed.

With such a configuration, it is possible to carefully make a decision regarding the earlier decision (decision regarding the first decision) even after the display of the operation display for the later decision is finished. This is because, after the second display, the previously displayed content (the content of the first display) may be forgotten, for example, the decision operation regarding the second display and the decision regarding the first display. If the operations are the same, an unintended decision may be made by repeatedly performing a decision operation (for example, a continuous hit operation). Also, even if the decision operation for the second display and the decision operation for the first display are not the same, it is not intended if the decision operation for the first display is inadvertently performed after the display of the second display. Decisions may be made. According to the present invention, it is possible to prevent such an unintended operation of the player and prevent the player from losing his or her willingness to play.

When the first operation is performed in the first state, the display of the second display ends, and after the display of the second display ends, the first display is performed during the first display. It may be configured so that the decision regarding the first decision is not executed even if the operation of is performed.

Further, when the first operation is performed in the first state, the display of the second display ends, and even if the first operation is performed after the display of the second display ends, the first operation is performed. The decision regarding one decision is not executed, but when the second operation is performed, the decision regarding the first decision is made feasible, and the first operation and the second operation are different operations. There may be.

With such a configuration, it is possible to give the player a sense of discomfort and make the decision regarding the previous decision (decision regarding the first decision) carefully. It can also give the player a sense of discomfort and save time, while reminding him of the first display. In addition, since the decision regarding the previous decision (decision regarding the first decision) may be made by the lever operation following the throwing operation, it is possible to provide a smooth decision method to the player who is accustomed to the game. it can. In addition, it is possible to prevent unintended operations of the player and prevent the player from losing his or her willingness to play.

When the first operation is performed in the first state, the display of the second display ends, and after the display of the second display ends, the first display is performed during the first display. Is performed, the decision regarding the first decision is not executed, but when a certain operation different from the first operation (hereinafter, referred to as "second operation") is performed, the first operation is performed. Decisions regarding one decision may be configured to be viable.

Further, when the operation means (for example, the PUSH button 194 shown in FIG. 103 (B) or the like) that may be used for the effect is provided and the operation means is operated while the first display is displayed. , The decision regarding the first decision is feasibly configured, and when the first operation is performed in the first state, the display of the second display ends and the display of the second display ends. When the operation of the operating means is performed after the end, the decision regarding the first decision may be configured to be feasible.

With such a configuration, it is possible to execute the decision regarding the first decision without being influenced by the display state by the operating means that may be used for the effect. In addition, since stable decisions can be made with the operating means that may be used for the production, it is possible to entertain the production by paying attention to the operating means to the player who is not interested in the operating means. You may be able to do it. In addition, it is possible to prevent unintended operations of the player and prevent the player from losing his or her willingness to play.

The operating means that may be used for the production may be an operating means capable of adjusting the volume of the sound output means (for example, a speaker), or an optical output means (for example, an LED, a lamp, a liquid crystal display device). It may be an operation means capable of adjusting the amount of light and the brightness of the light crystal.

Further, one of the plurality of types of displays is a fourth display (for example, a screen suggesting that the AT2 state has been determined), and the fourth display is displayed from the state in which the fourth display is displayed. It is configured to be transitionable to the state in which one display is displayed, and when the first operation is performed in the state where the fourth display is displayed, the decision regarding the first decision can be executed. It may be configured in.

With such a configuration, the decision regarding the first decision can be made smoothly. In addition, it is possible to provide a smooth decision method to a player who is accustomed to the game. In addition, it is possible to prevent unintended operations of the player and prevent the player from losing his or her willingness to play.

Further, the display of the second display can be started in the state where the fourth display is displayed, and the first display is displayed after the fourth display is started. If the first operation is performed while the second display, which was started before the display is displayed, is performed, even if the decision regarding the first decision is viablely configured. Good.

With such a configuration, the decision regarding the first decision can be made smoothly. In addition, it is possible to provide a smooth decision method to a player who is accustomed to the game. In addition, it is considered that the player who displays the second display without displaying the first display in a state where the first display can be displayed is not interested in the decision regarding the first display. It can be decided smoothly for such a player. In addition, it is possible to prevent unintended operations of the player and prevent the player from losing his or her willingness to play.

Further, it is provided with a lottery means (for example, a winning combination internal lottery process (step S104) shown in FIG. 10) for performing a lottery process relating to the internal winning of the winning combination and determining the lottery result, and the winning combination does not depend on the input of the game medium. Including a re-game combination capable of performing the re-game, and in a state where the execution of the re-game cannot be started, both the first display and the second display can be displayed. In the state where the execution of the re-game can be started, only the first display of the first display and the second display may be displayable.

Further, in the state where the execution of the re-game can be started and the first display is displayed, even if the first operation is performed, the decision regarding the first decision is not executed. It may be configured as follows.

Further, in the state where the execution of the re-game can be started and the fourth display is displayed, even if the first operation is performed, the decision regarding the first decision is not executed. It may be configured as follows.

Further, one of the plurality of types of displays is a third display (for example, the interlocking effect shown in FIG. 64), and the third display is a display composed of displays of a plurality of scenes. Yes, the display of the plurality of scenes includes the display of the first scene and the display of the second scene, and the display of the first scene is the first in the state where the first display is displayed. The display is started when the operation of is performed, and the display of the second scene is started when the first operation is performed in a state where the first display is not displayed. The display may be in some cases.

Further, a first game in which the number of bets on the game medium is the first number (for example, a three-card bet game) and a second game in which the number of bets on the game medium is the second number (for example, a two-card bet). The second number is different from the first number, and the first game is more advantageous to the player than the second game. It is a game, and in the first state in the first game, even if the first operation is performed, the decision regarding the first decision is not executed, and the second game is described. In the first state of the above, even if the first operation is performed, the decision regarding the first decision may not be executed.

With such a configuration, the player can easily grasp whether the game is played in the first game or the second game, depending on whether or not the decision regarding the first decision is executed. It may be possible to realize that the first game is more advantageous to the player than the second game.

Further, the game console (for example, the slot machine 100 shown in FIG. 1) according to the present invention (hereinafter, may be referred to as “the present invention 3-2”) is provided with display means capable of displaying a plurality of types of displays. It is a game table, and the game table is a slot machine, and the display of one of the plurality of types of displays is a display prompting an operation for the first decision (hereinafter, referred to as "first display", for example. , The first display d1 shown in FIG. 107 and the character selection operation screen cd1) shown in FIG. 103 (B), and the display of one of the plurality of types of displays prompts the operation for the second determination ( Hereinafter, it is referred to as “second display”. For example, the second display d2 shown in FIG. 107 and the volume adjustment screen sd1) shown in FIG. 103 (A), and one of the plurality of types of displays is displayed. The display after the determination regarding the first determination (hereinafter, referred to as “third display”; for example, the third display d3 shown in FIG. 107 and the character determination screen ed1 shown in FIG. 103 (B)). In the state where one display is displayed, the first operation (for example, a certain operation h1 shown in FIG. 107, the closing operation shown in FIG. 103 (B), the operation of the PUSH button 194, and the cross key 192 are provided. When any operation of a plurality of button operations or a plurality of operations among these operations is performed, the third display is configured to be displayable, and the first display is displayed. The display is configured to be able to start displaying the second display in the state, and the display is started after the first display is started and before the third display is displayed. In a state where the second display is displayed (hereinafter, referred to as "first state"), even if the first operation is performed, the third display is not displayed. It is a game table characterized by this. Note that FIG. 107 is a diagram showing an outline of Invention 3-2 of the present application.

According to the game console according to the invention 3-2 of the present application, the decision regarding the previous decision (decision regarding the first decision) can be made carefully. Also, after the second display, there is a risk of forgetting the contents of the first display, and the decision regarding the first display is not intended by the player (for example, it is first made at the start of the game). There are cases where it is inadvertently determined by an operation (inserting a medal into the insertion slot, pressing the insertion button), but prevent such an unintended operation of the player and prevent the player from losing his or her motivation to play. Is possible.

The game console according to the invention 3-2 of the present application is not limited to the configuration of the slot machine according to the present embodiment. Therefore, for example, when the first operation is performed in the first state, the display of the second display ends, and even if the first operation is performed after the display of the second display ends. It may be configured so that the third display is not displayed.

With such a configuration, it is possible to carefully make a decision regarding the earlier decision (decision regarding the first decision) even after the display of the operation display for the later decision is finished. This is because, after the second display, the previously displayed content (the content of the first display) may be forgotten, for example, the decision operation regarding the second display and the decision regarding the first display. If the operations are the same, an unintended decision may be made by repeatedly performing a decision operation (for example, a continuous hit operation). Also, even if the decision operation for the second display and the decision operation for the first display are not the same, it is not intended if the decision operation for the first display is inadvertently performed after the display of the second display. Decisions may be made. According to the present invention, it is possible to prevent such an unintended operation of the player and prevent the player from losing his or her willingness to play.

When the first operation is performed in the first state, the display of the second display ends, and after the display of the second display ends, the first display is performed during the first display. Even if the operation of is performed, the third display may not be displayed.

Further, when the first operation is performed in the first state, the display of the second display ends, and even if the first operation is performed after the display of the second display ends, the first operation is performed. Although the third display is not displayed, even if the third display is configured to be displayable when a certain operation different from the first operation (hereinafter, referred to as "second operation") is performed. Good.

With such a configuration, it is possible to give the player a sense of discomfort and make the decision regarding the previous decision (decision regarding the first decision) carefully. It can also give the player a sense of discomfort and save time, while reminding him of the first display. In addition, since the decision regarding the previous decision (decision regarding the first decision) may be made by the lever operation following the throwing operation, it is possible to provide a smooth decision method to the player who is accustomed to the game. it can. In addition, it is possible to prevent unintended operations of the player and prevent the player from losing his or her willingness to play.

When the first operation is performed in the first state, the display of the second display ends, and after the display of the second display ends, the first display is performed during the first display. The third display is not displayed even if the operation of (1) is performed, but when a certain operation (hereinafter referred to as "second operation") different from the first operation is performed, the third operation is performed. The display may be configured to be displayable.

Further, when the operation means (for example, the PUSH button 194 shown in FIG. 103 (B) or the like) that may be used for the effect is provided and the operation means is operated while the first display is displayed. , The third display can be displayed, and when the first operation is performed in the first state, the display of the second display ends, and after the display of the second display ends. When the operation of the operating means is performed, the third display may be configured to be displayable.

With such a configuration, it is possible to execute the decision regarding the first decision without being influenced by the display state by the operating means that may be used for the effect. In addition, since stable decisions can be made with the operating means that may be used for the production, it is possible to entertain the production by paying attention to the operating means to the player who is not interested in the operating means. You may be able to do it. In addition, it is possible to prevent unintended operations of the player and prevent the player from losing his or her willingness to play.

The operating means that may be used for the production may be an operating means capable of adjusting the volume of the sound output means (for example, a speaker), or an optical output means (for example, an LED, a lamp, a liquid crystal display device). It may be an operation means capable of adjusting the amount of light and the brightness of the light crystal.

Further, one of the plurality of types of displays is a fourth display (for example, a screen suggesting that the AT2 state has been determined), and the fourth display is displayed from the state in which the fourth display is displayed. It is configured to be able to shift to the state where one display is displayed, and when the first operation is performed while the fourth display is displayed, the third display can be displayed. It may have been.

With such a configuration, the decision regarding the first decision can be made smoothly. In addition, it is possible to provide a smooth decision method to a player who is accustomed to the game. In addition, it is possible to prevent unintended operations of the player and prevent the player from losing his or her willingness to play.

Further, the display of the second display can be started in the state where the fourth display is displayed, and the first display is displayed after the fourth display is started. If the first operation is performed in a state where the second display is displayed before the display is started, the third display may be configured to be displayable.

With such a configuration, the decision regarding the first decision can be made smoothly. In addition, it is possible to provide a smooth decision method to a player who is accustomed to the game. In addition, it is considered that the player who displays the second display without displaying the first display in a state where the first display can be displayed is not interested in the decision regarding the first display. It can be decided smoothly for such a player. In addition, it is possible to prevent unintended operations of the player and prevent the player from losing his or her willingness to play.

Further, it is provided with a lottery means (for example, a winning combination internal lottery process (step S104) shown in FIG. 10) for performing a lottery process relating to the internal winning of the winning combination and determining the lottery result, and the winning combination does not depend on the input of the game medium. Including a re-game combination capable of performing the re-game, and in a state where the execution of the re-game cannot be started, both the first display and the second display can be displayed. In the state where the execution of the re-game can be started, only the first display of the first display and the second display may be displayable.

Further, in the state where the execution of the re-game can be started and the first display is displayed, the third display is not displayed even if the first operation is performed. It may be configured.

Further, in the state where the execution of the re-game can be started and the fourth display is displayed, the third display is not displayed even if the first operation is performed. It may be configured.

Further, one of the plurality of types of displays is a fifth display (for example, the interlocking effect shown in FIG. 64), and the fifth display is a display composed of displays of a plurality of scenes. Yes, the display of the plurality of scenes includes the display of the first scene and the display of the second scene, and the display of the first scene is the first in the state where the first display is displayed. The display is started when the operation of is performed, and the display of the second scene is started when the first operation is performed in a state where the first display is not displayed. The display may be in some cases.

In addition, a game in which the number of bets on the game medium is the first number (hereinafter referred to as "first game"; for example, a three-card bet game) and a game in which the number of bets on the game medium is the second number (hereinafter referred to as "first game"). , "Second game". For example, a two-card betting game) is playable, and the second number is different from the first number and is different from the second game. The first game is more advantageous to the player, and even if the first operation is performed in the first state of the first game, the third display is not displayed. In the first state of the second game, even if the first operation is performed, the third display may not be displayed.

With such a configuration, the player can easily grasp whether the game is played in the first game or the second game, depending on whether or not the decision regarding the first decision is executed. It may be possible to realize that the first game is more advantageous to the player than the second game.

In the AT2 state (or AT1 state), points may be increased according to the small winning combination (display (title or item) according to the internal points may be displayed). Further, the advantage in the judge state may be changed according to the value. In addition, based on the points and the like accumulated by the player, a fanning effect may be performed in a game at the final stage such as the AT2 state, and the mode of the judge state may be determined or notified.

Further, in the case of the second game (two-card game), the points and items may be configured so as not to increase. Further, when the second game (two-card game) is configured not to display (skip) a specific scene, it may be configured not to display (skip) the fanning effect.

In addition, on a game table with specifications that the bonus symbols will be aligned unless the symbols are avoided, the operation navigation is performed in a displayable state (in the internal hit state, in the case of other than replay, it comes off, and it is not always pulled in). You may. In addition, when the symbols are aligned, the predetermined effect display is repeatedly performed (for example, the display of the still image is continued), and even if the final game of the advantageous section is reached at that time, the number of acquired sheets, etc. The result of is displayed. In addition, the predetermined effect may be continued even after the transition to the normal section (after the next game).

In addition, the default screen in the normal game state may be displayed after the bonus is completed without shifting to the advantageous section during the bonus. Further, during the bonus, the player may shift to a gaming state in which only the second game (two-card betting game) is possible. That is, in a game table having a specification in which bonus symbols are aligned unless the symbols are avoided, only the second game (two-card betting game) may be possible during the bonus. During the bonus, a game with 2 INs and 2 OUTs with a difference of 0 may be played over several tens of games, and the bonus may end when the payout exceeds a predetermined number (for example, 60). ..

Further, even if the value of the high navigation state counter remains 19 games during the bonus of the two-card game, it may be configured not to shift to the LMT state. Further, the ED effect may be started (or the ED effect is not performed) without shifting to the LMT state. Further, for example, if the bonus ends before the number of remaining games reaches 0, it may be possible to shift to the LMT state (or it may always shift, or when it shifts). There may be). In addition, even after the limiter is reached during the bonus and the player shifts to the low navigation state, the second game (two-card game) is forced, and the player is configured not to shift to the high navigation state during the game. Good.

Further, the game console according to the present invention can also be applied to an enclosed game machine. Here, the "enclosed game machine" circulates the game balls enclosed in the game machine. Further, the main control unit, the first sub control unit, and the second sub control unit may be configured by one chip, or the main control unit and the first sub control unit may be configured to enable bidirectional communication. Good. Further, while bidirectional communication is possible between the main control unit and the first sub control unit, communication from the first sub control unit to the second sub control unit may be one-way communication.

In addition, the actions and effects described in the embodiments of the present invention merely list the most suitable actions and effects resulting from the present invention, and the actions and effects according to the present invention are described in the embodiments of the present invention. It is not limited to what has been done. In addition, the range of the game may be further expanded by applying the content described in one configuration to the other configurations among the plurality of configurations described in the first to third embodiments.

The game console according to the present invention may be applied to a game console typified by a ball game machine (pachinko machine), a rotating body game machine (slot machine), an enclosed game machine, or a medalless slot machine. it can.

100 Slot machine 110-112 Reel 113 Design display window 130-132 Bet button 135 Start lever 137-139 Stop button 157 Directional image display device 192 Cross key 194 PUSH button 300 Main control unit 400 1st sub-control unit 500 2nd sub-control Department

Claims (2)

Operation means and
A control means for transitioning to one of a plurality of states including a normal state and an advantageous state, and
Display means that can display multiple types of display,
It is a game table equipped with
It is configured to be able to notify the operation information of the operation means.
The advantageous state is a state more advantageous than the normal state with respect to the notification of the operation information (hereinafter, referred to as "operation navigation").
The operation navigation is a navigation about the push order combination.
Equipped with a first counter for the advantageous state
The count value of the first counter (hereinafter referred to as "first count value") can be updated every time one game is played in the advantageous state.
It is configured to shift from the advantageous state to the normal state when one of a plurality of end conditions including the first end condition and the second end condition is satisfied.
The first end condition is a condition that can be satisfied when the first count value becomes the first specific value.
In the advantageous state, it is configured to be able to shift to any of a plurality of advantageous gaming states.
The advantageous gaming state of one of the plurality of advantageous gaming states is the first advantageous gaming state.
The first advantageous gaming state is an advantageous gaming state in which the operation navigation can be executed.
A second counter for the first advantageous gaming state is provided.
The count value of the second counter (hereinafter, referred to as "second count value") can be updated every time one game is played in the first advantageous game state.
Even when a game in which the push order is not won is performed in the first advantageous game state, the second count value is configured to be updatable.
The first game in which the number of bets on the game medium is the first number and the second game in which the number of bets on the game medium is the second number can be executed.
The second number is different from the first number,
In the advantageous state, the first game is more advantageous to the player than the second game.
One of the plurality of types of displays is a display including an image showing a certain value (hereinafter, referred to as "first display").
One of the plurality of types of displays is a display including an image representing the updated value of the certain value (hereinafter, referred to as "second display").
The certain value is a value related to the second count value.
When the execution of the first game is started after the first display is displayed in the first advantageous game state, both the first count value and the second count value are started. The count value is updated, and the second display can be displayed in the first game.
When the execution of the second game is started after the first display is displayed in the first advantageous game state, of the first count value and the second count value. Only the first count value is updated so that the second display is not displayed in the second game.
A third counter for counting the total number of game media acquired by the player based on the number of game media used and the number of game media paid out in the advantageous state is provided.
The count value of the third counter (hereinafter referred to as "third count value") can be updated every time one game is played in the advantageous state.
The second end condition is a condition that can be satisfied when the third count value reaches the second specific value.
Regardless of which of the first game and the second game is executed in the advantageous state, the third count value can be updated based on the result of the game. ,
It is equipped with a setting value setting means that can set one of multiple types of setting values.
One of the plurality of types of displays is a display (hereinafter referred to as "third display") that suggests the set value that has been set.
When the first game is performed in the advantageous state, the third display may be displayed.
When the second game is performed in the advantageous state, the third display may not be displayed.
A game table characterized by that. Operation means and
A game state setting means capable of setting any of a plurality of states including a normal state and an advantageous state, and
Display means that can display multiple types of display,
A notification means capable of notifying the operation information of the operation means and
A setting value setting means that can set any one of multiple types of setting values, and
It is a game table equipped with
An advantageous game state control means capable of executing control regarding the advantageous state, and
A plurality of counters, including a first counter, a second counter, and a third counter for the advantageous state,
A bet number setting means capable of setting any one of a plurality of bets including a first bet number and a second bet number smaller than the first bet number in order to start one game. When,
With
The advantageous state is a state more advantageous than the normal state with respect to the notification of the operation information (hereinafter, referred to as "operation navigation").
The operation navigation is a navigation about the push order combination.
In the advantageous state, the game with the first bet number (hereinafter, referred to as "first game") is more game than the game with the second bet number (hereinafter, referred to as "second game"). It ’s an advantageous game for people,
The advantageous game state control means is a means capable of executing control to update the count value of the first counter (hereinafter, referred to as “first count value”) each time one game is played in the advantageous state. And
When the end condition of one of a plurality of end conditions including the first end condition and the second end condition is satisfied, the game state setting means ends the setting of the advantageous state and sets the normal state. It is a configurable means
The first end condition is a condition that can be satisfied when the first count value becomes the first specific value.
The advantageous gaming state control means
In the advantageous state, it is possible to execute control for setting any advantageous gaming state among a plurality of advantageous gaming states including the first advantageous gaming state.
It is a means capable of executing control to update the count value of the second counter (hereinafter, referred to as “second count value”) each time one game is played in the first advantageous game state.
The first advantageous gaming state is an advantageous gaming state in which the operation navigation can be executed.
Even when a game in which the push order is not won is performed in the first advantageous game state, the second count value is configured to be updatable.
The display means displays, as one of the plurality of types of displays, a display including an image showing a certain value (hereinafter, referred to as "first display"), and an updated value of the certain value. By means capable of displaying a display including a representative image (hereinafter referred to as "second display") and a certain display suggesting the set value (hereinafter referred to as "third display"). Yes,
The certain value is a value related to the second count value.
After the first display is displayed in the first advantageous gaming state,
When the execution of the first game is started, the count values of both the first count value and the second count value are updated by the advantageous game state control means, and in the first game, the count values are updated. The display means is configured to display the second display.
When the execution of the second game is started, only the first count value of the first count value and the second count value is updated by the advantageous game state control means, and the first count value is updated. In the second game, the display means is configured so that the second display is not displayed.
The third counter is a counter that counts the total number of game media acquired by the player based on the number of game media used and the number of game media paid out in the advantageous state.
The advantageous game state control means is a means capable of executing control to update the count value of the third counter (hereinafter, referred to as “third count value”) each time one game is played in the advantageous state. Yes,
The second end condition is a condition that can be satisfied when the third count value reaches the second specific value.
The advantageous game state control means has the third count value based on the result of the game regardless of which of the first game and the second game is executed in the advantageous state. Is a viable means of controlling to update
When the first game is performed in the advantageous state, the display means may display the third display.
When the second game is performed in the advantageous state, the display means is configured so that the third display is not displayed.
A game table characterized by that.